Список литературы

Abraham, K. (1911). Notes on the psychoanalytic investigation and treatment of manic-depressive insanity and allied conditions. In Selected papers on psychoanalysis, pp. 137-56. Hogarth Press and Institute of Psychoanalysis, London (1927).

Abrahamson, L. Y., Seligman, M. E. P., and Teasdale, J. (1978). Learned helplessness in humans: critique and reformulation. Journal of Abnormal Psychology 87, 49–74.

Abramowitz, S. I. (1986). Psychosocial outcomes of sex reassignment surgery. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 54, 183-9.

Abrams, R., Taylor, M. A., Faber, R., Ts’o, T. O. T., Williams, R. A., and Almy, G. (1983). Bilateral versus unilateral electroconvulsive therapy: efficacy in melancholia. American Journal of Psychiatry 140, 463-50.

Acheson,E. D. (1959). The clinical syndrome variously called benign myalgic encephalomyelitis, Iceland disease and epidemic neuromyasthenia. American Journal of Medicine 26, 569-95.

Achté, K. A., Hillbom, E., and Aalberg, V. (1969). Psychoses following war brain injuries. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 45, 1-18.

Acker, W., Aps, E. J., Majumdar, S. K., Shaw, D. K. and Thomson, A. D. (1982). The relationship between brain and liver damage in chronic alcohol patients. Journal of Neurology; Neurosurgery and Psychiatry 45, 984-7.

Acker, W., Ron, M. A., Lishman, W. A., and Shaw, G. K. (1984). A multivariate analysis of psychological clinical and CT scanning measures in detoxified chronic alcoholics. British Journal of Addiction 79, 293–301.

Ackerknecht, E. H. (1968). A short history of psychiatry. Hefner, New York.

Ackerman, N. W. (1958). The psychodynamics of family life. Basic Books, New York.

Ackner, B. (1954a). Depersonalization: I. Aetiology and phenomenology. Journal of Mental Science 100, 939-53.

Ackner, B. (1954b). Depersonalization: II. The clinical syndromes. Journal of Mental Science 100, 954-72.

Ackner, B., and Oldham, A. J. (1962). Insulin treatment of schizophrenia. A three year follow up of a controlled study. Lancet i, 504-6.

Ackner, B., Cooper, J. E., Gray, C. H., and Kelly, M. (1962). Acute porphyria, a neuro-psychiatric and biochemical study. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 6, 1-24.

Adam, K., Adamson, L., Brezinová, V., Hunter, W. M., and Oswald, I. (1976). Nitrazepam: lastingly effective but trouble on withdrawal. British Medical Journal i, 1558-60.

Adelstein, A. and Mardon, C. (1975). Suicide 1961–1974: an analysis of trends following the Suicide Act of 1961. Population Trends 2, 13–19.

Adelstein, A. and White, G. (1976). Alcoholism and mortality. Population Trends 6, 7-13.

Ader, R. (1976). Psychosomatic research in animals. In Modern trends in psychosomatic medicine (ed. O. W. Hill). Butterworths, London.

Adler, A. (1943). Neuropsychiatric complications in victims of Boston’s Coconut Grove disaster. Journal of the American Medical Association 123, 1098-11.

Aduan, R. P., Fauci, A. S., Dale, D. C., Herzberg, J. H. and Wolff, S. M. (1979). Factitious fever and self-induced infection: a report of 32 cases and review of the literature. Annals of Internal Medicine 90, 230-42.

Advisory Committee on Drug Dependence (1968). Cannabis. HMSO, London.

Agras, S., Sylvester, D., and Oliveau, D. (1969). The epidemiology of common fears and phobias. Comprehensive Psychiatry 10, 151-6.

Alanen, Y. O. (1958). The mothers of schizophrenic patients. Acta Psychiatrica Neurologica Scandinavica 33, Suppl., 124.

Alanen, Y. O. (1970). The families of schizophrenic patients. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine 63, 227-30.

Albert, M. L., Feldman, R. G., and Willis, A. L. (1974). The ’sub-cortical dementia’ of progressive supranuclear palsy. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and Psychiatry 37, 121-30.

Alderson, M. R. (1985). National trends in self poisoning in women. Lancet i, 974-75.

Alexander, D. A. (1972). ’Senile Dementia’ A changing perspective. British Journal of Psychiatry 121, 207-14.

Alexander, F. (1950). Psychosomatic medicine. W. W. Norton, New York.

Allderidge, P. (1979). Hospitals, madhouses and asylums: cycles in the care of the insane. British Journal of Psychiatry 134, 321-4.

Allebeck, P. and Wisledt, B. (1986). Mortality in schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry 43, 650-3.

Allen, C. (1969). A textbook of psychosexual disorders (2nd edn). Oxford University Press, London.

Alter-Reid, K. A., Gibbs, M. S., Lachenmeyer, J. R., Sigal, J., and Massoll, N. A. (1986). Sexual abuse of children: a review of the empirical findings. Clinical Psychology Review 6,249-66.

Alzheimer, A. (1897). Beitrage zur pathologischen Anatomie der Hirnrinde und zur anatomischen Grundlage einiger Psychosen. Monatsschrift für Psychiatrie und Neurologie 2, 82-120.

Ambrosini, P. J. and Puig-Antich, J. (1985). Major depression in children and adolescents. In. The clinical guide to child psychiatry (ed. D. Shaffer, A. A. Ehrhardt, and L. L. Greenhill). Free Press, New York.

American Psychiatric Association (1980). Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (3rd edn, revised). American Psychiatric Association, Washington, DC.

American Psychiatric Association (1987). Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (3rd edn). American Psychiatric Association, Washington, DC.

Amies, P. L., Gelder, M. G., and Shaw, P. M. (1983). Social phobia: a comparative clinical study. British Journal of Psychiatry 142, 174-9.

Amir, M. (1971). Patterns in forcible rape. Chicago University Press, Chicago.

Ammerman, R. T., Van Hasselt, V. B., and Herson, M. (1986). Psychological adjustment of visually handicapped children and youth. Clinical Psychological Review 6, 67–85.

Amsterdam, J. D., Winokur, A., Lucki, I., Caroff, S., Snyder, P., and Rickels, K. (1983). A neuroendocrine test battery in bipolar patients and healthy subjects. Archives of General Psychiatry 40, 515-21.

Ananth and Luchins, D. (1977). A review of combined tricyclic and MAOI therapy. Comprehensive Psychiatry 18, 221-30.

Anderson, E. W. (1933). A study of the sexual life in psychoses associated with childbearing. Journal of Mental Science 79, 137-49.

Anderson, H. R., Dick, B., MacNair, R. S., Palmer, J. C., and Ramsey, J. D. (1982). An investigation of 140 deaths associated with volatile substance abuse in the United Kingdom (1971–1981). Human Toxicology 1, 207-21.

Anderson, K. O., Bradley, L. A., Young, L. D., McDaniel, L. K., and Wise, C. M. (1985). Rheumatoid arthritis: review of psychological factors related to etiology, effects and treatment. Psychological Bulletin 98, 358-87.

Anderton, B. H. (1987). Tangled genes and proteins. Nature 329, 106-7.

Andreasen, N. J. C. (1977). Reliability and validity of proverb interpretation to assess mental status. Comprehensive Psychiatry 18, 465-72.

Andreasen, N. J. C. (1982). Negative versus positive schizophrenia: definition and validation. Archives of General Psychiatry 36, 1325-30.

Andreasen, N. J. C. (1985). Post-traumatic stress disorder. In Comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (4th edn). Vol. 3 (H. I. Kaplan and B. J. Sadock). Wilhams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Andreasen, N. J. C. (ed.) (1986). Can schizophrenia be localized in the brain? American Psychiatric Press, Washington DC.

Andreasen, N. J. C. (1987). The diagnosis of schizophrenia. Schizophrenia Bulletin 13, 9-22.

Andreasen, N. J. C. and Norris, A. S. (1972). Management of emotional reactions in severely burned adults. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 154, 352-62.

Andreasen, N. J. C., Olsen, S. A., Dennant, J. W., and Smith, M. R. (1982). Ventricular enlargement in schizophrenia: relationship to positive and negative symptoms. American Journal of Psychiatry 139, 297–302.

Angold, A. (1988). Childhood and adolescent depression: 1. Epidemiological aspects. British Journal of Psychiatry 152, 601-17.

Angst, J. (1966). Zur Aetiologie und Nosologie endogener depressiver Psychosen. Monographien aus dem Gesamtgebiete der Neurologie und Psychiatrie 112. Springer, Berlin.

Angst, J., Baastrup, P., Grof, P., Hippius, H., Pöldinger, W., and Weiss, P. (1973). The course of monopolar depression and bipolar psychosis. Psychiatrica, Neurologica, Neurochirurgia 76, 486–500.

Annals of Internal Medicine (1985). Health implications of obesity. NIH Health consensus development conference. Annals of Internal Medicine 103, 981-1077.

Anonymous (1984). Lithium and the kidney revisited Biological Therapies in Psychiatry 7, 9-12.

Anthony, E. J. (1957). An experimental approach to the psychopathology of childhood encopresis. British Journal of Medical Psychology 30, 146-75.

Anthony, W. A. and Liberman, R. P. (1986). The practice of psychiatric rehabilitation: historical, conceptual, and research base. Schizophrenia Bulletin 13, 542-9.

Apley, J. and Hale, B. (1973). Children with recurrent abdominal pain: how do they grow up? British Medical Journal ii, 7–9.

Arie, T. (ed.) (1985). Recent advances in psychogeriatrics. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Arieti, S. (1974). Individual psychotherapy for schizophrenia. In American handbook of psychiatry (ed. S. Arieti). Vol. III, Chapter 27. Basic Books, New York.

Arieti, S. (1977). Psychotherapy of severe depression. American Journal of Psychiatry 134, 864-8.

Armor, D. J., Polich, J. M., and Stambul, H. B. (1976). Alcoholism and treatment Rand Corporation and Wiley Interscience, Santa Monica.

Armstrong, C. N. (1966). Treatment of wrongly assigned sex. British Medical Journal ii, 1225-6.

Arnetz, B. B., Horte, L. G., Hedberg, A., Theorell, T., Allender, E., and Malker, H. (1987). Suicide patterns among physicians related to other academics as well as to the general population. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 75, 139-43.

Arrindell, W. A. and Emelkamp, P. M. G. (1985). Psychological profile of the spouse of the female agoraphobic patient: personality and symptoms. British Journal of Psychiatry 146, 405-14.

Arroyave, F., Cooper, S. E., and Harris, A. D. (1980). The role of detoxification in alcoholism: three years’ results from the Oxford unit. Health Trends 12, 36-8.

Arthur, A. Z. (1964). Theories and explanations of delusions: a review. American Journal of Psychiatry 121, 105-15.

Asberg, M., Crönholm, B., Sjöqvist, F., and Tuck, D. (1971). Relationship between plasma level and therapeutic effect of nortriptyline. British Medical Journal iii, 331-4.

Asher, R. (1949). Myxoedematous madness. British Medical Journal ii, 555-62.

Asher, R. (1951). Munchausen’s syndrome. Lancet i, 339-41.

Ashton, J. R. and Donnan, S. (1981). Suicide by burning as an epidemic phenomenon: an analysis of 82 deaths and inquests in England and Wales 1978–1979. Psychological Medicine 11, 735-9.

Asperger, H. (1944). Die ’Autistischen Psychopathien’ Kindesalter. Archives für Psychiatrie und Nervenkrankheiten 117, 76-136.

Assal, J. P., Muhlhausar, I., Demet, A., Gfeller, R., Jorgens, V., and Berger, M. (1985). Patient education as the basis for diabetes care in clinical practice and research. Diabetologia 28, 602-13.

Astrup, C. and 0degaard, 0. (I960). Internal migration and mental disease in Norway. Psychiatric Quarterly 34, supp. 116.

Avni, J. (1980). The severe bums. In Advances in psychosomatic medicine (ed. H. Frey burger), Vol. 10. Karger, Basel.

Aylon, T. and Azrin, N. H. (1968). The token economy: a motivational system for therapy and rehabilitation. Appleton-Century-Crofts, New York.

Babcock, H. (1930). An experiment in the measurement of mental deterioration. Archives of Psychology 117, 5-105.

Bachrach, L. L. (1986). De-institutionalization: What do the numbers mean? Hospital and Community Psychiatry 37, 118-21.

Bach-y-Rita, G., Lion, J. R., Climent, C. E., and Ervin, F. R. (1971). Episodic dyscontrol: a study of 130 violent patients. American Journal of Psychiatry 127, 1473-8.

Baddeley, A. D. (1976). The psychology of memory. Harper and Row, New York.

Bagley, C. (1968). The evaluation of a suicide prevention scheme by an ecological method. Social Science and Medicine 2, 1-14.

Bailey, V., Graham, P., and Boniface, D. (1978). How much child psychiatry does a general practitioner do? Journal of the Royal College of General Practitioners 28, 621-6.

Baker, R., Hall, J. N., and Hutchinson, K. (1974). A token economy project with chronic schizophrenic patients. British Journal of Psychiatry 124, 367-84.

Baker, T. and Duncan, S. (1986). Child sexual abuse. In: Recent Advances in Paediatrics VIII (ed. R. Meadow). Churchill Livingstone, London.

Bakwin, H. (1961). Enuresis in children. Journal of Paediatrics 58, 806-19.

Baldessarini, R. J. (1984). Treatment of depression by altering monoamine metabolism: precursors and metabolic inhibitors. Psychopharmacology Bulletin 20, 224-39.

Baldwin, J. A. and Oliver, J. E. (1975). Epidemiology and family characteristics of severely abused children. British Journal of Preventive and Social Medicine 29, 205-21.

Bale, R. N. (1973). Brain damage in diabetes mellitus. British Journal of Psychiatry 122, 337-41.

Balint, M. (1957). The doctor, his patient and the illness. Pitman Medical, London.

Balint, M., Hunt, J., Joyce, D., Marinker, M., and Woodcock, J. (1970). Treatment or diagnosis: a study of repeat prescriptions in general practice. Tavistock, London.

Ball, J. R. B. and Kiloh, L. G. (1959). A controlled trial of imipramine in the treatment of depressive states. British Medical Journal ii 1052-5.

Ballinger, C. B. (1977). Psychiatric morbidity and the menopause: survey of a gynaecological out-patient clinic. British Journal of Psychiatry 131, 83-9.

Ban, T. A. (1982). Chronic schizophrenias: a guide to Leonhard’s classification. Comprehensive Psychiatry 23, 155-69.

Bancroft, J. H. J. (1974). Deviant sexual behaviour: modification and assessment. Oxford University Press.

Bancroft, J. H. J. (1975). Homosexuality in the male. In Contemporary psychiatry (ed. T. Silverstone and B. Barraclough). British Journal of Psychiatry, Special Publication No. 9. London.

Bancroft, J. H. J. (1983). Human sexuality and its problems. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Bancroft, J. H. J. (1986). Crisis intervention. In: An introduction to the psychotherapies (ed. S. Bloch) (2nd edn). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Bancroft, J. H. J. and Coles, L. (1976). Three years experience in sexual problems clinic. British Medical Journal i, 1575-7.

Bancroft, J. H. J. and Marks, I. M. (1968). Electric aversion therapy for sexual deviations. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine 61, 796-9.

Bancroft, J. H. J., Reynolds, F., Simkin, S., and Smith, J. (1975). Self-poisoning and self-injury in the Oxford area. British Journal of Preventive and Social Medicine 29, 170-7.

Bancroft, J. H. J., Skrimshire, A. M., Casson, J., Harvard-Watts, O., and Reynolds, F. (1977). People who deliberately poison or injure themselves: their problems and their contacts with helping agencies. Psychological Medicine 7, 289–303.

Bancroft, J. H. J., Simkins, S., Kingston, B., et al. (1979). The reasons people give for taking overdoses: a further inquiry. British Journal of Medical Psychology 52, 353-65.

Bancroft, J. H. J., Tyrer, G., and Warner, P. (1982). The classification of sexual problems in women. British Journal of Sexual Medicine 9, 30-7.

Bancroft, J. H. H., Dickerson, M., Fairbum, C. G., et al. (1986). Sex therapy outcome research: a reappraisal of methodology. Psychological Medicine 16, 851-63.

Bandura, A. (1962). Social learning through imitation. In Nebraska symposium on motivation (ed. M. R. Jones). University of Nebraska Press, Lincoln.

Bandura, A. (1969). Principles of behaviour modification. Holt, Rinehart and Winston, New York.

Bandura, A. (1971). Psychotherapy based on modelling principles. In Handbook of psychotherapy and behaviour change (ed. A. E. Bergin and S. Garfield). Wiley, New York.

Bankowski, Z. and Carballo, M. (1986). Battered children— child abuse. World Health Organization and Council for International Organizations of Medical Sciences, Berne.

Banks, M. H. and Jackson, P. R. (1982). Unemployment and risk of minor psychiatric disorder in young people: crosssectional and longitudinal evidence. Psychological Medicine 12, 789-98.

Bannister, D. (1960). Conceptual structure in thought disordered schizophrenics. Journal of Mental Science 106, 1236-49.

Bannister, D. (1962). The nature and measurement of schizophrenic thought disorder. Journal of Mental Science 108, 825-42.

Bannister, D. and Fransella, F. (1966). A grid test of schizophrenic thought disorder. British Journal of Social and Clinical Psychology 5, 95-102.

Baraitser, M. (1986). Chromosomes and mental retardation. Psychological Medicine 16, 487-95.

Barber, T. X. (1962). Towards a theory of hypnosis: posthypnotic behaviour. Archives of General Psychiatry 1, 321-42.

Barbor, T. F., Ritson, E. B., and Hodgson, R. J. (1986). Alcohol-related problems in the primary health care setting: a review of early intervention strategies. British Journal of Addiction 81, 23–46.

Barcha, R., Stewart, M. A., and Guze, S. B. (1968). The prevalence of alcoholism among general hospital ward patients. American Journal of Psychiatry 125, 681-4.

Barette, J. and Marsden, C. D. (1979). Attitudes of families to some aspects of Huntington’s chorea. Psychological Medicine 9, 327-36.

Barker, J. C. (1962). The hospital addiction syndrome (Munchausen syndrome). Journal of Mental Science 108, 167-82.

Barker, J. C. and Barker, A. A. (1959). Deaths associated with electroplexy. Journal of Mental Science 105, 339-48.

Barker, M. G. (1968). Psychiatric illness after hysterectomy. British Medical Journal ii, 91-5.

Barker, P. (1971). Basic child psychiatry. Staples Press, London.

Barnes, J. (1967). Rape and other sexual offences. British Medical Journal i, 293-4.

Barnes, T. R. E. and Braude, W. M. (1985). Akathisia variants and tardive dyskinesia. Archives of General Psychiatry 42, 874-8.

Barraclough, B. M. (1973). Differences between national suicide rates. British Journal of Psychiatry 122, 95-6.

Barraclough, B. M. (1981). Suicide and epilepsy. In Epilepsy and psychiatry (ed. E. H. Reynolds and M. R. Trimble). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Barraclough, B. M. (1987). The suicide rate of epilepsy. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 76, 339-45.

Barraclough, B. M. and Mitchell-Heggs, N. A. (1978). Use of neurosurgery for psychological disorder in the British Isles during 1974-6. British Medical Journal ii, 1591-3.

Barraclough, B. M. and Shea, M. (1970). Suicide and Samaritan clients. Lancet ii, 868-70.

Barraclough, B. M., and Shepherd, D. M. (1976). Public interest: private grief. British Journal of Psychiatry 129, 109-13.

Barraclough, B. M., Bunch, J., Nelson, B., and Sainsbury, P. (1974). A hundred cases of suicide: clinical aspects. British Journal of Psychiatry 125, 355-73.

Barrash, J., Kroll, J., Carey, K., and Sines, L. (1983). Discriminating borderline personality disorder from other personality disorders: cluster analysis of the diagnostic interview for borderlines. Archives of General Psychiatry 40, 1297-302.

Barsky, A. J. and Klerman, G. L. (1983). Overview: hypochondriasis, bodily complaints and somatic styles. American Journal of Psychiatry 140, 273-83.

Barsky, A. J., Wyshak, G., and Klerman, G. L. (1986). Hypochondriasis: an evaluation of the DSMIII criteria medical out-patients. Archives of General Psychiatry 43, 493–500.

Bartlett, J., Bridges, P., and Kelly, D. (1981). Contemporary indications for psychosurgery. British Journal of Psychiatry 138, 507-11.

Barton, R. (1959). Institutional neurosis. John Wright, Bristol.

Baruk, H. (1959). Delusions of passion. Reprinted (1974) in Themes and variations in European psychiatry (ed. S. R. Hirsch and M. Shepherd), pp. 375-84. Wright, Bristol.

Basmajian, J. V. (ed.) (1983). Biofeedback: principles and practice for clinicians. Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Bass, C. and Wade, C. (1984). Chest pain with normal coronary arteries: a comparative study of psychiatric and social morbidity. Psychological Medicine 14, 51–61.

Bateson, G., Jackson, D., Haley, J., and Weakland, J. (1956). Towards a theory of schizophrenia. Behavioral Science 1, 251-64.

Bayer, R. and Spitzer, R. L. (1985). Neurosis, psychodynamics and DSMIII. Archives of General Psychiatry 42, 187-96.

Beal, M. F., Benoit, R., Majurek, M., Bird, E. D., and Martin, J. B. (1986). Somatostatin 28 1-12 like immunoreaction is reduced in Alzheimer’s disease cerebral cortex. Brain Research 368, 380-3.

Beaubrun, M. H. and Knight, F. (1973). Psychiatric assessment of 30 chronic users of cannabis and 30 matched controls. American Journal of Psychiatry 130, 309-11.

Bebbington, P. E., Sturt, E., Tennant, C., and Hurry, J. (1984). Misfortune and resilience: a community study of women. Psychological Medicine 14, 347-63.

Beck, A. T. (1967). Depression: clinical experimental and theoretical aspects. Harper and Row, New York.

Beck, A. T. (1976). Cognitive therapy and the emotional disorders. International Universities Press, New York.

Beck, A. T., Laude, R., and Bohnert, M. (1974a). Ideational components of anxiety neuroses. Archives of General Psychiatry 31, 319-25.

Beck, A. T., Schuyler, D., and Herman, I. (1974b). Development of suicide intent scales. In The prediction of suicide (ed. A. T. Beck, H. L. P. Resaik, and D. J. Lettie). Charles Press, Maryland.

Beck, A. T., Rush, A. J., Shaw, B. F., and Emery, G. (1979). Cognitive therapy of depression. Guilford Press, New York.

Beck, A. T., Hollon, S. D., Young, J. E., Bedrosian, R. C., and Budenz, D. (1985a). Treatment of depression with cognitive therapy and amitriptyline. Archives of General Psychiatry 42, 142-8.

Beck, A. T., Steer, R. A., Kovacs, M., and Garrison, B. (1985b). Hopelessness and eventual suicide: a 10-year prospective study of patients hospitalised with suicidal ideation. American Journal of Psychiatry 145, 559-63.

Beech, H. R., Watts, F., and Poole, A. D. (1971). Classical conditioning of a sexual deviation: a preliminary note. Behaviour Therapy 2, 400-2.

Beecher, H. K. (1956). Relationship of significance of wound to the pain experienced. Journal of the American Medical Association 161, 1609-13.

Beidel, D. C. (1987). Psychological factors in organ transplantation. Clinical Psychology Review 7, 677-94.

Benaim, S., Horder, J., and Anderson, J. (1973). Hysterical episode in a classroom. Psychological Medicine 3, 366-73.

Bender, L. and Grugett, A. A. (1952). A follow up report on children who had atypical sexual experiences. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry 22, 825-37.

Bendz, H. (1983). Kidney function in lithium treated patients: a literature survey. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 68, 303-24.

Benedetti, G. (1952). Die Alkoholhalluzinosen. Thieme, Stuttgart.

Benjamin, H. (1966). The transsexual phenomenon. Julian Press, New York.

Bennett, D. H. (1983). The historical development of rehabilitation services. In The theory and practice of rehabilitation (ed. F. N. Watts and D. H. Bennett). Wiley, Chichester.

Bennie, E. H. (1975). Lithium in depression. Lancet i, 216.

Berg, I. (1981). Child psychiatry and enuresis. British Journal of Psychiatry 139, 247-8.

Berg, I. (1982). When truants and school refusers grow up. British Journal of Psychiatry 141, 208-10.

Berg I. (1984). School refusal. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 31, 59–62.

Berg, I. and Jackson, A. (1985). Teenage school refusers grow up: a follow-up study of 168 subjects, ten years on average after in-patient treatment. British Journal of Psychiatry 147, 366-70.

Berg, J. M. (1965). Aetiological aspects of mental subnormality: pathological factors. In Mental deficiency: the changing outlook (ed. A. D. B. Clarke and A. M. Clarke) (2nd edn). Methuen, London.

Berger, M. (1985). Temperament and individual differences. In Child and adolescent psychiatry: modern approaches (ed. M. Rutter and L. Hersov) (2nd edn). Blackwell Scientific, Oxford.

Bergin, A. E. and Lambert, M. J. (1978). The evaluation of therapeutic outcomes. In Handbook of psychotherapy and behaviour change (ed. S. L. Garfield and A. E. Bergin) (2nd edn). John Wiley, New York.

Bergman, H., Borg, S., Hindmarsh, T., Idestrom, C. -M., and Mutzell, S. (1980). Computed tomography of the brain and neuropsychological assessement of male alcoholic patients. In Addiction and brain damage (ed. D. Richter), pp. 201-14. Croom Helm, London.

Bergmann, K., Foster, E. M., Justice, A. W., and Matthews, V. (1978). Management of the demented patient in the community. British Journal of Psychiatry 132, 441-9.

Berne, E. (1966). Games people play. André Deutsch, London.

Bernstein, D. A. and Borkovec, T. D. (1973). Progressive relaxation training: a manual for the helping professions. Research Press, Champaign, Illinois.

Berridge, V. and Edwards, G. (1981). Opium and the people. Allen Lane, London.

Berrios, G. E. (1981a). Stupor: a conceptual history. Psychological Medicine 11, 677-88.

Berrios, G. E. (1981b). Delirium and confusion in the 19th century. British Journal of Psychiatry 139, 439-49.

Berrios, G. E. (1985). Delusional parasitosis and physical disease. Comprehensive Psychiatry 26, 395–403.

Berrios, G. E. (1987). Dementia during the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries: a conceptual history. Psychological Medicine 17, 829-37.

Berson, R. J. (1983). Capgras’ syndrome. American Journal of Psychiatry 140, 969-78.

Bertelsen, A., Harvald, B., and Hauge, M. (1977). A Danish twin study of manic depressive disorders. British Journal of Psychiatry 130, 330-51.

Beskow, J., Gottfries, C. G., Roos, B. -E., and Winblad, B. (1976). Determination of monoamines and monoamine metabolites in human brain: post mortem studies in a group of suicides and a control group. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 53, 7-20.

Betts, T. A., Clayton, A. B., and Mackay, G. M. (1972). Effects of four commonly-used tranquillizers on low-speed driving performance tests. British Medical Journal iv, 580-4.

Beumont, P. J. V., George G. C. W., and Smart, D. E. (1976). ’Dieters’ and ’vomiters and purgers’ in anorexia nervosa. Psychological Medicine 6, 617-22.

Beumont, P. J. V., Abram, S. F., and Simson, J. G. (1981). The psychosexual histories of adolescent girls and young women with anorexia nervosa. Psychological Medicine 11, 131-40.

Bewley, B. (1986). The epidemiology of adolescent behaviour problems. British Medical Bulletin 42, 200-3.

Bianchi, G. N. (1971). Patterns of hypochondriasis: a principal components analysis. British Journal of Psychiatry 122, 541-8.

Bibring, E. (1953). The mechanism of depression. In Affective disorders (ed. P. Greenacre), pp. 14–47. International Universities Press, New York.

Bicknell, J. (1975). Pica: a childhood symptom. Institute for Research into Mental and Multiple Handicap, Monograph 3, Butterworths, London.

Bicknell, J. (1982). Living with a mentally handicapped member of the family. Postgraduate Medical Journal 58, 597–605.

Bieber, I. (1962). Homosexuality: a psychoanalytic study of male homosexuals. Basic Books, New York.

Bille, M. and Juel-Nielsen, N. (1968). Incidence of neurosis in psychiatric and other medical services in a Danish county. Danish Medical Bulletin 10, 172-6.

Billings, E. G. (1936). Teaching psychiatry in the medical school general hospital. Journal of the American Medical Association 107, 635-9.

Bilodeau, C. B. and O’Connor, S. O. (1978). Role of nurse clinicians in liaison psychiatry. In Handbook of general hospital psychiatry (ed. T. P. Hackett and N. H. Cassem). Mosby, St. Louis.

Binet, A. (1877). Le fétishisme dans l’amour. Revue Philosophique 24, 143.

Binet, A. and Simon, T. (1905). Méthodes nouvelles pour le diagnostic du niveau intellectuel des normaux. L’Année Psychologique 11, 193–244.

Binswanger, O. (1894). Münchener Medizinische Wochenschrift 52, 252.

Bion, W. R. (1961). Experiences in groups. Tavistock Publications, London.

Birnbaum, K. (1908). Psychosen mit Wahnbildung und wahnhafte Einbildungen bei Degenerativen. Marhold, Halle.

Birren, J. E. and Sloane, R. B. (1980). Handbook of mental health and ageing. Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs.

Bishop, D. V. M. (1987). The causes of specific developmental language disorder (’Developmental dysphasia’). Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 28, 1–8.

Black, D. (1986). Schoolgirl mothers. British Medical Journal 293, 1047.

Blackburn, I. M., Bishop, S., Glen, A. I. M., Whalley, L. J., and Christie, J. E. (1981). The efficacy of cognitive therapy on depression: a treatment trial using cognitive therapy and pharmacotherapy, each alone and in combination. British Journal of Psychiatry 139, 181-9.

Blacker, K. H., Jones, R. T., Stone, G. C., and Pfefferbaum, D. (1968). Chronic users of LSD: the ’acid heads’. American Journal of Psychiatry 125, 341-8.

Blackwell, B., Galbraith, J. R., and Dahl, D. S. (1984). Chronic pain management. Hospital and Community Psychiatry 10, 999-1008.

Blanchard, E. B. (1986). Management of chronic headaches. Pergamon Press, Oxford.

Blanchard, E. B. and Miller, S. T. (1977). Psychological treatment of cardiovascular disease. Archives of General Psychiatry 34, 1402-13.

Blanchard, E. B., Ahles, T. A., and Shaw, E. R. (1979). Behavioural treatment of headaches. Progress in Behaviour Modification 8, 207-48.

Blazer, D. G. (1986). Suicide in late life: Review and commentary. Journal of the American Geriatric Society 34, 519-25.

Bleuler, E. (1906). Affektivität, Suggestibility, and Paranoia. Marhold, Halle.

Bleuler, E. (1911). (English edition 1950). Dementia praecox or the group of schizophrenias. International University Press, New York.

Bleuler, E. (1924). Textbook of psychiatry (translated by A. A. Brill). Macmillan, New York.

Bleuler, M. (1951). Psychiatry of cerebral disease. British Medical Journal ii, 1233-8.

Bleuler, M. (1972). (English edition 1978). The schizophrenic disorders: long term patient and family studies. Yale Universities Press, New Haven.

Bleuler, M. (1974). The long term course of the schizophrenic psychoses. Psychological medicine 4, 244-54.

Bliss, E. L., Clark, L. D., and West, C. D. (1959). Studies of sleep deprivation: relationship to schizophrenia. Archives of Neurology and Psychiatry 81, 348-59.

Bloch, S. (1979). Assessment of patients for psychotherapy. British Journal of Psychiatry 135, 193–208.

Bloch, S. (1986). Supportive psychotherapy. In An introduction to the psychotherapies (ed. S. Bloch) (2nd edn). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Bloch, S. and Chodoff, P. (1981). Psychiatric ethics. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Bloch, S. and Crouch, E. (1985). Therapeutic factors in group psychotherapy. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Bloch, S., Crouch, E., and Rebstein, J. (1981). Therapeutic factors in group psychotherapy: a review. Archives of General Psychiatry 38, 519-26.

Bluglass, R. (1978). Regional secure units and interim security for psychiatric patients. British Medical Journal i, 489-93.

Bluglass, R. (1979a). The psychiatric assessment of homicide. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 22, 366-77.

Bluglass, R. (1979b). Incest. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 22, 152-6.

Blumberg, N. H. (1981). Arson update: a review of the literature on firesetting. Bulletin of the American Academy of Psychiatry and Law 9, 255-65.

Blumenthal, E. J. (1955). Spontaneous seizures and related electroencephalographic findings following shock therapy. Journal of Nervous Mental Disease 122, 581-8.

Blumer, D. and Benson, D. F. (1975). Personality changes with frontal and temporal lobe lesions. In Psychiatric aspects of neurological disease (ed. D. Benson and D. Blumer). Grune and Stratton, New York.

Blumer, D. and Heilbronn, M. (1982). Chronic pain as a variant of depressive disease. The pain prone disorder. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 170, 381–406.

Blurton-Jones, N. G. (1972). Non-verbal communication in children. In Non-verbal communication (ed. R. A. Hinde). Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Boakes, A. J., Laurence, D. R, Teoh, P. C., Barar, F. S. K., Benedikter, L. T., and Prichard, B. N. C. (1973). Interactions between sympathomimetic amines and antidepressant agents in man. British Medical Journal i, 311-15.

Bogerts, B., Meertz, E., and Schonfield-Bausch, R. (1985). Basal ganglia and limbic system pathology in schizophrenia: a morphometric study. Archives of General Psychiatry 42, 784-91.

Bogren, L. Y. (1983). Couvade. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 68, 55–63.

Bohman, M. (1978). Some genetic aspects of alcoholism and criminality. Archives of General Psychiatry 35, 269-76.

Bohman, M., Sigvardsson, S., and Cloninger, C. R. (1981). Maternal inheritance of alcohol abuse: cross fostering analysis of adopted women. Archives of General Psychiatry 38, 965-9.

Böker, W. and Häfner, H. (1977). Crimes of violence by mentally disordered offenders in Germany. Psychological Medicine 7, 733-6.

Boll, T. J. and Barth, J. (1983). Mild head injury. Psychiatric Developments 3, 263-75.

Bond, A. J. and Lader, M. H. (1973). Residual effects of flurazepam. Psychopharmacologia 32, 223-35.

Bond, M. R. (1975). Assessment of the psychological outcome after severe head injury. In Outcome of severe damage to the C. N. S. Symposium 34, Ciba Foundation, London.

Bondareff, W. (1980). Neurobiology of ageing. In Handbook of mental health and ageing (ed. J. E. Birren and R. B. Sloane). Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs.

Bondareff, F. W. (1983). Age and Alzheimer disease. Lancet i, 1447.

Bonhoeffer, K. (1909). Exogenous psychoses. Zentralblatt für Nervenheilkunde 32, 499–505. Translated by H. Marshall in Themes and variations in European psychiatry (ed. S. R. Hirsch and M. Shepherd). Wright, Bristol (1974).

Bonn, J., Turner, P., and Hicks, D. C. (1972). Beta-adrenergic receptor blockade with practolol in the treatment of anxiety. Lancet i, 814-15.

Bonn, J. A., Harrison, J., and Rees, W. L. (1971). Lactate-induced anxiety: therapeutic implications. British Journal of Psychiatry 119, 468-71.

Böök, J. A. (1953). A genetic and neuropsychiatric investigation of a North-Swedish population with special regard to schizophrenia and mental deficiencies. Acta Genetica et Statistica Medica 4, 1-100.

Boor, J. W. and Hurtig, W. I. (1977). Persistent cerebellar ataxia after exposure to toluene. Annals of Neurology 2, 440-2.

Boston Collaborative Drug Surveillance Program (1972). Adverse reactions to tricyclic antidepressant drugs. Lancet 1, 529-31.

Boulagouris, J. C. (1977). Variables affecting the behaviour of obsessive-compulsive patients treated by flooding. In Studies in phobic and obsessive compulsive disorders (ed. J. C. Boulagouris and A. Rabavilas). Pergamon Press, Oxford.

Bowden, P. (1978). Rape. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 20, 286-90.

Bowen, D. M., Smith, C. B., White, P., and Davison, P. N. (1976). Neurotransmitter-related enzymes and indices of hypoxia in senile dementia and other abiotrophies. Brain 99, 459-96.

Bower, W. H. and Altschule, M. D. (1956). Use of progesterone in the treatment of postpartum psychosis. New England Journal of Medicine 254, 157-60.

Bowlby, J. (1944). Forty-four juvenile thieves. Their characters and home life. International Journal of Psychoanalysis 25, 19–53.

Bowlby, J. (1946). Forty-four juvenile thieves: their characters and home-life. Ballière, Tindall and Cox, London.

Bowlby, J. (1951). Maternal care and maternal health. World Health Organization. Geneva.

Bowlby, J. (1969). Psychopathology of anxiety: the role of affectional bonds. In Studies in anxiety (ed. M. H. Lader). British Journal of Psychiatry Special Publication No. 3, London.

Bowlby, J. (1973). Attachment and loss. Vol. 2. Separation, anxiety and anger. Hogarth Press, London.

Bowlby, J. (1980). Attachment and loss. Vol. 3. Loss, sadness and depression. Basic Books, New York.

Boyd, J. H. (1983). The increasing rate of suicide by firearms. New England Journal of Medicine 308, 872-4.

Boyd, J. H. and Weissman, M. M. (1982). Epidemiology. In Handbook of affective disorders (ed. E. S. Paykel). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Brackett, T. O., Condon, N., Kindelan, K. M., and Bassett, L. (1984). The emotional care of a person with a spinal cord injury. Journal of the American Medical Association 252, 793-5.

Braddock, L. (1986). The dexamethasone suppression test: fact and artefact. British Journal of Psychiatry 148,363-74.

Bradford, J. and Balmaceda, R. (1983). Shoplifting: Is there a specific psychiatric syndrome? Canadian Journal of Psychiatry 28, 248-54.

Bradley, C. (1985). Psychological aspects of diabetes. In: The Diabetes Annual (ed. K. G. M. M. Alberti and L. P. Krall). Elsevier, Amsterdam.

Braid, J. (1843). Neurhypnology: or the rationale of nervous sleep, considered in relation with animal magnetism. Churchill, London.

Brain, W. R. (1985). Diseases of the nervous system (9th edn) (revised by J. N. Walton). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Brandon, S., Cowley, P., McDonald, C., Neville, P., Palmer, R., and Wellstood-Easen, S. (1984). Electroconvulsive therapy: results in depressive illness from the Leicestershire Trial. British Medical Journal 288, 22-5.

Brauer, A., Horlick, L. F., Nelson, E., Farquar, J. W., and Agras, W. S. (1979). Relaxation therapy for essential hypertension: a Veterans Administration outpatient study. Journal of Behavioural Medicine 2, 21-9.

Braun, P., Kuchansky, G., Shapiro, R., Greenberg, S., Gudeman, J. E., Johnson, S., and Shore, M. F. (1981). Overview, reinstitutionalization of psychiatric patients, a critical review of outcome studies. American Journal of Psychiatry 138, 736-49.

Breitner, J. C. S. and Folstein, M. F. (1984). Familial Aizheimer dementia: a prevalent disorder with specific clinical features. Psychological Medicine 14, 63–80.

Brenner, B. (1959). Estimating the prevalence of alcoholism: towards a modification of the Jellinek formula. Quarterly Journal on Studies of Alcoholism 20, 255-69.

Breslau, N. and Prabucki, M. A. (1987). Siblings of disabled children: effects of chronic stress in the family. Archives of General Psychiatry 44, 1040-46.

Breslau, N., Weitzman, M., and Messenger, K. (1981). Psychologic functioning of the siblings of disabled children. Pediatrics 67, 344-57.

Breslau, W., Starich, K. S., and Mortimer, E. A. (1982). Psychiatric disorders in the mothers of disabled children. American Journal of Diseases of Childhood 136, 682-6.

Breuer, J. and Freud, S. (1893-5). Studies on hysteria. The Standard Edition of the complete psychological works. Vol. 2 (1955). Hogarth Press, London.

Brewer, C. and Perrett, L. (1971). Brain damage due to alcohol consumption: an air-encephalographic, psychometric and electro-encephalographic study. British Journal of Addiction 66, 170-82.

Bridges, K. W. and Goldberg, D. P. (1985). Somatic presentation of DSMIII psychiatric disorders in primary care. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 29, 563-9.

Brill, N. Q., Crumpton, E., Edisuon, S., Grayson, H. M., Heilman, L. I., and Richards, R. A. (1959). Relative effectiveness of varying components of electroconvulsive therapy. Archives of Neurology and Psychiatry 81, 627-35.

Brimblecombe, F. S. W. (1979). A new approach to the care of handicapped children. Journal of the Royal College of Physicians of London 13, 231-6.

Brimblecombe, F. S. W. (1985). The needs of young intellectually retarded adults. British Journal of Psychiatry 146, 5-10.

Briquet, P. (1859). Traité clinique et thérapeutique de l’hysterie. Baillière, Paris.

British Medical Journal (1976). Glutethamide — an unsafe alternative to barbiturate hypnotics. (Editorial). British Medical Journal ii, 1426-7.

British Medical Journal (1980). Phencyclidine: the new American street drug (Editorial). British Medical Journal 281, 1511-12.

British National Formulary (1981). British Medical Association and the Pharmaceutical Society of Great Britain, London.

Brittain, R. P. (1970). The sadistic murderer. Medicine, Science and the Law 10, 198–207.

Broadbent, D. E. (1981). Chronic effects from the physical nature of work. In Working life: a social science contribution to work reform (ed. B. Gardell and G. Johansson). Wiley, London.

Broadbent, D. E. and Gath, D. H. (1979). Chronic effects of repetitive and nonrepetitive work. In Response to stress: occupational aspects (ed. C. G. McKay and T. R. Cox). Independent Publishing Company, London.

Broadwin, I. T. (1932). A contribution to the study of truancy. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry 2, 253-9.

Brockington, I. (1986). Diagnosis of schizophrenia and schizoaffective psychoses. In The psychopharmacology and treatment of schizophrenia (ed. P. B. Bradley and S. R. Hirsch). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Brockington, I. F., Kendell, R. E., Kellett, J. M., Curry, S. H., and Wainwright, S. (1978). Trials of lithium, chlorpromazine and amitriptyline on schizoaffective patients. British Journal of Psychiatry 133, 162-8.

Brockington, I. F. and Leff, J. P. (1979). Schizo-affective psychosis: definitions and incidence. Psychological Medicine 9, 91-9.

Brooks, N. (1984). Closed head injury. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Brown, D. and Pedder, J. (1979). Introduction to psychotherapy: an outline of psychodynamic principles and practice. Tavistock, London.

Brown, F. W. (1942). Heredity in the psychoneuroses. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine 35, 785-90.

Brown, G. M. (1976). Endocrine aspects of psychosocial deviation. In Hormones, behaviour and psychopathology (ed. E. J. Sachar). Raven, New York.

Brown, G. W. and Birley, J. L. T. (1968). Crisis and life change at the onset of schizophrenia. Journal of Health and Social Behaviour 9, 203-24.

Brown, G. W. and Harris, T. O. (1978). Social origins of depression. Tavistock, London.

Brown, G. W. and Harris, T. O. (1986). Stressor, vulnerability, and depression: a question of replication. Psychological Medicine 16, 739-44.

Brown, G. W. and Prudo, R. (1981). Psychiatric disorder in a rural and urban population. 1. Aetiology of depression. Psychological Medicine 11, 581-99.

Brown, G. W., Carstairs, G. M., and Topping, G. G. (1958). Lancet ii, 685-9.

Brown, G. W., Monck, E. M., Carstairs, G. M., and Wing, J. K. (1962). Influence of family life on the cause of schizophrenic illness. British Journal of Preventive and Social Medicine 16, 55–68.

Brown, G. W., Bone, M., Dalison, B., and Wing, J. K. (1966). Schizophrenia and social care. Maudsley Monograph 17. Oxford University Press, London.

Brown, G. W., Harris, T. O., and Peto, J. (1973a). Life events and psychiatric disorders: the nature of the causal link. Psychological Medicine 3, 159-76.

Brown, G. W., Sklair, F., Harris, T. O., and Birley, J. L. T. (1973b). Life events and psychiatric disorder: some methodological issues. Psychological Medicine 3, 74–87.

Brown, J. A. C. (1961). Freud and the post Freudians. Penguin, Harmondsworth.

Brown, R. et al. (1986). Postmortem evidence of structural brain changes in schizophrenia: differences in brain weight, temporal horn area, and parahippocampal gyrus compared with affective disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry 43, 36–42.

Brown, S. W. and Reynolds, E. M. (1981). Cognitive impairment in epileptic patients. In Epilepsy and psychiatry (ed. E. H. Reynolds and R. Trimble). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Browne, A. and Finkelhor, D. (1986). Impact of child sexual abuse: a review of research. Psychological Bulletin 99, 66–77.

Bruch, H. (1974). Eating disorders: anorexia nervosa and the person within. Routledge and Kegan Paul, London.

Brudny, J., Korein, J., Levidow, A., and Friedman, L. W. (1974). Sensory feedback therapy as a modality of treatment in central nervous system disorders of voluntary movement. Neurology 24, 925-32.

Brunt, P. W., Kew, M. C., Scheuer, P. J., and Sherlock, S. (1974). Studies in alcoholic liver disease in Britain. Gut 15, 52-8.

Bryant, B., Trower, P., Yardley, K., Urbieta, H., and Letemendia, F. J. J. (1976). A survey of social inadequacy among psychiatric outpatients. Psychological Medicine 6, 101-12.

Buckle, A. and Farrington, D. P. (1984). An observational study of shop-lifting. British Journal of Criminology 24, 63–73.

Buglass, D. and Duffy, J. C. (1978). The ecological pattern of suicide and parasuicide in Edinburgh. Social Science and Medicine 12, 241-53.

Buglass, D. and Horton, J. (1974). The repetition of parasuicide: a comparison of three cohorts. British Journal of Psychiatry 125, 168-74.

Buglass, D., Clarke, J., Henderson, A. S., Kreitman, N., and Presley, A. S. (1977). A study of agoraphobic housewives. Psychological Medicine 7, 73–86.

Bulbena, A. and Burrows, G. E. (1986). Pseudodementia: Facts and Figures. British Journal of Psychiatry 148, 87–94.

Bulusu, L. and Alderson, M. (1984). Suicide 1950-82. Population Trends 35, 11–17.

Burish, T. G. and Carey, M. P. (1986). Conditioned aversive responses in cancer chemotherapy patients: Theoretical and developmental analysis. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 54, 593–600.

Burks, J. S., Alfrey, A. C., Huddlestone, J., Norenburg, M. D., and Lewin, E. (1976). A fatal encephalopathy in chronic haemodialysis patients. Lancet i, 764-8.

Bums, B. H. and Howell, J. B. (1969). Disproportionately severe breathlessness in chronic bronchitis. Quarterly Journal of Medicine 38, 277-94.

Burrow, T. (1927). The group method of analysis. Psychoanalytic Review 14, 268-80.

Butler, G., Cullington, A., Munby, M., Amies, P. L., and Gelder, M. G. (1984). Exposure and anxiety management in the treatment of social phobia. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 52, 642-50.

Butler, G., Cullington, A., Hibbert, G., Klimes, I., and Gelder, M. G. (1987). Anxiety management for persistent generalized anxiety. British Journal of Psychiatry 151, 535-42.

Bynum, W. F. (1983). Psychiatry in its historical context. In Handbook of psychiatry. Vol. I (ed. M. Shepherd and O. L. Zangwill). Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Byrne, E. A. and Cunningham, C. C. (1985). The effects of mentally handicapped children on families — a conceptual review. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 26, 847-64.

Cadoret, R. J. (1978a). Evidence of genetic inheritance of primary affective disorder in adoptees. American Journal of Psychiatry 135, 463-6.

Cadoret, R. J. (1978b). Psychopathology in adopted-away offspring of biologic parents with antisocial behaviour. Archives of General Psychiatry 35, 176-84.

Cadoret, R. J. and Gath, A. (1978). Inheritance of alcoholism in adoptees. British Journal of Psychiatry 132, 252-8.

Cadoret, R. J., Cunningham, L., Loftus, R., and Edwards, J. (1975). Studies of adoptees from psychiatrically disturbed biologic parents — II temperament, hyperactive, antisocial and developmental variables. Journal of Pediatrics 87, 301-6.

Caffey, J. (1946). Multiple fractures in long bones of children suffering from chronic subdural haematomata. American Journal of Radiology 56, 163-73.

Caine, E. D. (1981). Pseudodementia. Archives of General Psychiatry 38, 1359-64.

Cala, L. A., Jones, B., Masatglia, F. L., and Wiley, B. (1978). Brain atrophy and intellectual impairment in heavy drinkers — a clinical, psychosomatic and computerised tomography study. Australian and New Zealand Medical Journal 8, 147-53.

Caldwell, T. and Weiner, M. F. (1981). Stresses and coping in ICU nursing: a review. General Hospital Psychiatry 3, 119-27.

Calne, D. B., Karoum, F., Ruthven, C. J. R., and Sandler, M. (1969). The metabolism of orally administered L-dopa in Parkinsonism. British Journal of Pharmacology 37, 57–68.

Cameron, N. (1938). Reasoning, regression and communication in schizophrenia. Psychological Monographs 50, 1-34.

Campbell, A. M. G., Thomson, J. L. G., Evans, M., and Williams, M. J. (1971). Cerebral atrophy in young cannabis smokers. Lancet ii, 1219-24.

Campbell, E., Cope, S., and Teasdale, J. (1983). Social factors and affective disorder: an investigation of Brown and Harris’s model. British Journal of Psychiatry 143, 548-53.

Campbell, T. L. (1986). Family’s impact on health: a world review and annotated bibliography. NIMH series DN6. US Government Policy Office, Washington.

Candy, J. M., Klinowski, J. and Perry, R. H. (1986). Aluminosilicates and senile plaque formation in Alzheimer’s Disease. Lancet i, 354-6.

Cantwell, D. (1975). Genetics of hyperactivity. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 16, 261-4.

Cantwell, D. P. (1983). Diagnostic validity of the hyperactive child. (Attention deficit disorder with hyperactivity syndrome). Psychiatric Developments 3, 277–300.

Cantwell, D. P. (1985). Organisation and use of DSMIII. In The clinical guide to child psychiatry (ed. D. Shaffer, A. A. Ehrhardt, and L. L. Greenhill). Free Press, New York.

Cantwell, D. P. and Baker, L. (1985a). Coordination disorder. In Comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (ed. H. I. Kaplan and B. J. Sadock) (4th edn). Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Cantwell, D. P. and Baker, L. (1985b). Speech and language: development and disorders. In Child and adolescent psychiatry: modern approaches (ed. M. Rutter and L. Hersov) (2nd edn). Blackwell, Oxford.

Capgras, J. and Reboul-Lachaux, J. (1923). L’Illusion des sosies dans un délire systématisé chronique. Bulletin de la Société Clinique de Médicine Mentale 11, 6-16.

Caplan, G. (1961). An approach to community mental health. Tavistock, London.

Caplan, H. L. (1970). Hysterical conversion symptoms in childhood. M. Phil. Dissertation, University of London. [See the account in Child psychiatry: modern approaches (ed. M. L. Rutter and L. Hersov) (2nd edn). Blackwell Oxford (1985).]

Capstick, N. (1975). Clomipramine in the treatment of the true obsessional state: a report on four patients. Psychosomatics 16, 21-5.

Carbotte, R. M., Denbury, S. D., and Denbury, J. A. (1986). Prevalence of cognitive impairment in systemic lupus erythematosus. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 174, 357-64.

Carey, G., Gottesman, I.I., and Robins, E. (1980). Prevalence rates among neuroses, pitfalls in the evaluation of familiarity. Psychological Medicine 10, 437-43.

Carlen, P. L., Wortzman, G., Holgate, R. C., Wilkinson, D. A., and Rankin, J. G. (1978). Reversible cerebral atrophy in recent abstinent chronic alcoholics measured by computed tomographic scans. Science 100, 1076-8.

Carlson, G. A. and Goodwin, F. K. (1973). The stages of mania: a longitudinal analysis of the manic episode. Archives of General Psychiatry 28, 221-8.

Carlsson, A. and Lindquist, M. (1963). Effect of chlorpromazine and haloperidol on formation of methoxytyramine and normetanephrine in mouse brain. Acta Pharmacologia et Toxicologia 20, 140-4.

Carney, M. W. P., Roth, M. and Garside, R. F. (1965). The diagnosis of depressive syndromes and the prediction of ECT response. British Journal of Psychiatry 111, 659-74.

Carnwath, T. C. M. and Johnson, D. A. W. (1987). Psychiatric morbidity among spouses of patients with stroke. British Medical Journal 294, 409-11.

Caroff, S. N. (1980). The neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry 41, 79–83.

Carothers, J. C. (1947). A study of mental derangement in Africans, and an attempt to explain its peculiarities, more especially in relation to the African attitude to life. Journal of Mental Science 93, 548-97.

Carpenter, W. T., Strauss, J. S., and Muleh, S. (1973). Are there pathognomonic symptoms of schizophrenia? An empiric investigation of Schneider’s first rank symptoms. Archives of General Psychiatry 28, 847-52.

Carr, S. A. (1980). Interhemispheric transfer of stereognostic information in chronic schizophrenia. British Journal of Psychiatry 136, 53-8.

Carr-Gregg, M. and White, L. (1987). The adolescent with cancer: a psychological overview. The Medical Journal of Australia 147, 496–502.

Carstairs, G. M., O’Connor, N., and Rawnsley, K. (1956). Organisation of a hospital workshop for chronic psychiatric patients. British Journal of Preventive and Social Medicine 10, 136-40.

Carter, C. O., Evans, K. A., and Baraitser, M. (1983). Effect of genetic counselling on the prevalence of Huntington’s chorea. British Medical Journal 286, 281-3.

Cartwright, A. (1964). Human relations and hospital care. Routledge and Kegan Paul, London.

Catalan, J. (1988). Psychosocial and neuropsychiatric aspects of HIV infection: review of their extent and implications for psychiatry. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 32, 237-48.

Catalan, J., Bradley, M., Gallway, J., and Hawton, K. (1981). Sexual dysfunction and psychiatric morbidity in patients attending a clinic for sexually transmitted diseases. British Journal of Psychiatry 138, 292-6.

Catalan, J., Gath, D., Edmonds, G., and Ennis, J. (1984). The effects of nonprescribing of anxiolytics in general practice: I. Controlled evaluation of psychiatric and social outcome. ’British Journal of Psychiatry 144, 593–602.

Cautela, J. R. (1967). Covert sensitization. Psychological Reports 74, 459-68.

Caviston, P. (1987). Pregnancy and opiate addiction. British Medical Journal 295, 285-6.

Cay, E. L. (1984). Psychological problems in relation to coronary care. In Recent advances in cardiology (ed. D. J. Rowlands). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Central Health Services Council (1968). Hospital treatment of acute poisoning. HMSO, London.

Cerletti, U. and Bini, L. (1938). Un nuovo metodo di shokterapia; Tettroshock’. Bulletin Accademia Medico di Roma 64, 136-8.

Chalkley, A. J. and Powell, G. (1983). The clinical description of forty-eight cases of sexual fetishism. British Journal of Psychiatry 142, 292-5.

Chamberlain, A. S. (1966). Early mental hospitals in Spain. American Journal of Psychiatry 123, 143-9.

Chappie, P. A. L., Somekh, D. E., and Taylor, M. E. (1972). Follow-up cases of opiate addiction from the time of notification ta the Home Office. British Medical Journal ii, 680-3.

Charney, D. S., Menkes, D., and Heninger, G. R. (1981). Receptor sensitivity and the mechanism of action of antidepressant treatment. Archives of General Psychiatry 38, 1160-80.

Chamey, D. S., Heninger, G. R., and Breier, A. (1984). Nor-adrenergic function in panic patients. Archives of General Psychiatry 41, 751-62.

Checkley, S. A. (1980). Neuroendocrine tests of monoamine function in man: a review of basic theory and its application to the study of depressive illness. Psychological Medicine 10, 35–53.

Checkley, S. A., Com, T. H., Glass, I. B., Burton, S. W., and Burke, C. A. (1986). The responsiveness of central alpha-2 adrenoceptors in depression. In The biology of depression (ed. J. F. W. Deakin), pp. 100–120. Gaskell, Lçndon.

Chick, J., Lloyd, G., and Crombie, E. (1985). Counselling problem drinkers in medical wards: a controlled study. British Medical Journal 290, 965-7.

Chiswick, D. (1985). The use and abuse of psychiatric testimony. British Medical Journal 290, 975-7.

Chopra, G. S. and Smith, J. W. (1974). Psychotic reactions following cannabis use in east Indians. Archives of General Psychiatry 30, 24-7.

Chowdhury, N., Hicks, R. C., and Kreitman, N. (1973). Evaluation of an aftercare service for parasuicide (’attempted suicide’) patients. Social Psychiatry 8, 67–81.

Christie, A. B. (1985). Survival in dementia: a review. In Recent advances in psychogeriatrics (ed. T. Arie). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Christie, J. E., Whalley, L. J., Dick, H., Blackwood, D. H. R., Blackburn, I. M., and Fink, G. (1986). Raised plasma cortisol concentrations a feature of drug-free psychotics and not specific for depression. British Journal of Psychiatry 148, 58–65.

Christodoulou, G. N. (1976). Delusional hyper-identifications of the Frégoli type. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 54, 305-14.

Christodoulou, G. N. (1977). The syndrome of Capgras. British Journal of Psychiatry 130, 556-64.

Ciompi, L. (1980). The natural history of schizophrenia in the long term. British Journal of Psychiatry 136, 413-20.

Clancy, J., Noyes, R., Noenk, P. R., and Slymen, D. J. (1978). Secondary depression in anxiety neurosis. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 166, 846-50.

Clare, A. (1980). Controversial issues in thought and practice. In Psychiatry in dissent (2nd edn). Tavistock, London.

Clare, A. W. (1978). The treatment of premenstrual symptoms. British Journal of Psychiatry 135, 576-9.

Clare, A. W. (1982). Psychiatric aspects of premenstrual complaint. Journal of Psychosomatic Obstetrics and Gynaecology 1, 22–31.

Clare, A. W. (1985). Hormones, behaviour and the menstrual cycle. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 29, 225-33.

Clark, D. M. (1986). A cognitive approach to panic. Behaviour Research and Therapy 24, 461-70.

Clark, D. M. and Teasdale, J. D. (1982). Diurnal variation in clinical depression and accessibility of memories of positive and negative experiences. Journal of Abnormal Psychology 91, 87–95.

Clark, D. M., Salkovskis, P. M., and Chalkley, A. J. (1985). Respiratory control as a treatment for panic attacks. Journal of Behaviour Therapy and Experimental Psychiatry 16, 23–30.

Clark, W. B. (1976). Loss of control, heavy drinking, and drinking problems in a longitudinal study. Journal of Studies on Alcoholism 37, 1256-90.

Clarke, A. M. and Clarke, A. D. B. (1983a). Lifespan development and psychosocial intervention. In Mental deficiency: the changing outlook (ed. A. M. Clarke, A. D. B. Clarke, and J. M. Berg) (4th edn). Methuen, London.

Clarke, A. M. and Clarke, A. D. B. (1983b). Classification. In Mental deficiency: the changing outlook (ed. A. M. Clarke, A. D. B. Clarke, and J. M. Berg) (4th edn). Methuen, London.

Clarke, A. M., Clarke, A. D. B., and Berg, J. M. (eds.) (1985). Mental deficiency: the changing outlook (4th edn). Methuen, London.

Clausen, J. A. and Kohn, M. L. (1959). Relation of schizophrenia to the social structure of a small town. In Epidemiology of mental disorder (ed. B. Pasamanick). American Association for the Advancement of Science, Washington, D C.

Clayton, P. J. (1979). The sequelae and non-sequelae of conjugal bereavement. American Journal of Psychiatry 136, 1530-4.

Clayton, P. J. (1981). Bereavement. In Handbook of affective disorders (ed. E. S. Paykel). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Clayton. P. J, Herjanic, M., Murphy, G. E., and Woodruff, R. (1974). Mourning and depression: their similarities and differences. Canadian Psychiatric Association Journal 19, 309-12.

Cleckley, H. M. (1964). The mask of sanity: an attempt to clarify issues about the so-called psychopathic personality (4th edn). Mosby, St. Louis.

Clinical Psychiatry Committee (1965). Clinical trials of the treatment of depressive illness: report to the Medical Research Council. British Medical Journal i, 881-6.

Clinical Research Centre (Division of Psychiatry) (1984). The Northwick Park ECT trial: predictors of response to real and simulated ECT. British Journal of Psychiatry 144, 227-37.

Cloninger, C. R. (1986). Somatoform and dissociative disorders. In Medical basis of psychiatry (ed. G. Winokur and P. Clayton). Saunders. Philadelphia.

Cloninger, C. R. (1987). Diagnosis of somatoform disorders. In Diagnosis and classification in psychiatry: a critical appraisal of DSM III (ed. G. L. Tischler). Cambridge University Press, New York.

Cloninger, C. R., Bohman, M., and Sigvardsson, S. (1981). Inheritance of alcohol abuse: cross fostering analysis of adopted men. Archives of General Psychiatry 38, 861-8.

Cloninger, C. R., Reich, T., Suarez, B. K., Price, J. P., and Gottesman, I. I. (1985). The principles of genetics in relation to psychiatry. In Handbook of Psychiatry (ed. M. Shepherd), Vol. 5. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Co, B. T., Goodwin, D. W., Gado, M., Mikhael, M., and Hill, S. Y. (1977). Absence of cerebral atrophy in chronic cannabis users: evaluation by computerised transaxial tomography. Journal of the American Medical Association 237, 1229-30.

Cobb, J. P. and Marks, I. M. (1979). Morbid jealousy featuring as obsessive compulsive neurosis. Treatment by behavioural psychotherapy. British Journal of Psychiatry 134, 301-5.

Cobb, S. and Rose, R. M. (1973). Hypertension, peptic ulcer and diabetes in air traffic controllers. Journal of the American Medical Association 224, 489-92.

Cochran, E., Robins, E., and Grote, S. (1976). Regional serotonin levels in the brain: comparison of depressive suicides and alcoholic suicides with controls. Biological Psychiatry 11, 283-94.

Coghill, S. R., Caplan, H. L., Alexandra, H., and Robson, K. M. (1986). Impact of maternal postnatal depression on cognitive development of young children. British Medical Journal 292, 1165-7.

Cohen, F. and Lazarus, R. (1973). Active coping processes, coping dispositions and recovery from surgery. Psychosomatic Medicine 35, 375-89.

Cohen, F. and Lazarus, R. (1979). Coping with stresses of illness. In Health psychology (ed. G. C. Stone, F. Cohen, and N. Adler). Jossey Bass, San Francisco.

Cohen, J. (1961). A study of suicide pacts. Medicolegal Journal 29, 144-51.

Cohen, S. (1980). Cushing’s syndrome: a psychiatric study of 29 patients. British Journal of Psychiatry 136, 120-4.

Cohen, S. D., Monteiro, W., and Marks, I. M. (1984). Twoyear follow-up of agoraphobics after exposure and imipramine. British Journal of Psychiatry 144, 276-81.

Cohen, W. J. and Cohen, N. H. (1974). Lithium carbonate, haloperidol and irreversible brain damage. Journal of the American Medical Association 230, 1283-7.

Cohen-Cole, S. (1980). Training outcome in liaison psychiatry. General Hospital Psychiatry 2, 282-8.

Coid, J. (1979). Mania à potu: a critical review of pathological intoxication. Psychological Medicine 9, 709-19.

Coid, J. (1983). Epidemiology of abnormal homicide and murder followed by suicide. Psychological Medicine 13, 855-86.

Coid, J. (1984). How many psychiatric patients in prison. British Journal of Psychiatry 145, 78–86.

Colbourn, C. J., and Lishman, W. A. (1979). Lateralization of function and psychotic illness: a left hemisphere deficit? In Hemisphere asymmetries of function in psychopathology (ed. J. Gruzelier and P. Flor-Henry). Elsevier, Amsterdam.

Cole, J. D., Goldberg, S. C., and Klerman, G. L. (1964). Phenothiazine treatment in acute schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry 10, 246-61.

Committee on the Child Health Services (1976). (Court Committee.) Fit for the future. HMSO, London.

Committee of Enquiry into the Education of Handicapped Children and Young People (1978). (Warnock Committee.) Special educational needs. HMSO, London.

Committee of Enquiry into Mental Handicap Nursing and Care (1979). (Jay Committee.) HMSO, London.

Committee on Mentally Abnormal Offenders (1975). (Butler Committee.) HMSO, London.

Committee on the Review of Medicines (1980). Systematic review of the benzodiazepines: guidelines for data sheets on diazepam, chlordiazepoxide, medazepam, temazepam, triazolam, nitrazepam and flurazepam. British Medical Journal i, 910-12.

Committee on the Safety of Medicines (1981). Mianserin and blood dyscrasia. Current Problems No. 7.

Connell, P. H. (1958). Amphetamine psychosis. Maudsley Monograph No. 5. Oxford University Press, London.

Connolly, F. H. and Gipson, M. (1978). Dysmorphophobia: a long term study. British Journal of Psychiatry 132, 568-70.

Connolly, J. F., Gruzelier, J. H., Marchanda, R.; and Hirsch, S. R. (1983). Visual evoked potentials in schizophrenia. British Journal of Psychiatry 142, 152-5.

Conolly, J. (1856). Treatment of the insane without mechanical restraints (reprinted 1973). Dawson, London.

Conrad, K. (1958). Die beginnende Schizophrenie: versuch einer gestaltanalyse des Wahns. Thieme, Stuttgart.

Conte, H. R. and Karasu, T. B. (1981). Psychotherapy for medically ill patients: review and critique of controlled studies. Psychosomatics 22, 285–315.

Conte, J. R. (1985). The effects of sexual abuse on children: a critique and suggestions for future research. Victimology 10, 110-30.

Cooper, A. F. (1984). Psychiatric aspects of sensory deficits. In Handbook of studies on psychiatry and old age (ed. D. W. K. Kay and G. D. Burrows). Elsevier, Amsterdam.

Cooper, A. J., Ismail, A. A. A., Smith, C. G., and Loraine, J. A. (1970). Androgen function in ’psychogenic’ and ’constitutional’ types of impotence. British Medical Journal iii, 17–20.

Cooper, B. (1978). Epidemiology. In Schizophrenia. Towards a new synthesis (ed. J. K. Wing). Academic Press, London.

Cooper, B. (1986). Mental disorder as reaction: the history of a psychiatric concept. In Life events and psychiatric disorder (ed. H. Katchnig). Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Cooper, B. and Bickel, H. (1984). Population screening and the early detection of dementing disorders in old age: a review. Psychological Medicine 14, 81–95.

Cooper, B. and Sylph, J. (1973). Life events and the onset of neurotic illness: an investigation in general practice. Psychological Medicine 3, 421-35.

Cooper, B., Fry, J., and Kalt, G. W. (1969). A longitudinal study of psychiatric morbidity in a general practice population. British Journal of Preventive and Social Medicine 23, 210-17.

Cooper, J. E., Kendell, R. E., Gurland, B. J., Sharpe, L., Copeland, J. R. M., and Simon, R. (1972). Psychiatric diagnosis in New York and London. Maudsley Monograph No. 20. Oxford University Press, London.

Cooper, J. E., Andrews, H., and Barber, C. (1985). Stable abnormalities in the lateralization of early cortical somatosensory evoked potentials in schizophrenic patients. British Journal of Psychiatry 146, 585-93.

Cooper, P. J. and Fairburn, C. G. (1983). Binge eating and self-induced vomiting in the community: a preliminary study. British Journal of Psychiapy 142, 139-44.

Cooper, P. J., Gath, D., Rose, N., and Fieldsend, R. (1982). Psychological sequelae to elective sterilisation: a prospective study. British Medical Journal 284, 461-3.

Cooper, P. J., Campbell, G. A., Day, A., Kennerley, H., and Bond, A. (1988). Non-psychotic psychiatric disorder after childbirth: a prospective study of prevalence, incidence, course and nature. British Journal of Psychiatry 152, 799–806.

Cooper, S. J., Owen, F., Chambers, D. R., Crow, T. J., Johnson, J., and Poulter, M. (1986). Post-mortem neurochemical findings in suicide and depression: a study of the serotonergic system and imipramine. In The biology of depression (ed. J. F. W. Deakin). Gaskell, London.

Copeland, J. R. M. (1984). Organisation of services for the elderly mentally ill. In: Handbook of studies of psychiatry (ed. D. W. K. Kay and G. D. Burrows). Elsevier, Amsterdam.

Copeland, J. R. M. and Gurland, B. J. (1985). International comparative studies. In Recent advances in psychogeriatrics (ed. T. Arie). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Copeland, J. R. M., Kelleher, M. J., Kellett, J. M., Barron, G., Cowan, D., and Gourlay, A. J. (1975). Evaluation of a psychogeriatric service: the distinction between psychogeriatric and geriatric patients. British Journal of Psychiatry 126, 21.-9.

Coppen, A. J. (1959). Body-build of male homosexuals. British Medical Journal ii, 1443-5.

Coppen, A. J. (1972). Indoleamines and the affective disorders. Journal of Psychiatric Research 9, 163-71.

Coppen, A. J. and Shaw, D. M. (1963). Mineral metabolism in melancholia. British Medical Journal ii, 1439-44.

Coppen, A. J. and Wood, K. (1978). Tryptophan and depressive illness. Psychological Medicine 8, 49–57.

Coppen, A. J., Prange, A. J., Whybrow, P. C., Noguera, R., and Praez, J. M. (1969). Methysergide in mania. Lancet ii, 338-40.

Coppen, A. J. et al. (1971). Prophylactic lithium in affective disorders: controlled trial. Lancet i, 275-9.

Coppen, A. J., Whybrow, P. C., Noguera, R., Maggs, R., and Prange, A. J. (1972). The comparative antidepressant value of L-tryptophan and imipramine with and without attempted potentiation by liothyronine. Archives of General Psychiatry 26, 234-41.

Coppen, A. J., Montgomery, S. A., Gupta, R. K., and Bailey, J. (1976). A double blind comparison of lithium carbonate or maprotiline in the prophylaxis of affective disorder. British Journal of Psychiatry 128, 479-85.

Coppen, A. J. et al. (1978). Amitryptyline plasma concentration and clinical effect: a World Health Organization Collaborative Study. Lancet i, 63-6.

Coppen, A. J. et al. (1981). Lithium continuation therapy following electroconvulsive therapy. British Journal of Psychiatry 139, 284-7.

Corbett, J. A. (1978). The development of services for the mentally handicapped: a historical and national review. In The care of the handicapped child (ed. J. Apley). Heinemann, London.

Corbett, J. A. (1985). Mental retardation — psychiatric aspects. In Child psychiatry: modern approaches (ed. M. Rutter and L. Hersov) (2nd edn). Blackwell, Oxford.

Corbett, J. A. and Pond, D. A. (1979). Epilepsy and behaviour disorder in the mentally handicapped. In Psychiatric illness and mental handicap (ed. F. F. James and R. P. Snaith). Gaskell, Ashford, Kent.

Corbett, J. A. and Turpin, G. (1985). Tics and Tourette’s syndrome. In Child and adolescent psychiatry: modern approaches (ed. M. Rutter and L. Hersov) (2nd edn). Blackwell, Oxford.

Corbett, J. A., Matthews, A. M., Connell, P. M., and Shapiro, D. A. (1969). Tics and Gilles de la Tourette syndrome: a follow-up study and a critical review. British Journal of Psychiatry 115, 1229-41.

Corbett, J. A., Harris, R., and Robinson, R. G. (1975). Epilepsy. In Mental retardation and developmental disabilities: an annual review. Vol. VII (ed. J. Wortis). Brunner-Mazel, New York.

Corbett, J. A., Trimble, M. R., and Nicol, T. C. (1985). Behavioural and cognitive impairments in children with epilepsy: The long-term effects of anticonvulsant therapy. Journal of the American Academy of Child Psychiatry 24, 17–23.

Corbin, S. L. and Eastwood, M. R. (1986). Sensory deficits and mental disorders of old age: causal or coincidental associations? Psychological Medicine 16, 251-6.

Corr, A. and Corr, D. M. (1983). Hospice care, principles and practice. New York, Springer.

Corsellis, J. A. N. (1962). Mental illness and the ageing brain. Maudsley Monographs No. 9, Oxford University Press, London.

Corsellis, J. A. N., Bruton, C. J. and Freeman-Browne, D. (1973). The aftermath of boxing. Psychological Medicine 3, 270–303.

Coryell, W., Noyes, R., and Clancy, J. (1982). Excess mortality in panic disorder: comparison with primary unipolar depression. Archives of General Psychiatry 39, 701-3.

Costello, G. G. (1982). Social factors associated with depression: a retrospective community study. Psychological Medicine 12, 329-39.

Costello, R. M. (1975). Alcoholism treatment and evaluation. International Journal of the Addictions 10, 251-75.

Cotard, M. (1882). Du délire de négations. Archives de Neurologie, Paris 4, 152-70 and 282-96. [Translated into English by M. Rohde in S. R. Hirsch and M. Shepherd (eds.) Themes and variations in European psychiatry, pp. 353-73. Wright, Bristol.]

Cotterill, J. A. (1981). Dermatological non-disease: a common and potentially fatal disturbance of cutaneous body image. British Journal of Dermatology 104, 611-19.

Coull, D. C., Crooks, J. Dingwell-Fordyce, I., Scott, A. M., and Weir, R. D. (1970). Amitriptyline and cardiac disease: risk of sudden death identified by monitoring system. Lancet ii, 590-1.

Council on Scientific Affairs. (1986). Dementia. Journal of the American Medical Association 256, 2234-8.

Courbon, P. and Fail, G. (1927). Syndrome ’d’Illusion de Frégoli’ et schizophrénie. Bulletin de la Société Clinique de Médicine Mentale 15, 121-4.

Covi, L., Lipman, R., and Derogatis, L. (1974). Drugs and group psychotherapy in neurotic depression. American Journal of Psychiatry 131, 191-8.

Cowen, P. J. and Anderson, I. M. (1986). 5HT neuroendocrinology: changes with depressive illness and antidepressant drug treatment. In The biology of depression (ed. J. F. W. Deakin), pp. 71–89. Gaskell, London.

Cowie, V. (1961). The incidence of neurosis in the children of psychotics. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 37, 37–71.

Cowie, V. (1980). Injury and insult — considerations of the neuropathological aetiology of mental subnormality. British Journal of Psychiatry 137, 305-12.

Cox, S. M. and Ludwig, A. (1979). Neurological soft signs and psychopathology: 1. Findings in schizophrenia. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 167, 161-5.

Craft, A. and Craft, M. (1981). Sexuality and mental handicap: a review. British Journal of Psychiatry 139, 494–505.

Craft, M. (1965). Ten studies in psychopathic personality. Wright, Bristol.

Craft, M. (1984). Low intelligence, mental handicap and crime. In Mentally abnormal offenders (ed. M. Craft and A. Craft). Baillière Tindall, London.

Craig, T. J. (1982). An epidemiologic study of problems associated with violence among psychiatric inpatients. American Journal of Psychiatry 139, 1262-6.

Craig, T. K. J. and Brown, G. W. (1984). Life events, meaning and physical illness. A review. In Health care and human behaviour (eds. A. Steptoe, and A. Mathews). Academic Press, London.

Crammer, J., Barraclough, B., and Heine, B. (1982). The use of drugs in psychiatry. Gaskell, London.

Cranshaw, J. A. and Mullen, P. E. (1984). A study of benzhexol abuse. British Journal of Psychiatry 145, 300-3.

Crapper, D., Kirschnan, S. S., and Dalton, A. J. (1973). Brain aluminium distribution in Alzheimer’s disease and experimental neurofibrillary degeneration. Science 180, 511-13.

Crauford, D. I. O. and Harris, R. (1986). Ethics of predictive testing for Huntington’s chorea: the need for more information. British Medical Journal 293, 249-51.

Crawfurd, M. d’A. (1982). Severe mental handicap: pathogenesis, treatment and prevention. British Medical Journal 285, 762-6.

Creed, F. (1981). Life events and appendectomy. Lancet i, 1381-5.

Creed, F. (1984). Life events and physical illness. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 29, 113-23.

Creed, F. and Guthrie, E. (1987). Psychological factors in the irritable bowel syndrome. Gut 28, 1307-18.

Creer, C. (1978). Social work with patients and their families. In Schizophrenia: towards a new synthesis (ed. J. K. Wing). Academic Press, London.

Creer, C. and Wing, J. K. (1975). Living with a schizophrenic patient. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 14, 73–82.

Cremona, A. (1986). Mad drivers: psychiatric illness and driving performance. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 28, 193-5.

Creutzfeldt, H. E. (1920). Über eine eigenartige herdformige. Erkrankung des zentral Nevensystems. Zeitschrift für die Gesamte Neurologie und Psychiatrie 57, 1-18.

Crisp, A. H. (1977). Diagnosis and outcome of anorexia nervosa: the St. Georges view. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine 70, 464-70.

Crisp, A. H., Palmer, R. L., and Kalucy, R. S. (1976). How common is anorexia nervosa? A prevalence study. British Journal of Psychiatry 128, 549-54.

Critchley, M. (1953). The parietal lobes. Edward Arnold, London.

Crome, L. and Stern, J. (1972). Pathology of mental retardation (2nd edn). Churchill Livingstone, London.

Cronholm, B. and Molander, L. (1964). Memory disturbance after electroconvulsive therapy. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 40, 211-16.

Cronholm, B. and Ottosson, J. -O. (1960). Experimental studies of the therapeutic action of electroconvulsive therapy in endogenous depression. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica Suppl. 145, 69-101.

Crow, T. J. (1980). Molecular pathology of schizophrenia; more than one disease process? British Medical Journal 280, 66-8.

Crow, T. J. (1983). Is schizophrenia an infectious disease? Lancet i, 173-5.

Crow, T. J. (1984). A re-evaluation of the viral hypothesis: is psychosis the result of retroviral integration at a site close to the cerebral dominance gene? British Journal of Psychiatry 145, 243-53.

Crow, T. J. (1985). The two-syndrome concept: origins and current status. Schizophrenia Bulletin 11, 471-85.

Crow, T. J., Johnstone, E. C., and Owen, F. (1979a). Research on schizophrenia. In Recent advances in clinical psychiatry (ed. K. Granville-Grossman), Vol. 3, pp. 1-36. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Crow, T. J., Baker, H. F., Cross, A. J., Joseph, M. H., Lofthouse, R., Longdon, A., Owen, F., Riley, G. J., Glover, V. and Killpack, W. S. (1979b). Monoamine mechanisms in chronic schizophrenia: post mortem neurochemical findings. British Journal of Psychiatry 134, 249-56.

Crow, T. J., Ferrier, I. N., Johnstone, E. C., MacMillan, J. F., Owens, D. G. C., Parry, R. P. and Tyrell, D. A. J. (1979c). Characteristics of patients with schizophrenia or neurological disorder and a virus-like agent in the cerebrospinal fluid. Lancet i, 842-4.

Crowe, M. J. (1973). Conjoint marital therapy: advice or interpretation. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 17, 309-15.

Crowe, R. R. (1974). An adoption study of antisocial personality. Archives of General Psychiatry 31, 785-91.

Crowe, R. R., Noyes, R., Pauls, D. L., and Slymen, D. (1983). A family study of panic disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry 40, 1065-9.

Crown, S. (1978). Psychosexual counselling. Academic Press, London.

Crown, S. (1980). Psychosocial factors in low back pain. Clinics in Rheumatic Diseases 6, 77–92.

Cullen, W. (1772). Nosology. See extracts in I. McAlpine and R. Hunter. Three hundred years of psychiatry, pp. 473-9. Oxford University Press, London.

Cummings, J. L. (1986). Subcortical dementia: neuropsychology, neuropsychiatry, and pathophysiology. British Journal of Psychiatry 149, 682-97.

Cunningham, J., Strassberg, D., and Roback, H. (1978). Group psychotherapy for medical patients. Comprehensive Psychiatry 19, 135-40.

Curran, D. (1937). The differentiation of neuroses and manicdepressive psychosis. Journal of Mental Science 83, 156-74.

Cutting, J. (1978). The relationship between Korsakov’s syndrome and ’alcoholic dementia’. British Journal of Psychiatry 132, 240-51.

Cutting, J. (1979). Alcohol dependence and alcohol related disabilities. In Recent advances in clinical psychiatry (ed. K. Granville-Grossman), Vol. 3 pp. 225-50. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Cutting, J. (1980). Physical illness and psychosis. British Journal of Psychiatry 136, 109-19.

Cutting, J. (1985). The psychology of schizophrenia. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Cutting, J. (1987). The phenomenology of acute psychosis. British Journal of Psychiatry 151, 324-32.

Cybulska, E. and Rucinski, J. (1986). Gross self-neglect in old age. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 31, 21-6.

Da Costa, J. M. (1871). An irritable heart: a clinical study of functional cardiac disorder and its consequences. American Journal of Medical Science 61, 17–52. (See extracts in Jarcho, S. (1959). On irritable heart. American Journal of Cardiology 4, 809-17.)

Dahl, A. A. (1985). A critical examination of empirical studies of the diagnosis of borderline disorders in adults. Psychiatric Developments 3, 1-29.

Dalbiez, R. (1941). Psychoanalytic method and the doctrine of Freud (2 vols.). Longmans Green, London.

Dalton, K. (1964). The premenstrual syndrome. Heinemann, London.

Dalton, K. (1977). The premenstrual syndrome and progesterone therapy. Heinemann, London.

Daly, D. D. (1975). Ictal clinical manifestations of complex partial seizures. In Advances in neurology (ed. J. K. Penry and D. Daly), Vol. 11. Raven Press, New York.

Danford, D. E. and Huber, A. M. (1982). Pica among mentally retarded adults. American Journal of Mental Deficiency 87, 141-6.

Davenloo, H. (ed.) (1980). Short term dynamic psychotherapy. Aronson, New York.

David, S. A., Wessely, S., and Pelosi, A. J. (1988). Postviral fatigue syndrome: time for a new approach. British Medical Journal 296, 696–700.

Davidson, D. G. D. and Eastham, W. N. (1966). Acute hepatic necrosis following overdose of paracetamol. British Medical Journal ii, 497-9.

Davidson, J. R. T. (1972). Postpartum mood change in Jamaican women: a description and a discussion of its significance. British Journal of Psychiatry 121, 659-64.

Davies, A. M. (1986). Epidemiological data on the health of the elderly: a review of the present state of research (ed. H. Häfner, G. Moschel, and N. Sartorius). Springer-Verlag, Berlin.

Davies, A. M. and Fleischman, R. (1981). Health status and the use of health services as reported by older residents of the Baka neighbourhood, Jerusalem. Israeli Medical Sciences 17, 138-44.

Davies, B. M. and Morgenstern, F. S. (1960). A case of cysticercosis, temporal lobe epilepsy and transvestism. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and Psychiatry 23, 247-9.

Davies, D. L. (1962). Normal drinking in recovered alcohol addicts. Quarterly Journal of Studies on Alcohol 23, 94-104.

Davies, D. M. (1987). Textbook of adverse drug reactions (3rd edn). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Davis, J. M. (1976). Comparative doses and costs of antipsychotic medication. Archives of General Psychiatry 33, 858-61.

Davis, J. M., Schaffer, C. B., Killian, G. A., Kinard, C., and Chan, C. (1980). Important issues in the drug treatment of schizophrenia. Schizophrenia Bulletin 6, 70–87.

Davis, K. L. and Mohs, R. C. (1986). Cholinergic drugs in Alzheimer’s disease. New England Journal of Medicine 315, 1286-7.

Davison, A. N. (1984). Neurobiology and neurochemistry of the developing brain. In Scientific Studies in Mental Retardation (ed. J. Dobbing, A. D. B. Clarke, J. A. Corbett, and R. O. Robinson). Royal Society of Medicine and Macmillan, London.

Davison, G. (1968). Elimination of a sadistic fantasy by a client-controlled counterconditioning technique: a case study. Journal of Abnormal Psychology 73, 84–90.

Davison, K. (1983). Schizophrenia like psychoses associated with cerebral disorders: a review. Psychiatric Developments 1, 1-34.

Davison, K. and Bagley, C. R. (1969). Schizophrenia-like psychoses associated with organic disorders of the central nervous system: a review of the literature. In Current problems in neuropsychiatry. British Journal of Psychiatry Special Publication No. 4 (ed. R. N. Herrington). Headley Brothers, Ashford, Kent.

Dawkins, S. (1961). Non-consummation of marriage. Lancet ii, 1029-33.

Dawson, J. (1987). Royal Free disease: perplexity continues. British Medical Journal 294, 327-8.

de Alarcon, R. (1969). The spread of heroin abuse in a community. WHO Bulletin on Narcotics 21, 17–22.

de Alarcon, R. D. and Franchesini, J. A. (1984). Hyperparathyroidism and paranoid psychosis; case report and review of the literature. British Journal of Psychiatry 145, 477-86.

Dean, C. (1987). Psychiatric morbidity following mastectomy: preoperative predictors and types of illness. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 31, 385-92.

Dean, C. and Kendell, R. E. (1981). The symptomatology of puerperal illnesses. British Journal of Psychiatry 139, 128-33.

Deary, I. J. and Whalley, L. J. (1988). Recent research on the causes pf Alzheimer’s disease. British Medical Journal 297, 807-8.

De Clérambault, G. (1921). Les délires passionels. Erotomanie, revendication, jalousie. Bulletin de la société clinique de Médicine Mentale 61–71.

De Clérambault, G. G. (1987). Psychoses of passion (English translation). In The clinical roots of the schizophrenia concept (ed. J. Cutting and M. Shepherd). Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Déjerine, J. and Gauckler, E. (1913). Psychoneurosis and psychotherapy (translated by S. E. Jelliffe and J. B. Lippincott. Reissued by Amo Press, New York.)

Delahunty, J. E, and Ardran, G. M. (1970). Globus hystericus: a manifestation of reflux oesophagitis. Journal of Laryngology and Otology 84, 1049-54.

D’Elia, G. and Raotma, H. (1975). Is unilateral ECT less effective than bilateral ECT? British Journal of Psychiatry 126, 83-9.

Dell, S. (1984). Murder into manslaughter. Maudsley Monograph No. 27, Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Dell, S. (1987). Detention in Broadmoor. British Journal of Psychiatry 150, 824-7.

Dell, S., Robertson, G., and Parker, E. (1987). Detention in Broadmoor: factors in length of stay. British Journal of Psychiatry 150, 824-7.

de Maré, P. B. and Kreeger, L. C. (1974). Introduction to group treatments in psychiatry. Butterworths, London.

Denker, S. J. (1958). A follow-up study of 128 closed head injuries in twins using co-twins as controls. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica Suppl. 123, 1-125.

Denko, J. D. and Kaelbling, R. (1962). The psychiatric aspects of hypoparathyroidism. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica Suppl. 164, 1-70.

Denmark, J. C. (1985). A study of 250 patients referred to a department of psychiatry for the deaf British Journal of Psychiatry 146, 282-6.

Department of the Environment (1976). Drinking and driving. Report of the Departmental Committee. (Blennerhassett Report.) HMSO, London.

Department of Health and Social Security (1971). Better services for the mentally handicapped. HMSO, London.

Department of Health and Social Security (1972). Services for mental illness related to old age. HMSO, London.

Department of Health and Social Security (1975). Better services for the mentally ill. HMSO, London.

Department of Health and Social Security (1978a). Advisory committee on alcoholism: report on prevention. HMSO, London.

Department of Health and Social Security (1978b). A happier old age. HMSO, London.

Department of Health and Social Security (1984). The management of deliberate self harm. HM (84) 25. DHSS, London.

Department of Health and Social Security (1985). Government response to the second report from the Social Services Committee, 1984-85 Session. Community Care. HMSO, London.

Derogatis, L. R. et al. (1985). Prevalence of psychiatric disorders among cancer patients. Journal of the American Medical Association 249, 751-7.

Detera-Wadleigh, S. D., Berrettini, W. H., Goldini, R., Boorman, D., Anderson, S., and Gershon, E. S. (1987). Close linkage of the C-Harvey-ras-1 and the insulin gene to affective disorder is ruled out in three North American pedigrees. Nature 325, 306-7.

Devlen, J., Maguire, P., Phillips, P., Crowther, D., and Chambers, H. (1987). Psychological problems associated with diagnosis and treatment of lymphomas. British Medical Journal 295, 953-7.

Dew, M. A., Bromet, E. J., Brent, D., and Greenhouse, J. B. (1987). A quantitive literature review of the effectiveness of suicide prevention centers. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 55, 239-44.

Dewhurst, D. (1969). The neurosyphilitic psychoses today: a survey of 91 cases. British Journal of Psychiatry 115, 31-8.

Dewhurst, K. (1980). Thomas Willis’s Oxford lectures. Sandford Publications, Oxford.

Dewhurst, K., Oliver, J. E., and McKnight, A. L. (1970). Sociopsychiatric consequences of Huntington’s disease. British Journal of Psychiatry 116, 255-8.

Dewhurst, W. G. (1968). Methysergide in mania. Nature 219, 506-7.

Dicks, H. (1967). Marital tensions: clinical studies towards a psychological theory of interaction. Routledge and Kegan Paul, London.

Dight, S. E. (1976). Scottish drinking habits: a survey of Scottish drinking habits and attitudes towards alcohol. Office of Population Censuses and Surveys. HMSO, London.

DiMascio, A. (1973). The effects of benzodiazepines on aggression: reduced or increased? In The benzodiazepines (ed. S. Garattini, E. Mussini and L. O. Randall). Raven Press, London.

DiMascio, A., Weissman, M. M., Prusoff, B. A., Neu, C., Zwiling, M., and Klerman, G. L. (1979). Differential symptom reduction by drugs and psychotherapy in acute depression. Archives of General Psychiatry 36, 1450-6.

Dimsdale, J. E. (1988). A perspective on type A behaviour and coronary disease. New England Journal of Medicine 318, 110-12.

Dodrill, C. B. (1975). Effects of sulthiame upon intellectual, neuro-psychological and social function abilities of adult epileptics: comparison with diphenylhydantoin. Epilepsia 16, 627-5.

Doehrman, S. R. (1977). Psychosocial aspects of recovery from coronary heart disease: a review. Social Science and Medicine 11, 199–218.

Dollard, J. and Miller, N. E. (1950). Personality and psychotherapy. McGraw-Hill, New York.

Donnely, J. (1978). The incidence of psychosurgery in the United States 1971-73. American Journal of Psychiatry 135, 1476-80.

d’Orban, P. T. (1976). Child stealing: a typology of female offenders. British Journal of Criminology 16, 275-9.

d’Orban, P. T. (1979). Women who kill their children. British Journal of Psychiatry 134, 560-71.

d’Orban, P. T. (1983). Medicolegal aspects of the premenstrual syndrome. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 26, 404-9.

Dorian, B., and Garfinkel, P. E. (1987). Stress, immunity and illness — a review. Psychological Medicine 17, 393–407.

Dorner, S. (1976). Adolescents with spina bifida: how they see the situation. Archives of Disease in Childhood 51, 439-44.

Douglas, J. and Richman, N. (1984). My child won’t sleep: a handbook for management for parents. Penguin, London.

Douglas, J. W. B. and Blomfield, J. M. (1958). Children under five. George Allen, London.

Dreifuss, F. E., Bancaud, J., Henricksen, O. et al (1981). Proposal for a revised clinical and electroencephalographic classification of epileptic seizures. Epilepsia 22, 489–503.

Drife, J. O. (1987). Pseudocyesis. Integrative Psychiatry 5, 194–200.

Drossman, D. A. (1982). Patients with psychogenic pain: six years’ observation in the medical setting. American Journal of Psychiatry 139, 1549–1557.

Drossman, D. A. (1986). The psychosocial aspects of inflammatory bowel disease. Stress Medicine 2, 119-28.

Drugs and Therapeutics Bulletin (1981a). Lithium updated. Drugs and Therapeutics Bulletin 19, 21-4.

Drugs and Therapeutics Bulletin (1981b). Sodium valproate reassessed. Drugs and Therapeutics Bulletin 19, 93-5.

Drugs and Therapeutics Bulletin (1983). Drugs which can be given to nursing mothers. Drugs and Therapeutics Bulletin 21, 5–8.

Dubowitz, V. and Hersov, L. (1976). Management of children with non-organic (hysterical) disorders of motor function. Developmental Medicine and Child Neurology 18, 358-68.

Duffy, J. (1977). Estimating the proportion of heavy drinkers. In The Ledermann curve (ed. D. L. Davies). Alcohol Education Centre, London.

Dunbar, G. C. and Morgan D. D. V. (1987). The changing pattern of alcohol consumption in England and Wales 1978-85. British Medical Journal 295, 807-10.

Dunbar, H. F. (1954). Emotions and bodily changes. Columbia University Press, New York.

Dunbar, J. A., Ogston, S. A., Ritchie, A., Devgun, M. S., Hagart, J., and Martin, B. T. (1985). Are problem drinkers dangerous drivers? An investigation of arrest for drinking and driving, serum gamma glutyl-transpeptidase activities, blood alcohol concentrations and road accidents: the Tayside safe-driving project. British Medical Journal 290, 827-30.

Dunham, H. W. (1965). Community and schizophrenia: an epidemiological analysis. Wayne State University Press, Detroit.

Dunlap, K. (1932). Habits: their making and unmaking. Liverheight Publishing Corporation, New York.

Dunner, D. L., Ishiki, D., Avery, D. H., Wilson, L. G. and Hyde, T. S. (1986). Effect of alprazolam and diazepam on anxiety and panic attacks in panic disorder: a controlled trial. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry 47, 458-60.

Durkheim, E. (1951). Suicide: a study in sociology (translated by J. A. Spaulding and G. Simpson). Free Press, Glencoe, Ill.

Eagles, J. M. and Besson, J. O. (1985). Changes in the incidence of alcohol-related problems in north-east Scotland, 1971–1982. British Journal of Psychiatry 147, 39–43.

Eastwood, R. and Corbin, S. (1985). Epidemiology of mental disorders in old age. In Recent advances of psychogeriatics (ed. T. Arie). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Eastwood, R. and Trevelyan, M. H. (1972). Relationship between physical and psychiatric disorder. Psychological Medicine 2, 363-72.

Eaton, J. W. and Weil, R. J. (1955). Culture and mental disorders: a comparative study of the Hutterites and other populations. Free Press, Glencoe, Ill.

Eaton, L. F. and Menolascino, F. J. (1982). Psychiatric disorders in the mentally retarded: types, problems and challenges. American Journal of Psychiatry 139, 1297-303.

Eddieston, A. I. W. and Davis, M. (1982). Histocompatibility antigens in alcoholic liver disease. British Medical Bulletin 38, 13–16.

Edeh, J. and Toone, B. (1987). Relationship between interictal psychopathology and type of epilepsy. British Journal of Psychiatry 151, 95-101.

Edlund, M. J. and Craig, T. J. (1984). Antipsychotic drug use and birth defects: an epidemiologic assessment. Comprehensive Psychiatry 25, 32-7.

Edwards, G. (1976). Cannabis and the psychiatric position. In Cannabis and health (ed. J. D. P. Graham). Academic Press, London.

Edwards, G. (1979). British policies on opiate addiction. British Journal of Psychiatry 134, 1-13.

Edwards, G. (1983). Alcohol and advice to the pregnant women. British Medical Journal 286, 247-8.

Edwards, G. (1985). A later follow-up of a classic case series: D. L. Davies’ 1962 report and its significance for the present. Journal of Studies on Alcohol 46, 181-90.

Edwards, G., Hensman, C., and Peto, J. (1971). Drinking problems among recidivist prisoners. Psychological Medicine 1, 388-99.

Edwards, G., Chandler, J., and Hensman, C. (1972). Drinking in a London suburb. Quarterly Journal of Studies on Alcoholism Suppl. No. 6, 69-128.

Edwards, G., Hawker, A., Hensman, C., Peto, J., and Williamson, V. (1973). Alcoholics known or unknown to agencies: epidemiological studies in a London suburb. British Journal of Psychiatry 123, 169-83.

Edwards, G., Grossman, M. M., Keller, M., Moser, J., and Room, R. (1977a). Alcohol related disabilities. World Health Organization, Geneva.

Edwards, G. et al. (1977b). Alcoholism: a controlled trial of ’treatment’ and ’advice’. Journal of Studies on Alcohol 38, 1004-31.

Egeland, J. A. et al. (1987). Bipolar affective disorders linked to DNA markers on chromosome 11. Nature 325, 783-7.

Ehrhardt, A. A., Epstein, R., and Money, J. (1968). Fetal androgens and female gender identity in the early-treated adrenogenital syndrome. Johns Hopkins Medical Journal 122, 160-7.

Eisenberg, L. (1958). School phobia — a study in the communication of anxiety. American Journal of Psychiatry 114, 712-18.

Eisenberg, L. (1980). Adolescent suicide: on taking arms against a sea of troubles. Paediatrics 66, 315-20.

Eisenberg, L. (1986). Does bad news about suicide beget bad news? New England Journal of Medicine 315, 705-7.

Eisenberg, L., Connors, C. K., and Sharpe, L. (1965). A controlled study of the differential application of outpatient psychiatric treatment for children. Japanese Journal of Psychiatry 6, 125-32.

Eisendrath, S. J., Way, L. W., Ostroff, J. W., and Johanson, C. A. (1986). Identification of psychogenic abdominal pain. Psychosomatics 27, 705-12.

Eiser, C. (1986). Effects of chronic illness on the child’s intellectual development. Journal of the Royal Society of Medicine 79, 2–3.

Eisinger, A. J., et al (1972). Female homosexuality. Nature 238, 157.

Eitinger, L. (1960). The symptomatology of mental disease among refugees in Norway. Journal of Mental Science 106, 947-66.

El-Guebaly, N. and Offord, D. R. (1977). The offspring of alcoholics: a critical review. American Journal of Psychiatry 134, 357-65.

Ellenberg, J. H., Hirtz, D. G. and Nelson, K. B. (1986). Do seizures in children cause intellectual deterioration? New England Journal of Medicine 314, 1085-8.

Ellenberger, H. F. (1970). The discovery of the unconscious. Basic Books, New York.

Ellis, A. (1956). The effectiveness of psychotherapy in individuals who have severe homosexual problems. Journal of Consulting Psychology 20, 191-5.

Ellis, A. (1979). Reasons and emotion in psychotherapy. Citadel Press, Syracuse, NJ.

Ellis, A. and Brancale, R. (1956). The physiology of sex offenders. Thomas, Springfield, Ill.

Ellis, H. (1901). Studies in the psychology of sex, Vol. 2. Sexual inversion. Davis, Philadelphia.

Ellis, H. (1928). Studies in the psychology of sex. Vol. 7. Eonism and other supplementary studies. Davis, Philadelphia.

Emery, A. E. H. and Pullen, I. (1984). Psychological aspects of genetic counselling. Academic Press, London.

Endicott, J. and Spitzer, R. L. (1978). A diagnostic interview: the schedule for affective disorders and schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry 35, 837-44.

Endicott, J. and Spitzer, R. L. (1979). Use of the research diagnostic criteria and the schedule for affective disorders and schizophrenia to study affective disorders. American Journal of Psychiatry 136, 52-6.

Engel, G. (1958). Psychogenic pain and the pain prone person. American Journal of Medicine 26, 899–918.

Engel, G. (1962). Psychological development in health and disease. Saunders, Philadelphia.

Engel, G. (1967). Medical education and the psychosomatic approach: a report on the Rochester experience. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 11, 77–83.

Engel, G. (1980). The clinical application of the biopsychosocial model. American Journal of Psychiatry 137, 535-44.

Engel, G. and Romano, J. (1959). Delirium, a syndrome of cerebral insufficiency. Journal of Chronic Diseases 9, 260-77.

Engel, G., Logan, M., and Ferris, E. B. (1947). Hyperventilation: analysis of clinical symptomatology. Annals of Internal Medicine 27, 683–704.

Enoch, M. D. and Trethowan, W. H. (1979). Uncommon psychiatric syndromes. Wright, Bristol.

Epstein, A. W. (1960). Fetishism: a study of its psychopathology with particular reference to a proposed disorder in brain mechanisms as an aetiological factor Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 130, 107-19.

Epstein, A. W. (1961). Relationship of fetishism and transvestism to brain and particularly to temporal lobe dysfunction. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 133, 247-53.

Erkinjuntti, T., Wikstrom, J., Palo, J., and Autio, L. (1986). Dementia among medical in-patients. Archives of Internal Medicine 146, 1923-6.

Errera, P. (1962). Some historical aspects of the concept, Phobia. Psychiatric Quarterly 36, 325-36.

Esquirol, E. (1838). Des maladies mentales. Baillière, Paris. (Reprinted in 1976 by Amo Press, New York.)

Esquirol, E. (1845). Mental maladies: a treatise on insanity. Lea and Blanchard, Philadelphia.

Essen-Möller, E. (1971). Suggestions for further improvement of the international classification of mental disorders. Psychological Medicine 1, 308-11.

Evans, D. R. (1970). Exhibitionism. In Symptoms of psychopathology (ed. C. G. Costello), pp. 7-59. Wiley, New York.

Evans, N. J. R., Baldwin, J. A., and Gath, D. H. (1974). The incidence of cancer among patients with affective disorder. British Journal of Psychiatry 124, 518-5.

Evans, R. W., Hanninen, D. L., Garrison, L. P., et al. (1985). Quality of life of patients with end stage renal disease. New England Journal of Medicine 312, 553-9.

Ewing, J. A. and Rouse, B. A. (1976). Failure of an experimental treatment program to inculcate controlled drinking in alcoholics. British Journal of Addiction 71, 123-34.

Ey, H., Bernard, P., and Brisset, C. (1960). Acute delusional psychoses. In Themes and variations in European psychiatry (1974) (ed. S. R. Hirsch and M. Shepherd). Wright, Bristol.

Eysenck, H. J. (1952). The effects of psychotherapy: an evaluation. Journal of Considting Psychology 16, 319-24.

Eysenck, H. J. (1957). The dynamics of anxiety and hysteria. Routledge and Kegan Paul, London.

Eysenck, H. J. (1960). Behaviour therapy and the neuroses. Pergamon Press, Oxford.

Eysenck, H. J. (1970a). Crime and personality. Paladin Press, London.

Eysenck, H. J. (1970b). A dimensional system of psycho-diagnosis. In New approaches to personality classification (ed. A. R. Mahrer), pp. 169–207. Columbia University Press, New York.

Eysenck, H. J. (1976). The learning theory model of neurosis: a new approach. Behaviour Research and Therapy 14, 251-67.

Fabrega, H. (1987). Psychiatric diagnosis, a cultural perspective. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 175, 383-94.

Faergeman, P. M. (1963). Psychogenic psychoses. Butterworths, London.

Fagan, J. and Shepherd, I. L. (eds.) (1971). Gestalt therapy now. Harper Colophon, New York.

Fairburn, C. (1981). A cognitive behavioural approach to the treatment of bulimia. Psychological Medicine 11, 707-11.

Fairbum, C. and Hope, A. (1988). Eating disorder. In Companion to Psychiatric Studies (ed. Kendell, R. E. and Zealley, A, K.). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Fairbum, C. G. (1985). Cognitive behavioural treatment for bulimia. In Handbook of psychotherapy for anorexia nervosa and bulimia (eds. D. M. and P. E. Garfinkel). Guilford Press, New York.

Fairbum, C. G. (1987). The uncertain status of the cognitive approach to bulimia nervosa. In The psychobiology of bulimia nervosa (eds. K. M. Pirke, D. Ploog, and W. Vandereycken). Springer, Berlin.

Fairbum, C. G., Wu, F. C., and McCullock, D. K. (1982). The clinical features of diabetic impotence: a preliminary study. British Journal of Psychiatry 140, 447-52.

Faizallah, R., Woodrow, J. C., Krasner, N. K., Walker, R. J., and Morris, A. I. (1982). Are HLA antigens important in the development of alcohol-induced liver disease? British Medical Journal 285, 533-4.

Falloon, I. R. H., McGill, C. W., Boyd, J. L. and Pederson, J. (1987). Family management in the prevention of morbidity of schizophrenia: social outcome of a two-year longitudinal study. Psychological Medicine 17, 59–66.

Fallowfield, L. J., Baum, M., and Maguire, G. P. (1986). Effects of breast conservation on psychological morbidity associated with diagnosis and treatment of early breast cancer. British Medical Journal 293, 1331-4.

Fallowfield, L. J., Baum, M., and Maguire, G. P. (1987). Addressing the psychological needs of the conservative treated breast cancer patient: discussion paper. Journal of the Royal Society of Medicine 80, 696–700.

Falret, J. P. (1854). Mémoire sur la folie circulaire. Bulletin de l’Academie de Médicine 19, 382–415. [Translated into English in Sedler, M. J., and Dessain, E. C. (1983). Falret’s discovery: the origin of the concept of bipolar affective illness. American Journal of Psychiatry 140, 1227-33.]

Fanshel, D. (1981). Decision-making under uncertainty: foster care for abused or neglected children? American Journal of Public Health 71, 685-6.

Farde, L., Wiesel, F-A., Hall, H., Halldin, C., Stone-Elander, S., and Sedvall, G. (1987). No D₂ receptor increase in PET study of schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry 44, 671-2.

Farina, A., Barry, H., and Garmezy, N. (1963). Birth order of recovered and nonrecovered schizophrenics. Archives of General Psychiatry 9, 224-8.

Faris, R. E. L. and Dunham, H. W. (1939). Mental disorders in urban areas. I Chicago University Press, Chicago.

Farmer, A., Jackson, R., McGuffm, P., and Storey, P. (1987). Cerebral ventricular enlargement in chronic schizophrenia: consistencies and contradictions. British Journal of Psychiatry 150, 324-30.

Farrell, B. A. (1979). Mental illness: a conceptual analysis. Psychological Medicine 9, 21–35.

Farrell, B. A. (1981). The standing of psychoanalysis. Oxford University Press.

Farrington, D. P., Biron, L., and Lerblue, M. (1982). Personality and delinquency. In Abnormal offenders, delinquency and the criminal justice system (ed. J. Gunn and D. P. Farrington). Wiley, Chichester.

Faulk, M. (1988). Basic forensic psychiatry. Blackwell, Oxford.

Faulstich, M. E. and Williamson, D. A. (1985). An overview of atopic dermatitis: toward a bio-behavioural integration. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 29, 647-54.

Fawcett, J., Scheftner, W., Clark, D., Gibbens, R., and Coryell, W. (1987). Clinical predictors of suicide in patients with major affective disorders: a controlled prospective study. American Journal of Psychiatry 144, 35–40.

Feighner, J. P., Robins, E., Guze, S. B., Woodruff, R. A., Winokur, G., and Munoz, R. (1972). Diagnostic criteria for use in psychiatric research. Archives of General Psychiatry 26, 57–63.

Feingold, B. F. (1975). Hyperkinesis and learning difficulties linked to artificial food and colors. American Journal of Nursing 75, 797–803.

Feinmann, C. and Harris, M. (1984). Psychogenic facial pain. Part 1: The clinical presentation. British Dental Journal 156, 165.

Feinmann, C., Harris, M., and Cawley, R. (1984). Psychogenic facial pain: presentation and treatment. British Medical Journal 288, 436-8.

Feldman, F., Cantor, D., Soll, S., and Bachrach, W. (1967). Psychiatric study of a consecutive series of 34 patients with ulcerative colitis. British Medical Journal iii, 711-14.

Feldman, M. P. and McCulloch, M. J. (1979). Homosexual behaviour, therapy and assessment. Pergamon Press, Oxford.

Fenichel, O. (1945). The psychoanalytic theory of neurosis. Kegan Paul, Trench and Trubner, London.

Fenton, G. W. (1983). Epilepsy, personality and behaviour. In Research progress in epilepsy (ed. F. C. Rose). Pitman, Bath.

Fenton, G. W. (1986). Epilepsy and hysteria. British Journal of Psychiatry 149, 28–37.

Fenton, W. S., Mosher, L. R., and Matthews, S. M. (1981). Diagnosis of schizophrenia: a critical review of current diagnostic systems. Schizophrenia Bulletin 7, 452-76.

Ferdijae, W. E. (1978). Learning process in pain. In The psychology of pain (ed. R. A. Steinback). Raven Press, New York.

Fernando, S., and Storm, V. (1984). Suicide among psychiatric patients of a district general hospital. Psychological Medicine 14, 661-72.

Ferrari, M. (1984). Chronic illness: psychosocial effects on siblings. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 25, 459-76.

Ferreira, A. J. and Winter, W. D. (1965). Family interaction and decision making. Archives of General Psychiatry 13, 214-23.

Ferrier, I. N., Roberts, G. W., Crow, T. J., et al. (1983). Reduced cholecystokinin-like and somatostatin-like immunoreactivity in limbic lobe is associated with negative symptoms of schizophrenia. Life Sciences 3, 475-82.

Field, E. (1967). A validation of Hewitt and Jenkins’ hypothesis. Home Office Research Unit Publication No. 10. HMSO, London.

Fielding, D., Moore, B., Dewey, M., Ashley, P., McKendrick, T., and Pinkerton, P. (1985). Children with end-stage renal failure: psychological effects on patients, siblings and parents. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 29, 457-65.

Fieve, R. R., Platman, S. R., and Plutchik, R. R. (1968). The use of lithium in affective disorders: I. Acute endogenous depression. American Journal of Psychiatry 125, 487-91.

Finkelhor, D. (1984). Child sexual abuse: new theory and research. Chapter 5, pp. 53–68. Free Press, London.

Firth, M. A. (1983). Diagnosis of Duchenne muscular dystrophy: experience of parents of sufferers. British Medical Journal 286, 700-1.

Fischer, M. (1973). Genetic and environmental factors in schizophrenia: a study of twins and their families. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica Suppl. 238.

Fish, F. J. (1974). Clinical psychopathology (revised by M. Hamilton). Wright, Bristol.

Fishbain, D. A., and Aldrich, T. E. (1985). Suicide pacts: international comparisons. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 46, 11–15.

Fisher, C. (1984). Psychiatric aspects of shoplifting. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 27, 209-12.

Fisher, C. M. and Adams, R. D. (1958). Transient global amnesia. Transactions of the American Nèurological Association 143-6.

Fisher, C. M. and Adams, R. D. (1964). Transient global amnesia. Acta Neurologica Scandinavica Suppl. 9, 7-83.

Fisher, S. and Greenberg, R. P. (1977). The scientific credibility of Freud’s theories and therapy. Basic Books, New York.

Fitzgerald, R. G. (1970). Reactions to blindness. Archives of General Psychiatry 22, 370-9.

Fitzpatrick, R. and Hopkins, A. (1981). Referrals to neurologists for headaches not due to structural disease. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and Psychiatry 44, 1061-7.

Floud, J. and Young, W. (1981). Dangerousness and criminal justice. Heinemann, London.

Folks, D. G. and Freeman, A. M. (1985). Munchausen’s syndrome and other factitious illness. Psychiatric Clinics of North America 8, 263-78.

Follick, M. J., Smithy, T. W., and Turk, D. C. (1984). Psychosocial adjustment following ostomy. Health Psychology 3, 505-17.

Folsom, J. C. (1967). Intensive hospital therapy for psychogeriatric patients. Current Psychiatric Therapy 7, 209-15.

Folstein, M. F., Folstein, S. E., and McHugh, P. R. (1975). ’Mini-mental state’. A practical method for grading the cognitive state of patients for the clinician. Journal of Psychiatric Research 12, 189-98.

Folstein, S. and Rutter, M. (1971). Infantile autism: a genetic study of 21 twin pairs. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 18, 297–321.

Folstein, S. E., Abbott, M. H., Chase, G. A., Jensen, B. A., and Folstein, M. F. (1983). The association of affective disorder with Huntington’s disease in a case series and in families. Psychological Medicine 13, 537-42.

Foncin, J. F. and El Hachini, K. H. (1986). Neurofibrillary degeneration in Alzheimer’s disease: a discussion with a contribution to aluminum pathology in man. In Senile dementias: early detection (ed. J. Bes, J. Cahn, R. Cahn, S. Hoyer, J. P. Marc-Vergnes, and H. M. Wisniewski), pp. 191–201. Eurotext, London.

Ford, C. S. and Beach, F. A. (1952). Patterns of sexual behaviour. Eyre and Spottiswoode, London.

Ford, M. J. (1986). The irritable bowel syndrome. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 30, 399–401.

Ford, M. J., Eastwood, J., and Eastwood, M. A. (1982). The irritable bowel syndrome: soma and psyche. Psychological Medicine 12, 705-8.

Fordyce, W. E. (1982). A behavioural perspective on chronic pain. British Journal of Clinical Psychology 21, 313-20.

Forester, B., Kornfeld, D. S., and Fleiss, J. L. (1985). Psychotherapy during radiotherapy: effects on emotional and physical distress. American Journal of Psychology 142, 22-7.

Forreyt, J. P., Goodrick, G. K., and Gotto, A. M. (1981). Limitations of behavioural treatment of obesity: review and analysis. Journal of Behavioral Medicine 4, 159-74.

Foster, E. M., Kay, D. W. K., and Bergmann, K. (1976). The characteristics of old people receiving and needing domiciliary services. Age and Ageing 5, 345-55.

Fottrell, E. (1980). A study of violent behaviour among patients in psychiatric hospitals. British Journal of Psychiatry 136, 216-21.

Foulds, G. A. (1965). Personality and personal illness. Tavistock, London.

Foulds, G. A. (1976). The hierarchical nature of personal illness. Academic Press, London.

Foulkes, S. H. (1948). Introduction to group-analytic psychotherapy. Heinemann, London.

Foulkes, S. H. and Anthony, E. J. (1957). Group psychotherapy: the psychoanalytic approach. Penguin, Harmondsworth.

Foulkes, S. H. and Lewis, E. (1944). Group analysis: a study in the treatment of groups on psychoanalytic lines. British Journal of Medical Psychology 20, 175-82.

Foundeur, M., Fixsen, C., Triebei, W. A., and White, M. A. (1957). Post-partum mental illness. Archives of Neurology and Psychiatry 77, 503-12.

Fowler, R. C., Rich, C. L., and Young, D. (1986). San Diego suicide study. II. substance abuse in young cases. Archives of General Psychiatry 43, 962-5.

Fox, B. H. (1978). Premorbid psychological factors as related to cancer incidence. Journal of Behavioural Medicine 1, 45-133.

Fox, J. H., Ramsey, R. G., Huckman, M. S., and Proske, A. E. (1976). Cerebral ventricular enlargement. Chronic alcoholics examined by computerised tomography. Journal of the American Medical Association 236, 365-8.

Frank, J. D., Bliedman, L. H., Imber, S. D., Nash, E. H., and Stone, A. R. (1957). Why patients leave psychotherapy. Archives of Neurology and Psychiatry 77, 283-99.

Frank, J. D., Hoehn-Sarik, R., Imber, S. D., Liberman, B. L., and Stone, A. R. (1978). Effective ingredients of successful psychotherapy. Brunner-Mazel, New York.

Frank, R. G., Kashani, J. H., Kashani, S. R., Wanderlich, S. A., Umlauf, R. L., and Ashkazai, G. S. (1984). Psychological response to amputation as a function of age and time since amputation. British Journal of Psychiatry 144, 493-7.

Frank, R. G., Elliott, T. R., Corcoran, J. R., and Wonderlich, S. A. (1987). Depression after spinal cord injury: is it necessary? Clinical Psychology Review 7, 611-30.

Frank, O. S. (1985). Dysmorphophobia. In Current themes in psychiatry (ed. R. N. Gaind, F. I. Fawzy, B. L. Hudson, and p.. O. Pasnau), Vol. 4. Medical and Scientific Books, New York.

Fras, I., Litin, E. M., and Pearson, J. S. (1967). Comparison of psychiatric symptoms in carcinoma of the pancreas with those in some other intra-abdominal neoplasms. American Journal of Psychiatry 123, 1553-62.

Fraser, R. (1947). The incidence of neurosis among factory workers. Industrial Health Research Board Report Number 90. HMSO, London.

Frederiks, J. A. M. (1969). Disorders of the body schema. In Handbook of clinical neurology (ed. P. J. Vinken and G. W. Bruyn), Vol. 4, Chapter 11, pp. 207-40. North Holland, Amsterdam.

Freeman, C. P. L., and Kendell, R. E. (1980). ECT: patients’ experiences and attitudes. British Journal of Psychiatry 137, 8-16.

Freeman, C. P. L., Basson, J. V., and Crighton, A. (1978). Double blind controlled trial of electroconvulsive therapy (ECT) and simulated ECT in depressive illness. Lancet i, 738-40.

Freeman, C. P. L., Weeks, D., and Kendell, R. E. (1980). ECT: II patients who complain. British Journal of Psychiatry 137, 17–25.

Freeman, H. (ed.) (1984). Mental health and the environment. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Freeman, M. D. A. (1979). The law and sexual deviation. In Sexual deviation (ed. I. Rosen) (2nd edn). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Freeman, W. and Watts, J. W. (1942). Psychosurgery. Thomas, Springfield, Ill.

Fremming, K. H. (1951). The expectation of mental infirmity in a sample of the Danish population. Occasional Papers on Eugenics, No. 7. Cassell, London.

Freud, A. (1936). The ego and the mechanisms of defence. Hogarth Press, London.

Freud, A. (1958). Adolescence. I. Adolescence in the psychoanalytic theory. In The psychoanalytic study of the child (ed. A. Freud) Vol. XIII. International University Press, New York.

Freud, A. (1966). Normality and pathology in childhood: assessments of development. Hogarth Press and Institute of Psychoanalysis, London.

Freud, S. (1893). On the psychical mechanisms of hysterical phenomena. The standard edition of the complete psychological works (ed. J. Strachey), Vol. 3, pp. 25–42. Hogarth Press, London.

Freud, S. (1895a). Obsessions and phobias, their psychical mechanisms and their aetiology. In The standard edition of the complete psychological works (ed: J. Strachey) Vol. 3. Hogarth Press, London.

Freud, S. (1895b). The justification for detaching from neurasthenia a particular syndrome: the ’anxiety neurosis. Neurologisches Zentralblatt 14, 50–66. [Reprinted (translated J. Riviere) 1940 in Collected Papers 1, 76-106.]

Freud, S. (1911). Psychoanalytic notes upon an autobiographic account of cases of paranoia. (Schreber.) In The standard edition of the complete psychological works (1958) Vol. 12, pp. 1-82. Hogarth Press, London.

Freud, S. (1914). Psychopathology of everyday life. Fisher Unwin, London.

Freud, S. (1917). Mourning and melancholia. The standard edition of the complete psychological works. Vol. 14, pp. 243-58. Hogarth Press, London.

Freud, S. (1923). Psychoanalysis. In The standard edition of the complete psychological works. Vol. 18, pp. 235-54. Hogarth Press, London.

Freud, S. (1927). Fetishism. International Journal of Psychoanalysis 9, 161-6. Also in The standard edition of the complete psychological works, Vol. 21, pp. 147-57. Hogarth Press, London.

Freud, S. (1933). Anxiety and instinctual life. In The standard edition of the complete psychological works (ed. J. Strachey), Vol. 22. Hogarth Press, London.

Freud, S. (1935). An autobiographic study. Hogarth Press, London.

Friedhoff, A. and van Winkle, E. (1962). The characteristics of an amine found in the urine of schizophrenic patients. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 135, 550-5.

Friedman, A. S. (1975). Interaction of drug therapy with marital therapy for depressed patients. Archives of General Psychiatry 32, 619-37.

Friedman, D. E. L. (1966). A new technique for the systematic desensitization of phobic symptoms. Behaviour Research and Therapy 4, 139-40.

Freidman, L. J. (1962). Virgin wives: a study of unconsummated marriage. Tavistock, London.

Friedman, M. and Rosenman, R. H. (1959). Association of specific behaviour pattem with blood and cardiovascular findings. Journal of the American Medical Association 169, 1286-96.

Friedman, M., Thorensen, C. E., Gill, J. J., et al. (1982). Feasibility of altering type A behaviour pattern after myocardial infarction. Recurrent coronary prevention project study: methods, base line results and preliminary findings. Circulation 66, 83–92.

Friedman, M., Thorensen, C. E., Gill, J. J. (1986). Alteration of Type A behaviour and its effect on cardiac recurrences in post myocardial infarction patients: summary results of the recurrent coronary prevention project. American Heart Journal 112, 653-65.

Friedman, S. B., Chodoff, P., Mason, J. W., and Hamburg, D. A. (1963). Behavioural observations on patients anticipating the death of a child. Pediatrics 32, 610-25.

Friedman, T. and Gath, D. (1988). The psychiatric consequences of spontaneous abortion. (In press.)

Fromm, E. (1942). The fear of freedom. Kegan Paul, London.

Fromm-Reichman, F. (1948). Notes on the development of treatment of schizophrenia by psychoanalytic psychotherapy. Psychiatry 11, 263-73.

Furniss, T., Bingley-Miller, L., and Bentovim, A. (1984). Therapeutic approach to sexual abuse. Archives of Disease in Childhood 59, 865-70.

Gale, E. and Ayer, W. A. (1969). Treatment of dental phobias. Journal of the American Dental Association 78, 1304-7.

Ganser, S. J. (1898). Über einen eigenartigen hysterischen Dämmerzustand. Archiv ftir Psychiatrie und Nervenkrankheiten 30, 633-40. [Translated by Schorer, C. E. in British Journal of Criminology 5, 120-6 (1965).]

Garbarino, J., Guttman, E., and Seeley, J. W. (1986). The psychologically battered child. Jossey Bass, London.

Gardner, R. (1970). Deaths in United Kingdom opioid users 1965-69. Lancet ii, 650-3.

Gardner, R., Hanka, R., O’Brien, V. C., Page, A. J. F., and Rees, R. (1977). Psychological and social evaluation in cases of deliberate self-poisoning admitted to a general hospital. British Medical Journal ii, 1567-70.

Garfield, S. L. (1980). Psychotherapy: an eclectic approach. Wiley, New York.

Garfield, S. L. and Bergin, A. E. (eds.) (1986). Handbook of psychotherapy and behaviour change (3rd edn). Wiley, New York.

Garfinkel, B. D., Froese, A., and Hood, J. (1982). Suicide attempts in children and adolescents. American Journal of Psychiatry 139, 1257-61.

Garfinkel, P. E. and Gamer, D. N. (1982). Anorexia nervosa: a multidimensional perspective. Brunner-Mazel, New York.

Garfinkel, P. E., Modofsky, H., and Gamer, D. N. (1980a). The heterogeneity of anorexia nervosa. Archives of General Psychiatry 37, 1036-40.

Garfinkel, P. E., Stancer, H. C., and Persad, E. (1980b). A comparison of haloperidol, lithium carbonate and their combination in the treatment of mania. Journal of Affective Disorders 2, 279-88.

Gamer, D. M. (1981). Body image in anorexia nervosa. Canadian Journal of Psychiatry 26, 224-7.

Gamer, D. M. and Garfinkel, P. E. (1980). Socio-cultural factors in the development of anorexia nervosa. Psychological Medicine 10, 647-56.

Garraway, M. (1985). Stroke rehabilitation units: concepts, evaluation and unresolved issues. Stroke 16, 178-81.

Garrick, T. R. and Stottard, N. L. (1982). How to write a psychiatric consultation. American Journal of Psychiatry 139, 849-55.

Garver, D. E. and Davis, L. M. (1979). Biogenic amine hypothesis of affective disorders. Life Science 24, 383-94.

Gastaut, M. (1969). Clinical and electroencephalographic classification of epileptic seizures. Epilepsia Suppl. 10, 2-21.

Gath, A. (1978). Down’s syndrome and the family. Academic Press, London.

Gath, A. (1984). Emotional abuse. Journal of Maternal and Child Health 9, 229-32.

Gath, A. and Gumley, D. (1986). Behaviour problems in retarded children with special reference to Down’s syndrome. British Journal of Psychiatry 149, 156-61.

Gath, D. (1980). Psychiatric aspects of hysterectomy. In The social consequences of psychiatric illness (ed. L. Bosin et al.). Brunner-Mazel, New York.

Gath, D. and Cooper, P. (1982). Psychiatric aspects of hysterectomy and female sterilisation. In Recent advances in psychiatry (ed. K. Granville-Grossman), Vol. 4. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Gath, D. and Iles, S. (1988). Treating the premenstrual syndrome. British Medical Journal 297, 237-8.

Gath, D., Hensman, C., Hawker, A., Kelly, M., and Edwards, G. (1968). The drunk in court: survey of drunkenness offenders from two London courts. British Medical Journal iv, 808-11.

Gath, D., Cooper, P., Gattoni, F., and Rockett, D. (1977). Child guidance and delinquency in a London Borough. Maudsley Monograph No. 24. Oxford University Press, London.

Gath, D., Cooper, P., and Day, A. (1982a). Hysterectomy and psychiatric disorder: I. Levels of psychiatric morbidity before and after hysterectomy. British Journal of Psychiatry 140, 335-42.

Gath, D., Cooper, P., Bond, A., and Edmonds, G. (1982b). Hysterectomy and psychiatric disorder: II. Demographic psychiatric and physical factors in relation to psychiatric outcome. British Journal of Psychiatry 140, 343-50.

Gath, D., Osborn, M., Bungay, G., Iles, S., Day, A., Bond, A., and Passingham, C. (1987). Psychiatric disorder and gynaecological symptoms in middle-aged women: a community survey. British Medical Journal 24, 213-18.

Gath, D. H., Hassall, C., and Cross, K. W. (1973). Whither psychiatric day care? British Medical Journal 1, 94-8.

Gaupp, R. (1914). The scientific significance of the case of Ernst Wagner. In Themes and variations in European psychiatry (ed. S. R. Hirsch and M. Shepherd), pp. 121-33 (1974).

Gayford, J. J. (1979). Battered wives. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 22, 496–503.

Gayford, J. J. (1981). Indecent exposure: a review of the literature. Medicine, Science and the Law 21, 233-42.

Gazzard, R. G., Davis, M., Spooner, J., and Williams, R. (1976). Why do people use paracetamol for suicide? British Medical Journal i, 212-13.

Gebhard, P. H., Raboch, J., and Giese, H. (1970). The sexuality of women (translated by C. Bearne). André Deutsch, London.

Gelder, M. G. (1978). Hormones and post partum depression. In Mental illness in pregnancy and the puerperium (ed. M. Sandler). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Gelder, M. G. (1986a). Neurosis: another tough old word. British Medical Journal 292, 972-3.

Gelder, M. G. (1986b). Panic disorder: new approaches to an old problem. British Journal of Psychiatry 149, 346-52.

Gelder, M. G., Marks, I. M., and Wolff, H. (1967). Desensitization and psychotherapy in phobic states: a controlled enquiry. British Journal of Psychiatry 113, 53–73.

Gelder, M. G., Bancroft, J. H. J., Gath, D. H., Johnston, D. H., Matthews, A. M., and Shaw, P. M. (1973). Specific and non-specific factors in behaviour therapy. British Journal of Psychiatry 123, 445-62.

Gelter, J. L. and Bertsch, G. (1985). Fire-setting behaviour in the histories of a state hospital population. American Journal of Psychiatry 12, 283-99.

General Register Office (1968). A glossary of mental disorders. Studies on Medical and Population Subjects 22. HMSO, London.

Gerbert, B. (1980). Psychological aspects of Crohn’s disease. Journal of Behavioral Medicine 3, 41–58.

German, G. A. (1972). Aspects of clinical psychiatry in Sub-Saharan Africa. British Journal of Psychiatry 121, 461-79.

German, G. A. and Arya, O. P. (1969). Psychiatric morbidity amongst a Uganda student population. British Journal of Psychiatry 115, 1323-9.

Gershon, E. S. and Bunney, W. E. (1976). The question of linkage in manic depressive illness. Journal of Psychiatric Research 13, 99-117.

Gershon, E. S., Mark, A., Cohen, N., Belizon, N., Barron, M., and Knobe, K. E. (1975). Transmitted factors in the morbidity of affective disorders: a controlled study. Journal of Psychiatric Research 12, 283-99.

Gibb, W. R. G. and Lees, A. J. (1985). The neuroleptic malignant syndrome — a review. Quarterly Journal of Medicine 56, 421-9.

Gibbens, T. C. N. and Prince, J. (1965). Child victims of sex offences. Institute for the Study and Treatment of Delinquency, London.

Gibbens, T. C. N. and Robertson, G. (1985). Survey of criminal careers of hospital order patients. British Journal Psychiatry 143, 362-9.

Gibbens, T. C. N., Pond, D. A., and Stafford Clark, D. A. (1959). A follow-up study of criminal psychopaths. Journal of Mental Science 105, 108-15.

Gibbens, T. C. N., Palmer, C., and Prince, J. (1971). Mental health aspects of shoplifting. British Medical Journal iii, 612-15.

Gibbens, T. C. N., Way, C., and Soothill, K. L. (1977). Behavioural types of rape. British Journal of Psychiatry 130, 32–42.

Gibbons, J. S., Butler, J., Urwin, P., and Gibbons, J. L. (1978). Evaluation of a social work service for self-poisoning patients. British Journal of Psychiatry 133, 111-18.

Gibbs, C. J., Gajdusek, D. C., Asher, D. M., Alpers, M. P., Beck, E., Daniel, P. M., and Mathews, W. B. (1968). Creutzfeldt — Jacob disease (spongiform encephalopathy): transmission to the chimpanzee. Science 161, 388-9.

Gibson, A. J., Moyes, I. C. A., and Kendrick, D. (1980). Cognitive assessment of the elderly long stay patient. British Journal of Psychiatry 137, 551-7.

Gibson, E. (1975). Homicide in England and Wales. 1967-71. Home Office Research Study No. 31. HMSO, London.

Gibson, S. and Becker, J. (1973). Changes in alcoholics’ self-reported depression. Quarterly Journal of Studies on Alcohol 34, 829-36.

Gillespie, R. D. (1928). Hypochondria: definition, nosology and psychopathology. Guy’s Hospital Reports 78, 408-60.

Gillespie, R. D. (1929). Clinical differentiation of types of depression. Guy’s Hospital Reports 79, 306-44.

Gillies, N. (1976). Homicide in the west of Scotland. British Journal of Psychiatry 128, 105-27.

Gittelman, R. (1985). Controlled trials of remedial approaches to reading disability. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 6, 843-6.

Gittelson, N. L., Eacott, S. E., and Mehta, B. M. (1978). Victims of indecent exposure. British Journal of Psychiatry 132, 61-6.

Gjessing, R. (1947). Biological investigations in endogenous psychoses. Acta Psychiatrica (Kbh) Suppl. 47.

Glaister, B. (1982). Muscle relaxation training for fear reduction of patients with psychological problems: a review on controlled studies. Behaviour Research and Therapy 20, 493–504.

Glaser, G. H. (1972). Diphenylhydantoin toxicity. In Antiepileptic drugs (ed. M. Dixon, J. Woodbury, J. Kiffin Penry, and R. P. Schmidt), Chapter 20. Raven Press, London.

Glatt, M. M. (1976). Alcoholism: disease concept and lack of control revisited. British Journal of Addiction 71, 135-44.

Glen, A. I. M., Doig, M., Hulme, E. B., and Kreitman, N. (1979). Mortality on lithium. Neuropsychobiology 5, 167-73.

Glen, A. I. M., Johnson, A. L., and Shepherd, M. (1984). Continuation therapy with lithium and amitriptyline in unipolar depressive illness: a randomized, double-blind controlled trial. Psychological Medicine 14, 37–50.

Glickman, L. S. (1980). Psychiatric consultation in the general hospital. Marcel Dekker, New York.

Glue, P. W., Nutt, D. J., Cowen, P. J., and Broadbent, D. (1987). Selective effects of lithium on cognitive performance in man. Psychopharmacology 91, 109-11.

Godfrey, H. P. D. and Knight, R. G. (1987). Interventions for amnesics: a review. British Journal of Clinical Psychology 26, 83–91.

Goffman, E. (1961). Asylums: essays on the social situation of mental patients and other inmates. Doubleday, New York.

Göktepe, E. O., Young, L. B., and Bridges, P. K. (1975). A further review of the results of stereotactic tractotomy. British Journal of Psychiatry 126, 270-81.

Goldberg, D. (1972). The detection of psychiatric illness by questionnaire. Maudsley Monograph No. 21. Oxford University Press, London.

Goldberg; D. (1986). Implementation of mental health policies in the North West of England. In The provision of mental health services in Britain (ed. G. Wilkinson and H. Freeman). Gaskell, London.

Goldberg, D. and Blackwell, B. (1970). Psychiatric illness in general practice. A detailed study using a new method of case identification. British Medical Journal ii, 439-43.

Goldberg, D. and Huxley, P. (1980). Mental illness in the community. Tavistock, London.

Goldberg, D., Richels, J., Downing, R., and Hesbacher, P. (1976). A comparison of two psychiatric screening tests. British Journal of Psychiatry 129, 61-7.

Goldberg, E. M. and Morrison, S. L. (1963). Schizophrenia and social class. British Journal of Psychiatry 109, 785–802.

Goldberg, I., Reglier, D., and McInery, T. K. (1929). The role of the pediatrician in the delivery of the mental health services to children. Pediatrics 63, 898–909.

Goldfried, M. R. and Goldfried, A. P. (1975). Cognitive change methods. In Helping people change (ed. F. H. Kafner and A. P. Goldstein). Pergamon Press, London.

Goldiamond, I. (1965). Self-control procedures in personal behaviour problems. Psychological Reports 17, 851-68.

Goldstein, A., Aronow, L., and Kalman, S. M. (1974). Principles of drug action: the basis of pharmacology (2nd edn). Wiley, New York.

Goldstein, K. (1944). Methodological approach to the study of schizophrenic thought disorder. In Language and thought in schizophrenia (ed. J. S. Kasanin). University of California Press, Berkeley.

Goldstein, K. (1975). Functional disturbance in brain damage. In American handbook of psychiatry (ed. S. Arieti and M. F. Reisser) (2nd edn), Vol. 4. Basic Books, New York.

Goldstein, K. and Scheerer, M. (1941). Abstract and concrete behaviour: an experimental study with special tests. Psychological Monographs 53 No. 239.

Gomez, J. (1975). Subjective side-effects of E. C. T. British Journal of Psychiatry 127, 609-11.

Gomez, J. and Dally, P. (1977). Psychologically mediated abdominal pain in surgical and medical out-patient clinics. British Medical Journal i, 1451-3.

Goodstein, R. K. and Page, A. W. (1981). Battered wife syndrome: overview of dynamics and treatment. American Journal of Psychiatry 1387, 1036-44.

Goodwin, D. W. (1971). Is alcoholism hereditary? Archives of General Psychiatry 25, 545-9.

Goodwin, D. W. (1985). Alcoholism and genetics. Archives of General Psychiatry 42, 171-4.

Goodwin, F. K. and Zis, A. O. (1979). Lithium in the treatment of mania: comparisons with neuroleptics. Archives of General Psychiatry 36, 840-4.

Goodwin, F. K., Murphy, D. L., and Bunney, W. E. (1969). Lithium carbonate treatment in depression and mania: a longitudinal double blind study. Archives of General Psychiatry 21, 486-96.

Goodwin, F. K., Schulsinger, F., Hermansen, L., Guze, S. B., and Winokur, G. (1973). Alcohol problems in adoptees raised apart from alcoholic biological parents. Archives of General Psychiatry 28, 238-43.

Goodwin, F. K., Prange, A. J., Post, R. M., Muscettola, G., and Lipton, M. A. (1982). Potentiation of antidepressant effects by 1-triiodothyronine in tricyclic non-responders. American Journal of Psychiatry 139, 34-8.

Goodyer, I. and Taylor, D. C. (1985). Hysteria. Archives of Diseases in Childhood 60, 680-1.

Gossop, M. (1978). A review of the evidence for methadone maintenance as a treatment for narcotic addiction. Lancet i, 812-15.

Gossop, M. (1981). Theories of neurosis. Springer, Berlin.

Gossop, M., Green, L., Phillips, G., and Bradley, B. (1987). What happens to opiate addicts immediately after treatment: a prospective follow-up study. British Medical Journal 294, 1377-80.

Gostin, L. (1983). The court of protection. Mind, London.

Gostin, L. (1985). Secure provision (ed. L. Gostin). Tavistock, London.

Gottesman, I. and Shields, J. A. (1967). A polygenic theory of schizophrenia. Proceedings of the National Academy of Science 58, 199–205.

Gottesman, I. and Shields, J. A. (1972). Schizophrenia and genetics; a twin study vantage point Academic Press, New York.

Gottesman, I. I., McGuffin, P., and Farmer, A. E. (1987). Clinical genetics as clues to the ’real’ genetics of schizophrenia. Schizophrenia Bulletin 13, 22–47.

Grad, J. and Sainsbury, P. (1966). Evaluating the community psychiatric service in Chichester: results. Millbank Research Fund Quarterly 44, 246-77.

Graham, J. D. P. (ed.) (1976). Cannabis and health Academic Press, London.

Graham, P. (1974). Depression in prepubertal children. Developmental Medicine and Child Neurology 16, 340-9.

Graham, P. (1986). Child psychiatry: a developmental approach Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Graham, P. and Rutter, M. (1968). Organic brain dysfunction and child psychiatric disorder. British Medical Journal iii, 695–700.

Graham, P. and Rutter, M. (1970). Psychiatric aspects of physical disorder. In Education, health and behaviour (ed. M. Rutter, J. Tizard, and K. Whitmore). Longman, London.

Graham, P. and Rutter, M. (1973). Psychiatric disorder in the young adolescent: a follow-up study. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine 66, 1226-9.

Graham, P. and Stevenson, J. (1987). Temperament and psychiatric disorder: the genetic contribution to behaviour in childhood. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry 21, 267-74.

Graham, P. S. (1982). Late paraphrenia. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 27, 522-8.

Grahame-Smith, D. G., Green, A. R., and Costain, D. W. (1978). Mechanisms of the antidepressant action of electroconvulsive therapy. Lancet i, 254-6.

Gralnick, A. (1942). Folie à deux. The psychosis of association. Psychiatric Quarterly 16, 230-63.

Grant, I., Heaton, R. K., McSweeny, J., Adams, K. M., and Timms, R. M. (1982). Neuropsychological findings in hypoxemic chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Archives of Internal Medicine 142, 1470-6.

Gray, J. A. (1971). The psychology of fear and stress. Weidenfeld and Nicholson, London.

Green, A. R. and Costain, D. W. (1979). The biochemistry of depression. In Psychopharmacology of affective disorders (ed. E. S. Paykel and A. Coppen). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Green, A. R. and Costain, D. W. (1981). Pharmacology and biochemistry of psychiatric disorders. Wiley, Chichester.

Green, A. R., and Goodwin, G. M. (1986). Antidepressants and mono-amines: actions and interactions. In The biology of depression (ed. J. F. W. Deakin), pp. 174-89. Gaskell, London.

Green, J. R., Troupin, A. S., Halpem, L. M., Friel, P., and Kanarek, P. (1974). Sulthiame: evaluation as an anticonvulsant. Epilepsia 15, 329-49.

Green, R. (1974). Sexual identity conflict in children and adults. Duckworth, London.

Green, R. (1985). Atypical psychosexual development. In Child and adolescent psychiatry (ed. M. Rutter and L. Hersov) (2nd edn). Blackwell, Oxford.

Green, R. and Money, J. (1961). Effeminacy in prepubertal boys: summary of eleven cases and recommendations for case management. Pediatrics 27, 286-91.

Green, R. and Money, J. (1969). Transsexualism and sex reassignment. Johns Hopkins Press, Baltimore.

Green, W. H., Campbell, M., and David, R. (1984). A comparison of schizophrenic and autistic children. Journal of the American Academy of Child Psychiatry 23, 399–409.

Greenblatt, M., Grosser, G. H., and Wechsler, H. (1964). Differential response of hospitalized patients to somatic therapy. American Journal of Psychiatry 120, 935-43.

Greenson, R. R. (1967). The techniques and practice of psychoanalysis. Hogarth Press, London.

Greer, H. S., Lal, S., Lewis, S. C., Belsey, E. M., and Beard, R. W. (1976). Psychosocial consequences of therapeutic abortion. British Journal of Psychiatry 128, 74-9.

Greer, S. (1969). The prognosis of anxiety states. In Studies in Anxiety (ed. M. H. Lader), pp. 151-7. Royal Medicopsychological Association, London.

Greer, S. (1985). Cancer: psychiatric aspects. In Recent advances in psychiatry (ed. K. Granville-Grossman), Vol. 5. Churchill Liyingstone, Edinburgh.

Greer, S. and Bagley, C. (1971). Effects of psychiatric intervention in attempted suicide: a controlled study. British Medical Journal i, 310-12.

Greer, S. and Cawley, R. H. (1966). Some observations on the natural history of neurotic illness. Australian Medical Association. Mervyn Archdall Medical Monograph No. 3. Australasian Medical Publishing Company.

Greer, S., Marcus, T., and Pettingale, K. W. (1979). Psychological response to breast cancer: effect on outcome. Lancet ii, 785-7.

Gregory, S., Shawcross, C. R., and Gill, D. (1985). The Nottingham ECT study: a double blind comparison of bilateral, unilateral and simulated ECT in depressive illness. British Journal of Psychiatry 146, 520-4.

Griesinger, W. (1867). Mental pathology and therapeutics (translated from the German 2nd edn by C. Lockhart Robertson and J. Rutherford). New Sydenham Society, London.

Griffin, J. C., Ricketts, M. S., Williams, D. E., Locke, B. J., Altmeyer, B. K., and Stark, M. T. (1987). A community survey of self-injurious behavior among developmentally disabled children and adolescents. Hospital and Community Psychiatry 38, 959-63.

Griffin, N., Draper, R. J., and Webb, M. G. T. (1981). Addiction to tranylcypromine. British Medical Journal 283, 346.

Gross, M. M., Rosenblatt, S. M., Lewis, E., Malenowski, B., and Broman, M. (1971). Hallucinations and clouding of sensorium during alcohol withdrawal. Quarterly Journal of Studies on Alcohol 32, 1061-9.

Grundy, E. (1987). Community care for the elderly 1976-84. British Medical Journal 294, 626-9.

Guerrant, J., Anderson, W. W., Fischer, A., Weinstein, M. R., Jaros, R. M., and Deskins, A. (1962). Personality in epilepsy. Thomas, Springfield, Ill.

Guggenheim, F. G. (1986). Psychological aspects of surgery. Advances in psychosomatic medicine. Vol. 15. Karger, Basel.

Gulleminault, C. and Mandini, S. (1984). Sleep disorders. In Recent advances in clinical neurology (ed. W. B. Mathews and G. H. Glaser). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Gunn, J. (1977a). Epileptics in prison. Academic Press, London.

Gunn, J. (1977b). Criminal behaviour and mental disorder. British Journal of Psychiatry 130, 317-29.

Gunn, J. (1979). Forensic psychiatry. In Recent advances in clinical psychiatry (ed. K. Granville-Grossman), Vol. 3. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Gunn, J. (1985a). Sexual offenders. In Current themes in psychiatry (ed. R. N. Gaind, A. Fawzy, B. L. Hudson, and R. O. Pasnau), Vol. 4. Spectrum, New York.

Gunn, J. (1985b). The role of psychiatry in prisons and the right to punishment. In Psychiatry; human rights and the law (ed. M. Roth and R. Bluglass). Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Gunn, J. and Farrington, D. P. (1982). Abnormal offenders: delinquency and the criminal justice system. Wiley, Chichester.

Gunn, J. and Fenton, G. W. (1971). Epilepsy, automatism and crime. Lancet i, 1173-6.

Gunn, J. and Robertson, G. (1982). An evaluation of Grendon Prison. In Abnormal offenders, delinquency and the criminal justice system (ed. J. Gunn and D. P. Farrington). Wiley, Chichester.

Gupta, M. A., Gupta, A. K., and Haberman, H. F. (1987a). The self-inflicted dermatoses: a critical review. General Hospital Psychiatry 9, 45–52.

Gupta, M. A., Gupta, A. K., and Haberman, H. F. (1987b). Psoriasis and psychiatry: an update. General Hospital Psychiatry 9, 157-66.

Gur, R. E. (1986). Cognitive aspects of schizophrenia. Psychiatry update: the American Psychiatric Association annual review (ed. A. J. Frances and R. E. Hales), Vol. 5. American Psychiatric press, Washington, DC.

Gurland, B., et al. (1979). A cross-national comparison of the institutionalised elderly in the cities of New York and London. Psychological Medicine 9, 781-8.

Gurman, A. S. (1979). Research on marital and family therapy: progress, perspective and prospect. In Handbook of psychotherapy and behaviour change (ed. S. L. Garfield and A. E. Bergin) (2nd edn). Wiley, New York.

Gurman, A. S., Kniskern, D. P., and Pinsof, W. M. (1986). Research on the process and outcome of marital and family therapy. In Handbook of psychotherapy and behaviour change (ed. S. Garfield and A. E. Bergin) (3rd edn). Wiley, New York.

Gusella, J. F., Wexler, N. S., Conneally, P. M., et al (1983). Polymorphic DNA marker genetically linked to Huntington’s disease. Nature 306, 234-8.

Gussow, Z. (1963). A preliminary report of kayak-angst among the eskimo of west Greenland: a study in sensory deprivation. International Journal of Social Psychiatry 9, 18–26.

Guttman, E. and Maclay, W. S. (1936). Mescalin and depersonalization; therapeutic experiments. Journal of Neurology and Psychopathology 16, 193–212.

Guze, S. B. (1976). Criminality and psychiatric disorders. Oxford University Press, New York.

Guze, S. B., Woodruff, R. A., and Clayton, P. J. (1971). ’Secondary’ affective disorder: a study of 95 cases. Psychological Medicine 1, 426-8.

Guze, S. B., Cloninger, C. R., Martin, R. L., and Clayton, P. J. (1986). A follow-up and family study of Briquets’ syndrome. British Journal of Psychiatry 149, 17–23.

Hachinski, V., Lassen, N. A., and Marshall, J. (1974). Multiinfarct dementia. Lancet ii, 207-9.

Hachinski, V. C., Iliff, L. D., and Zilkha, E. (1975). Cerebral blood flow in dementia. Archives of Neurology 32, 632-7.

Hackett, T. P. and Cassem, N. H. (1978). Handbook of general hospital psychiatry. Mosby, St. Louis.

Hackett, T. P. and Weissman, A. (1962). The treatment of the dying. Current Psychiatric Therapy 2, 121-6.

Häfner, H. (1987a). Do we still need beds for psychiatric patients? Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 75, 113-26.

Häfner, H. (1987b). The concept of disease in psychiatry. Psychological Medicine 17, 11–14.

Häfner, H. and Reimann, H. (1970). Spatial distribution of mental disorders in Mannheim. In Psychiatric epidemiology (ed. E. H. Hare and J. K. Wing). Oxford University Press, London.

Hagnell, O. (1966). A prospective study of the incidence of mental disorder. Scandinavian University Books, Denmark.

Hagnell, O. (1970). Incidence and duration of episodes of mental illness in a total population. In Psychiatric epidemiology (ed. E. H. Hare and J. K. Wing). Oxford University Press, London.

Hagnell, O., Lanke, J., Rorsman, B., Ohmon, R., and Ojesjo (1983). Current trends in the incidence of senile and multiinfarct dementia. Archiv für Psychiatrie and Nervenkrankheiten 233,423-38.

Hakim, S. and Adams, R. D. (1965). The special problem of symptomatic hydrocephalus with normal cerebrospinal fluid pressures: observations on cerebrospinal fluid hydrodynamics. Journal of Neurological Sciences 2, 307-27.

Haley, J. (1963). Strategies of psychotherapy. Grune and Stratton, New York.

Hall, G. S. and Lindzey, G. (1980). Theories of personality (3rd edn). Wiley, Chichester.

Hall, J. (1983). Ward based rehabilitation programmes. In Theory and practice of psychiatric rehabilitation (ed. F. N. Watts and D. H. Bennett). Wiley, Chichester.

Hall, R. C. W. (1980). Psychiatric presentation of medical illness: somatopsychic disorders. MTP, Lancaster.

Hall, R. C. W., Gardner, E. R., Stickney, S. K., Lecann, A. F., and Popkin, M. K. (1980). Physical illness manifesting as psychiatric disease II: analysis of a state hospital in-patient population. Archives of General Psychiatry 37, 989-95.

Hallam, R., Rachman, S., and Hinchcliffe, R. (1984). Psychological aspects of tinnitis. In Contributions to medical psychology (ed. S. Rachman), Vol. 3. Pergamon, Oxford.

Haller, R. M. and Deluty, R. H. (1988). Assaults on staff by psychiatric inpatients: a critical review. British Journal of Psychiatry 152, 174-9.

Hallett, E. C. and Pilowsky, I. (1982). The response to treatment in a multidisciplinary pain clinic. Pain 12, 365-4.

Hallgren, B. (1960). Nocturnal enuresis in twins. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 35, 73–90.

Halliday, J. L. (1937). Epidemiology and the psychosomatic affections: a study in social medicine. Lancet ii, 185-91.

Hallstrom, C. (1985). Benzodiazepines: clinical practice and central mechanisms. In Recent advances in psychiatry (ed. K. Granville-Grossman), Vol. 5. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Hamburg, D. A. and Adams, J. E. (1967). A perspective on coping behaviour. Archives of General Psychiatry 17, 277-84.

Hamburg, D. A., Artz, P., Reiss, E., Amspacker, W., and Chambers, R. E. (1953). Clinical importance of emotional problems in the care of patients with bums. New England Journal of Medicine 248, 355-9.

Hamilton, J. A. (1962). Post partum psychiatric problems. Mosby, St. Louis.

Hamilton, J. R. (1987a). Violence and victims: the contribution of victimiology to forensic psychiatry. Lancet i, 147-50.

Hamilton, J. R. (1987b). The management of psychopathic offenders. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 38, 245-50.

Hamilton, J. R. and Freeman, H. (1982). Dangerousness: psychiatric assessment and management. Gaskell, London.

Hamilton, J. R., Griffith, A., Ritson, E. B., and Aitken, R. C. B. (1977). A detoxification unit for habitual drunken offenders. Health Bulletin 35, 146-54.

Hamilton, M. (ed.) (1984). Fish’s schizophrenia (3rd edn). Wright, Bristol.

Hamilton, M. (ed.) (1985). Fish’s clinical psychopathology (2nd edn). Wright, Bristol.

Hampson, J. L. and Hampson, J. G. (1961). The ontogenesis of sexual behaviour in man. In Sex and internal secretions (ed. W. C. Young) (3rd edn). Johns Hopkins Press, Baltimore.

Hans, M. and Koeppen, A. H. (1980). Huntington’s chorea: its impact on the spouse. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 168, 209-14.

Hanson, D. R., Gottesman, I. I., and Heston, L. L. (1976). Some possible childhood indications of adult schizophrenia inferred from children of schizophrenics. British Journal of Psychiatry 129, 142-54.

Hanson, J. W., Jones, K. L., and Smith, D. W. (1976). Fetal alcohol syndrome: an experiment with 41 patients. Journal of the American Medical Association 235, 1458-60.

Harding, C. M., Zubin, J., and Strauss, J. S. (1987). Chronicity in schizophrenia: fact, partial fact, or artifact? Hospital and Community Psychiatry 38, 477-86.

Hardy, J., Adolfsson, R., and Alafuzuff, I. (1985). Transmitter deficits in Alzheimer’s disease. Neurochemistry International 7, 545-63.

Hare, E. H. (1956a). Mental illness and social conditions in Bristol. Journal of Mental Science 102, 349-57.

Hare, E. H. (1956b). Family setting and the urban distribution of schizophrenia. Journal of Mental Science 102, 753-60.

Hare, E. H. (1959). The origin and spread of dementia paralytica. Journal of Mental Science 105, 594–626.

Hare, E. H. (1973). A short note on pseudo-hallucinations. British Journal of Psychiatry 122, 469-76.

Hare, E. H. (1975). Season of birth in schizophrenia and neurosis. American Journal of Psychiatry 132, 1168-71.

Hare, E. H. and Shaw, G. K. (1965). Mental health on a new housing estate: a comparative study of two districts of Croydon. Maudsley Monographs No. 12, Oxford University Press, London.

Harper, C. and Kril, J. (1985). Brain atrophy in chronic alcoholic patients: a quantitative pathological study. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and Psychiatry 48, 211-17.

Harris, A. I., Cox, E., and Smith, C. R. W. (1971). Handicapped and impaired in Great Britain, Part 1. Office of Population Censuses and Surveys. HMSO, London.

Harris, E. L. and Fitzgerald, J. D. (1970). The principles and practice of clinical trials. Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Harris, P. (1982). The symptomatology of abnormal appearance: an anecdotal survey. British Journal of Plastic Surgery 35, 312-13.

Harrison, G. (1980). The abuse of anti-cholinergic drugs in adolescents. British Journal of Psychiatry 137, 494-6.

Hartmann, H. (1964). Essays on ego psychology. Hogarth Press, London.

Hartman, V. (1965). Notes on group therapy with pedophiles. Canadian Psychiatric Association Journal 10, 283-8.

Harvey, R. F., Mauad, E. C., and Brown, A. M. (1987). Prognosis in the irritable bowel syndrome: a five-year prospective study. Lancet ii, 963-5.

Harvey-Smith, E. A. and Cooper, B. (1970). Patterns of neurotic illness in the community. Journal of the Royal College of General Practitioners 19, 132-9.

Haug, J. O. (1962). Pneumoencephalographic studies in mental disease. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica Suppl. 165, 1-114.

Havard, J. D. J. (1977). Alcohol and road accidents. In Alcoholism: new knowledge and new responses (ed. G. Edwards and M. Grant). Croom Helm, London.

Havdala, H. S., Borison, R. L., and Diamond, B. T. (1979). Potential hazards and applications of lithium in anesthesiology. Anesthesiology 50, 534-7.

Hawker, A. (1978). Adolescents and alcohol. Edsall, London.

Hawkins, C. (1985). Mishap or malpractice? Blackwell, Oxford.

Hawthorne, M. and O’Connor, S. (1987). The psychological side of tinnitus. British Medical Journal 294, 1441-2.

Hawton, K. (1980). Current trends in sex therapy. In Current trends in treatment in psychiatry (ed. T. G. Tennant). Pitman Medical, Tunbridge Wells.

Hawton, K. E. (1978). Deliberate self-poisoning and self-injury in the psychiatric hospital. British Journal of Medical Psychology 51, 253-9.

Hawton, K. E. (1982). Attempted suicide in children and adolescents. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 23, 497–503.

Hawton, K. E. (1985). Sex therapy: a practical guide. Oxford University Press, Oxfqrd.

Hawton, K. E. (1986). Suicide and attempted suicide among children and adolescents. Sage, Beverley Hills.

Hawton, K. E. (1987). Assessment of suicide risk. British Journal of Psychiatry 150, 145-53.

Hawton, K. E. and Catalan, J. (1987). Attempted suicide: a practical guide to its nature and management (2nd edn). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Hawton, K. E. and Fagg, J. (1983). Suicide, and other causes of death, following attempted suicide. British Journal of Psychiatry 152, 359-66.

Hawton, K. E. and Oppenheimer, C. (1983). Women’s sexual problems. In Women’s problems in general practice (ed. A. Anderson and A. McPherson). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Hawton, K. E., Crowle, J., Simkin, S., and Bancroft, J. H. J. (1978). Attempted suicide and suicide among Oxford University students. British Journal of Psychiatry 132, 506-9.

Hawton, K. E., Gath, D., and Smith, E. (1979). Management of attempted suicide in Oxford. British Medical Journal ii, 1040-2.

Hawton, K. E., Fagg, J., and Marsack, P. (1980). Association between epilepsy and attempted suicide. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and Psychiatry 43, 168-70.

Hawton, K. E., Bancroft, J., Catalan, J., Kingston, B., Stedeford, A., and Welch, N. (1981). Domiciliary and out-patient treatment of self-poisoning patients by medical and non-medical staff. Psychological Medicine 116, 169-77.

Hawton, K. E., O’Grady, J., Osborn, M., and Cole, D. (1982). Adolescents who take overdoses: their characteristics, problems and contacts with helping agencies. British Journal of Psychiatry 140, 118-23.

Hawton, K. E., Roberts, J., and Goodwin, G. (1985). The risk of child abuse among attempted suicide mothers with young children. British Journal of Psychiatry 146, 486-9.

Hawton, K. E., Catalan, J., Martin, P., and Fagg, J. (1986). Long-term outcome of sex therapy. Behaviour Research and Therapy 24, 665-75.

Hawton, K. E., McKeown, S., Day, A., Martin, P., O’Connor, M. and Yule, J. (1987). Evaluation of out-patient counselling compared with general practitioner care following overdoses. Psychological Medicine 17, 751-62.

Hay, G. G. (1970a). Psychiatric aspects of cosmetic nasal operations. British Journal of Psychiatry 116, 85–97.

Hay, G. G. (1970b). Dysmorphophobia. British Journal of Psychiatry 116, 399–406.

Hay, G. G. (1983). Feigned psychosis: a review of the simulation of mental illness. British Journal of Psychiatry 43, 8-10.

Hay, G. G., and Heather, B. B. (1973). Changes in psychometric test results following cosmetic nasal operations. British Journal of Psychiatry 122, 81–90.

Haynes, R. B., Taylor, D. W., and Sackett, D. L. (eds.) (1979). Compliance in health care. Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore.

Haynes, S. G., Feinleib, M., and Kannel, W. B. (1980). The relationship of psychosocial factors to coronary heart disease in the Framingham study. III: Eight year incidence of coronary heart disease. American Journal of Epidemiology 111, 37–58.

Head, H. (1920). Studies in neurology, Vol. 2. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Health Advisory Service (1983). The rising tide. Department of Health and Social Security, London.

Heath, R. G., Franklin, D. E., and Shraberg, D. (1979). Gross pathology of the cerebellum in patients diagnosed and treated as functional psychiatric disorder. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disorder 167, 585-92.

Heber, R. (1981). A manual on terminology and classification in mental retardation. American Journal of Mental Deficiency. Suppl. 64.

Heber, R. and Garber, H. (1975). The Milwaukee project: a study of the use of family intervention to prevent cultural familial retardation. In The exceptional infant (ed. B. Z. Friedlander, G. M. Sternt, and C. E. Kirk), Vol. 3. Brunner-Mazel, New York.

Hecker, E. (1871). Die Hebephrenie. Virchows Archiv für Pathologie und Anatomie 52, 394–429. (See American Journal of Psychiatry 142, 1265-71.)

Heimann, P. (1950). On countertransference. International Journal of Psychoanalysis 31, 81-4.

Helgason, T. (1964). Epidemiology of mental disorders in Iceland. A psychiatric and demographic investigation of 5395 Icelanders. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica. Suppl. 173.

Helweg-Larsen, P., Hoffmeyer, H., Kieler, J., Thaysen, E. H., Thaysen, J. H., Thygesen, P., and Wulff, M. H. (1952). Famine disease in German concentration camps: complications and sequels. Acta Psychiatrica et Neurologica Scandinavica Suppl. 83, 1-460.

Helzer, J. E. and Winokur, G. (1974). A family interview study of male manic depressives. Archives of General Psychiatry 31, 73-7.

Helzer, J. E., Kendell, R. E., and Brockington, I. F. (1983). Contribution of the six-month criteria to the predictive validity of the DSMIII definition of schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry 40, 1277-80.

Helzer, J. E., Chammas, S., Norland, C. C., Stillings, W. A., and Alpers, D. H. (1984). A study of the association between Crohn’s disease and psychiatric illness. Gastroenterology 86, 324-30.

Hempel, C. G. (1961). Introduction to problems of taxonomy. In Field studies in the mental disorders (ed. J. Zubin). Grune and Stratton, New York.

Hemphill, R. E. (1952). Puerperal psychiatric illness. British Medical Journal ii, 1232-5.

Henderson, A. S. (1986). Epidemiology of mental illness. In Mental health in the elderly: a review of the present state of research (ed. H. Häfner, G. Moschel, and N. Sartorius). Springer, Berlin.

Henderson, A. S., Krapowski, J., and Stoller, A. (1971). Epidemiological aspects of adolescent psychiatry. In Modern perspectives in adolescent psychiatry (ed. J. G. Howells). Oliver and Boyd, Edinburgh.

Henderson, D. K. (1939). Psychopathic states. Chapman and Hall, London.

Henderson, J. J. (1972). Incest: a synthesis of data. Canadian Psychiatric Association Journal 17, 291–313.

Henderson, S., Duncan-Jones, P., McAuley, H., and Ritchie, K. (1978). The patient’s primary group. British Journal of Psychiatry 132, 74–86.

Henderson, S., Byrne, D. G., and Duncan-Jones, P. (1982). Neurosis and the social environment. Academic Press, London.

Henderson, S. E. (1987). The assessment of ’clumsy’ children: old and new approaches. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 28, 511-27.

Hendren, R. L. (1986). Adolescent alcoholism and substance abuse. American Psychiatric Associations Annual Review 5. (ed. A. J. Frances, and R. E. Hales). American Psychiatric Association, Washington D. C.

Hendriksen, C. and Binder, V. (1980): Social prognosis in patients with ulcerative colitis. British Medical Journals ii, 581-3.

Heninger, G. R., Chamey, D. S., and Menkes, D. B. (1983a). Receptor sensitivity and the mechanism of action of antidepressant treatment. In Treatment of depression: old approaches and new controversies (ed. P. J. Clayton and J. E. Barrett). Raven Press, New York.

Heninger, G. R., Chamey, D. S., and Sternberg, D. E. (1983b). Lithium carbonate augmentation of antidepressant treatment. Archives of General Psychiatry 40, 1335-42.

Heninger, G. R., Chamey, D. S., and Sternberg, D. E. (1984). Serotonergic function in depression: prolactin response to intravenous tryptophan in depressed patients and healthy subjects. Archives of General Psychiatry 41, 398–402.

Henry, G. W. (1929). Some modern aspects of psychiatry in general hospital practice. American Journal of Psychiatry 86, 623-30.

Henry, J. P., Meehan, J. P., and Stephens, P. M. (1967). Use of psychosocial stimuli to induce prolonged systolic hypertension in mice. Psychosomatic Medicine 29, 408-32.

Herbert, D., Kleber, M. D., Riordan, C. E. et al. (1985). Clonidine in out-patient detoxification from methadone maintenance. Archives of General Psychiatry 42, 391-8.

Herman, J. and Hirschman, L. (1981). Families at risk for father-daughter incest. American Journal of Psychiatry 138, 967-70.

Herman, J., Rosseil, D., and Trocki, K. (1986). Long-term effects of incestuous abuse in childhood. American Journal of Psychiatry 143, 1293-6.

Hermann, B. P. and Whitman, S. (1984). Behavioural and personality correlates of epilepsy: a review, methodological critique, and conceptual model. Psychological Bulletin 95, 451-97.

Hermelin, B. and O’Connor, N. (1983). The idiot savant: flawed genius or clever Hans? Psychological Medicine 13, 479-81.

Herold, S., Leenders, K. L., Turton, D. R., et al. (1985). Dopamine receptor binding in schizophrenic patients as measured with C-methylspiperone and P. E. T. Journal of Cerebral Blood Flow and Metabolism 5 (Suppl. 1), 191-2.

Hershon, H. I. (1977). Alcohol withdrawal symptoms and drinking behaviour. Journal of Studies on Alcoholism 38, 953-71.

Hersov, L. (1960). Refusal to go to school. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 1, 137-45.

Hersov, L. (1985). Encopresis. In Child psychiatry: modern approaches (ed. L. Hersov and M. Rutter) (2nd edn). Blackwell, Oxford.

Hersov, L. and Berg, I. (eds.) (1980). Out of school. Wiley, Chichester.

Herstbech, S., Hansea, H. E., Amdisen, A., and Olsen, S. (1977). Chronic renal lesions following long term treatment with lithium. Kidney International 12, 205-13.

Herzberg, J. L. (1987). No fixed abode. A comparison of men and women admitted to an east London psychiatric hospital. British Journal of Psychiatry 150, 621-7.

Herzog, A. and Detre, T. (1967). Psychotic reaction associated with childbirth. Diseases of the Nervous System 37, 229-35.

Herzog, D. B., Keller, M. B., and Lavori, P. W. (1988). Outcome in anorexia nervosa and bulimia nervosa. Journal of Nervous and Mental Diseases 176, 131-43.

Heshe, J. and Roeder, E. (1976). Electroconvulsive therapy in Denmark. British Journal of Psychiatry 128, 241-5.

Hesse, K. A. F. (1975). Meeting the psychosocial needs of pacemaker patients. International Journal of Psychiatry in Medicine 6, 359-72.

Heston, L. J. (1966). Psychiatric disorders in foster home reared children of schizophrenic mothers. British Journal of Psychiatry 112, 819-25.

Heston, L. J. and Shields, J. (1968). Homosexuality in twins: a family study and a registry study. Archives of General Psychiatry 18, 149-60.

Heston, L. J., Mastri, A. R., Anderson, V. E., and White, J. (1981). Dementia of the Alzheimer type. Clinical genetics, natural history and associated conditions. Archives of General Psychiatry 38, 1085-90.

Heston, L. J., White, J. A., and Mastri, A. R. (1987). Pick’s disease. Clinical genetics and natural history. Archives of General Psychiatry 44, 409-11.

Hewett, L. E. and Jenkins, R. L. (1946). Fundamental patterns of maladjustment: the dynamics of their origin. Thomas, Springfield, Ill.

Hewett, S. H. and Ryan, P. J. (1975). Alternatives to living in psychiatric hospitals — a pilot study. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 14, 65–70.

Hibbert, G. A. (1984a). Ideational components of anxiety, their origin and content. British Journal of Psychiatry 144, 618-24.

Hibbert, G. A. (1984b). Hyperventilation as a cause of panic attacks. British Medical Journal 288, 263-4.

Hill, D. (1952). EEG in episodic psychotic and psychopathic behaviour: a classification of data. Electroencephalography and Clinical Neurophysiology 4, 419-42.

Hill, D. (1953). Psychiatric disorders of epilepsy. Medical Press 229, 473-5.

Hill, D. (1981). Historical review. In Epilepsy and psychiatry (ed. E. M. Reynolds and M. R. Trimble). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Hill, O. W. (1972). Functional vomiting. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 7, 755-8.

Hill-Beuff, A. and Porter, J. D. R. (1984). Children coping with impaired appearance: social and psychologic influences. General Hospital Psychiatry 6, 294–301.

Hinde, R. A. (1977). Mother-infant separation and the nature of inter-individual relationships: experiments with rhesus monkeys. Proceedings of the Royal Society of London (B) 196, 29–50.

Hinde, R. A. (1985). Ethiology in relation to psychiatry. In Handbook of Psychiatry (ed. M. Shepherd), Vol 5. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Hinde, R. A. and Spencer Booth, Y. (1970). Individual differences in the responses of rhesus monkeys to a period of separation from their mothers. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 11, 159-76.

Hinkle, L. E. and Wolff, H. G. (1958). Ecological investigation of the relationship between illness, life experience and the social environment. Annals of Internal Medicine 49, 1373.

Hirsch, S. R. (1982). Depression revealed in schizophrenia. British Journal of Psychiatry 140, 421-3.

Hirsch, S. R. (1986a). Clinical treatment of schizophrenia. In The psychopharmacology and treatment of schizophrenia (ed. P. Bradley and S. R. Hirsch). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Hirsch, S. R. (1986b). Influence of social experience and environment. In The psychopharmacology and treatment of schizophrenia (ed. P. Bradley and S. R. Hirsch). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Hirsch, S. R. (1987). Planning for bed needs and resource requirements in acute psychiatry. Bulletin of the Royal College of Psychiatrists 11, 398–407.

Hirsch, S. R. and Leff, J. (1975). Abnormalities in parents of schizophrenics. Maudsley Monograph No. 22. Oxford University Press, London.

Hirsch, S. R., Gaind, R., Rohde, P. D., Stevens, B. C., and Wing, J. K. (1973). Outpatient maintenance of chronic schizophrenic patients with long acting fluphenazine: double blind placebo trial. British Medical Journal i, 633-7.

Hirschfeld, M. (1936). Sexual anomalies and perversions. Aldor, London.

Hirschfeld, M. (1944). Sexual anomalies and perversions: physical and psychological development and treatment. Aldor, London.

Hobson, R. F. (1953). Prognostic factors in electric convulsive therapy. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and Psychiatry 16, 275-81.

Hoch, P. H. and Polantin, P. (1949). Pseudoneurotic forms of schizophrenia. Psychiatric Quarterly 23, 249-96.

Hodgkinson, S. et al. (1987). Molecular genetic evidence for heterogeneity in manic depression. Nature 325, 805-6.

Hodkinson, H. M. (1973). Mental impairment in the elderly. Journal of the Royal College of Physicians 7, 305-7.

Hoehn-Sarik, R., Frank, J. D., Imber, S. D., Nash, E. H., Stone, A. R., and Battle, C. R. (1964). Systematic preparation of patients for psychotherapy I: Effect on therapy behaviour and outcome. Journal of Psychiatric Research 2, 267-81.

Hoenig, J. and Kenna, J. C. (1974). The prevalence of transsexualism in England and Wales. British Journal of Psychiatry 124, 181-90.

Hoffman, B. F. (1986). How to write a psychiatric report for litigation following a personal injury. American Journal of Psychiatry 143, 164-9.

Hogarty, G. E. and Ulrich, R. (1977). Temporal effects of drug and placebo in delaying relapse in schizophrenic out-patients. Archives of General Psychiatry 34, 297–301.

Hogarty, G. E., Goldberg, S. C., and Schooler, N. (1974). Drugs and sociotherapy in the aftercare of schizophrenic patients II. Two year relapse rates. Archives of General Psychiatry 31, 603-8.

Hogarty, G. E., Anderson, C. M., Reiss, D. J., et al. (1986). Family psychoeducation, social skills training and maintenance chemotherapy in the aftercare treatment of schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry 43, 633-42.

Hoggett, B. (1984). Mental health law (2nd edn). Sweet and Maxwell, London.

Holding, T. A. and Barraclough, B. M. (1975). Psychiatric morbidity in a sample of a London coroner’s open verdicts. British Journal of Psychiatry 127, 133-43.

Holding, T. A. Buglass, D., Duffy, J. C., and Kreitman, N. (1977). Parasuicide in Edinburgh — a seven year review, 1968–1974. British Journal of Psychiatry 130, 534-43.

Holland, A. J., Hall, A., Murray, R., Russell, G. F. M., and Crisp, A. H. (1984). Anorexia nervosa: a study of 34 twin pairs and a set of triplets. British Journal of Psychiatry 145, 414-19.

Holland, J. C. et al. (1986). Comparative psychological disturbance in patients with pancreatic and gastric cancer. American Journal of Psychiatry 143, 982-6.

Hollingshead, A. B. and Redlich, F. C. (1958). Social class and mental illness: a community study. Wiley, New York.

Holmes, T. and Rahe, R. H. (1967). The social adjustment rating scale. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 11, 213-18.

Holmes, T. H., Hawkins, N. G., Bowerman, E., Clarke, R., and Joffe, J. R. (1957). Psychosocial and psychophysiologic studies of tuberculosis. Psychosomatic Medicine 19, 134-43.

Holt, S., Stewart, I. C., Dixon, J. M., Eiton, R. A., Taylor, T. V., and Little, K. (1980). Alcohol and the emergency service patient. British Medical Journal 281, 638-40.

Hood, R. and Sparks, R. (1980). Key issues in criminology. Weidenfeld and Nicholson, London.

Hooley, J. M., Orley, J., and Teasdale, J. D. (1986). Levels of expressed emotion and relapse in depressed patients. British Journal of Psychiatry 148, 642-7.

Hopkins, J., Marcus, M., and Campbell, S. B. (1984). Postpartum depression: a critical review. Psychological Bulletin 95, 498–513.

Höre, B. D. and Wilkins, R. H. (1976). A general-practice study of the commonest presenting symptoms of alcoholism. Journal of the Royal College of General Practitioners 26, 140-2.

Horgan, J. H. (1987). Cardiac tamponade. British Medical Journal 295, 563.

Horn, G. van (1987). Dementia. The American Journal of Medicine 83, 101-10.

Home, R. L., Pettinati, H. M., Sugarman, A., and Varga, E. (1985). Comparing bilateral to unilateral electroconvulsive therapy in a randomised study with EEG monitoring. Archives of General Psychiatry 42, 1087-92.

Homey, K. (1939). New ways in psychoanalysis. Kegan Paul, London.

Hoult, J. (1986). Community care of the acutely mentally ill. British Journal of Psychiatry 149, 137-44.

House, A. (1987a). Psychosocial problems on the renal unit and their relation to treatment outcome. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 31, 441-52.

House, A. (1987b). Depression after stroke. British Medical Journal 294, 76-8.

Houston, F. and Royse, A. B. (1954). Relationship between deafness and psychotic illness. Journal of Mental Science 100, 990-3.

Howard League Working Party (1985). Unlawful sex. Waterlow, London.

Howlin, P., Marchant, R., Rutter, M., Berger, M., Hersov, L., and Yule, W. (1973). A home-based approach to the treatment of autistic children. Journal of Autism and Child Schizophrenia 3, 308-16.

Hsu, L. K. G. (1986). The treatment of anorexia nervosa. American Journal of Psychiatry 143, 573-81.

Huber, G., Gross, G., and Schuttler, R. (1975). A long-term follow-up study of schizophrenia: psychiatric course of illness and prognosis. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 52, 49–57.

Hughson, A. V. M., Cooper, A. F., McArdle, C. S., and Smith, D. C. (1987). Psychosocial effects of radiotherapy after mastectomy. British Medical Journal 294, 1515-18.

Hull, C. L. (1943). Principles of behaviour. Appleton, New York.

Hume, D. (1958). A treatise of human nature (ed. L. A. Selby-Bigge). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Hunter, M. (1979). Forensic psychiatry and mental handicap. In Psychiatric illness and mental handicap (ed. F. E. James and R. P. Snaith). Gaskell, Ashford, Kent.

Huntington, G. (1872). On chorea. Medical and Surgical Reporter. Philadelphia 26, 317-21.

Hussebye, D. G., Westlie, L., Thomas, J. S., and Kjellstrand, C. M. (1987). Psychological, social, and somatic prognostic indicators in old patients undergoing long-term dialysis. Archives of Internal Medicine 147, 1921-4.

Hutchings, B. and Mednick, S. A. (1974). Registered criminality in the adopted and biological parents of registered male criminal adoptees. In Genetic researches in psychiatry (ed. R. R. Fieve et al.). Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore.

Huxley, P. J., Goldberg, D. P., Maguire, E. P., and Kincey, V. (1979). The prediction of the course of minor psychiatric disorders. British Journal of Psychiatry 135, 535-43.

Hyde, C., Bridges, K., Goldberg, D., Lowson, K., Sterling, C., and Faragher, B. (1987). The evaluation of a hostel ward: a controlled study using modified cost-benefit analysis. British Journal of Psychiatry 151, 805-12.

Illingworth, R. S. (1980). Development of the infant and young child. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Imboden, J. B. (1972). Psychosocial determinants of recovery. In Psychosocial aspects of physical illness (ed. Z. J. Lipowski). Karger, Basel.

Imboden, J. B., Canter, A., and Cluff, L. E. (1959). Brucellosis III. Psychological aspects of delayed convalescence. Archives of Internal Medicine 103, 406-14.

Imboden, J. B., Canter, A., and Cluff, L. E. (1961). Convalescence from influenza: a study of the psychological and clinical determinants. Archives of Internal Medicine 108, 393-9.

Insanity Defense Work Group (1983). American Psychiatric Association statement of the insanity defense. American Journal of Psychiatry 140, 681-8.

Isbell, H., Altschul, S., Kometsky, C. H., Eisenman, A. J., Flanary, H. G., and Graser, H. F. (1950). Chronic barbiturate intoxication. Archives of Neurology and Psychiatry 64, 416-18.

Isbell, H., Fraser, H. F., Wikler, A., Belleville, R., and Eisenman, A. J. (1955). An experimental study of the etiology of ’rum tits’ and ’delirium tremens’. Quarterly Journal of Studies on Alcoholism 16, 1-33.

Jablensky, A. (1986). Epidemiology of schizophrenia: a European perspective. Schizophrenia Bulletin 12, 52–73.

Jablensky, A. (1987). Multicultural studies and the nature of schizophrenia: a review. Journal of the Royal Society of Medicine 80, 162-7.

Jablensky, A., Korten, A., Emberg, G., Anker, M., Cooper, J. E., and Day, R. (1986). Manifestations and first-contact incidence of schizophrenia in different cultures. Psychological Medicine 16, 909-28.

Jackson, B. M. (1969). A case of voyeurism treated by counterconditioning. Behaviour Research and Therapy 7, 133-4.

Jacobs, P. A., Brunton, M., Melville, M. M., Brittain, R. P., and McClemont, W. F. (1965). Aggressive behaviour and subnormality. Nature 208, 1351-2.

Jacobs, S. and Myers, J. (1976). Recent life events and acute schizophrenia psychosis: a controlled study. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 162, 75–87.

Jacobs, S., Prusoff, B. A., and Paykel, E. S. (1974). Recent life events in schizophrenia and depression. Psychological Medicine 4, 444-52.

Jacobson, E. (1938). Progressive relaxation. Chicago University Press, Chicago.

Jacobson, E. (1953). Contribution to the metapsychology of cyclothymic depression. In Affective disorders (ed. P. Greenacre). International Universities Press, New York.

Jacobson, E., Kales, A., Lehmann, D., and Zweizig, J. R. (1965). Somnambulism: all night electro-encephalographic studies. Science 148, 975-7.

Jacobson, R. R. (1985). Child firesetters: a clinical investigation. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 26, 759-68.

Jacoby, R. (1981). Dementia, depression and the CT scan. Psychological Medicine 11, 673-6.

Jacoby, R. and Levy, R. (1980). Computed tomography in the elderly II: Senile dementia: diagnosis and functional impairment. British Journal of Psychiatry 136, 256-69.

Jaffe, P., Wolfe, D. A., Wilson, S., and Zak, L. (1986). Emotional and physical health problems of battered women. Canadian Journal of Psychiatry 31, 625-9.

Jahoda, G. and Cramond, J. (1972). Children and alcohol. A developmental study in Glasgow, Vol. 1. HMSO, London.

Jakes, S. C., Hallam, R. S., Rachman, J., and Hinchcliffe, R. (1986). The effects of reassurance, relaxation training and distraction on chronic tinnitus sufferers. Behaviour Research and Therapy 24, 497–507.

Jakob, A. (1921). Über eingenarte Erkrankungen des Zentralnervensystems mit bemerkenswerten anatomischen Befunde. Zeitschrift für die gesamte Neurologie und Psychiatrie 64, 147–228.

James, I. P. (1967). Suicide and mortality among heroin addicts in Britain. British Journal of Addictions 62, 391-8.

Janet, P. (1894). L’état mental des hystériques. Rueff, Paris.

Janet, P. (1909). Les névroses. Flammarion, Paris.

Janet, P. (1925). Psychological healing. Allen and Unwin, London.

Janicak, P. G., Davis, J. M., Gibbons, R. D., Ericksen, S., Chang, S., and Gallagher, P. (1985). Efficacy of ECT: a meta-analysis. American Journal of Psychiatry 142, 297–302.

Janis, I. L. (1958). Psychological stress: psychoanalytic and behavioural studies of surgical patients. Wiley, New York.

Jannoun, L., Munby, M., Catalan, J., and Gelder, M. G. (1980). A home based treatment program for agoraphobia. Behaviour Therapy 11, 294–305.

Jarman, C. M. B. and Kellet, J. M. (1979). Alcoholism in the general hospital. British Medical Journal ii, 469-71.

Jaspers, K. (1913). Allgemeine Psychopathologie. Springer, Berlin.

Jaspers, K. (1963). General psychopathology (Allgemeine Psychopathologie, 7th edn, 1959, trans. by J. Hoenig and M. W. Hamilton). Manchester University Press.

Jeavons, P. M. (1970). Choice of drug therapy in epilepsy. Practitioner 219, 542-56.

Jeavons, P. M. (1983). Non-epileptic attacks in childhood. In Research progress in epilepsy (ed. F. C. Rose). Pitman, Bath.

Jellinek, E. M. (1959). Estimating the prevalence of alcoholism: modified values in the Jellinek formula and an alternative approach. Quarterly Journal of Studies on Alcohol 20, 261-9.

Jellinek, E. M. (1960). The disease concept of alcoholism. Hillhouse Press, New Brunswick.

Jenkins, C. D. (1976). Recent evidence supporting psychologic and social risk factors for coronary disease. New England Journal of Medicine 294, 987-94 and 1033-8.

Jenkins, C. D. (1982). Psychosocial risk factors for coronary heart disease. Acta Medica Scandinavica Suppl. 660, 123-36.

Jenkins, L., Tarnopolsky, A., and Hand, D. (1981). Psychiatric admissions and aircraft noise from London Airport: four year, three-hospitals’ study. Psychological Medicine 11, 765-82.

Jennings, C., Barraclough, B. M., and Moss, J. R. (1978). Have the Samaritans lowered the suicide rate? A controlled study. Psychological Medicine 8, 413-22.

Jesness, C. F. (1962). The Jesness inventory: development and validation. Research report no. 29. California Youth Authority, Sacramento.

Johnson, A. M., Falstein, E. K., Szorek, S. A., and Svendsen, M. (1941). School phobia. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry 11, 702-11.

Johnson, D. A. W. (1986). Depressive symptom in schizophrenia: some observations on frequency, morbidity and possible causes. In Contemporary issues in schizophrenia (ed. A. Kerr and P. Snaith). Gaskell, London.

Johnson, J. (1969). Organic psychosyndromes due to boxing. British Journal of Psychiatry 115, 45–53.

Johnson, J. (1984). Stupor: a review of 25 cases. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 70, 376-7.

Johnson, S. B. (1980). Psychosocial factors in juvenile diabetes: a review. Journal of Behavioural Medicine 3, 95-116.

Johnson, S. B. (1985). Situational fears and objects phobias. In: The clinical guide to child psychiatry (ed. D. Shaffer, A. A. Ehrhardt, and L. L. Greenhill). Free Press, New York.

Johnston, D. W. (1985). Psychological intervention in cardiovascular disease. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 29, 447-56.

Johnston, M. (1986). Preoperative emotional status and post operative recovery. In Psychological aspects of surgery. Advances in Psychosomatic Medicine, Vol. 15, 1-22.

Johnstone, E. C., and Marsh, W. (1973). Acetylator status and response to phenelzine in depressed patients. Lancet i, 567-70.

Johnstone, E. C., Crow, T. J., Frith, C. D., Husband, J., and Kreel, L. (1976). Cerebral ventricular size and cognitive impairment in chronic schizophrenia. Lancet ii, 924-6.

Johnstone, E. C., Crow, T. J., and Masheter, K. (1977). Anterior pituitary hormone secretion in chronic schizophrenia — an approach to neurohormonal mechanisms. Psychological Medicine 7, 223-8.

Johnstone, E. C., Crow, T. J., Frith, C. D., Carney, M. W. P., and Price, J. S. (1978). Mechanism of the antipsychotic effect in the treatment of acute schizophrenia. Lancet i, 848-51.

Johnstone, E. C., Deakin, J. F. W., Lawler, P., Frith, C. D., Stevens, M., McPherson, K., and Crow, T. J. (1980). The Northwick Park electroconvulsive therapy trial. Lancet ii, 1317-20.

Johnstone, E. C., Cunningham-Owens, D. G., Gold, A., Crow, T. J., and MacMillan, J. F. (1981). Institutionalisation and the defects of schizophrenia. British Journal of Psychiatry 139, 195–203.

Johnstone, E. C., Owens, D. G. C., Gold, A., Crow, T. J., and MacMillan, J. F. (1984). Schizophrenia patients discharged from hospital — a follow-up study. British Journal of Psychiatry 145, 586-90.

Johnstone, E. C., Crow, T. J., Johnstone, A. L., and MacMillan, J. F. (1986). The Northwick Park study of first episodes of schizophrenia. I. Presentation of the illness. Problems relating to admission. British Journal of Psychiatry 148, 115–120.

Johnstone, J. M., Hunt, A. C., and Ward, E. M. (1960). Plastic bag asphyxia in adults. British Medical Journal ii 1714-15.

Jolliffe, N. and Jellinek, E. M. (1941). Vitamins and liver cirrhosis in alcoholism: VII cirrhosis of the liver. Quarterly Journal of Studies on Alcohol 2, 544-83.

Jones, D. P. H. (1986). Individual psychotherapy for the sexually abused child. Child Abuse and Neglect 10, 377-86.

Jones, D. P. H., and Alexander, H. (1978). Treating the abusive family within the family care system. In The battered child (ed. R. E. Helfer, and R. S. Kempe) (4th edn). University of Chicago Press, London.

Jones, D. P. H., and MacQuiston, M. (1988). Interviewing the sexually abused child (3rd edn). Gaskell Press, London.

Jones, K. (1972). A history of the mental health services. Routledge and Kegan Paul, London.

Jones, K. and Smith, D. W. (1973). Recognition of the fetal alcohol syndrome in early infancy. Lancet ii, 999-1001.

Jones, M. (1952). Social psychiatry: a study of therapeutic communities. Tavistock, London.

Jorm, A. F. (1985). Subtypes of Alzheimer’s dementia: a conceptual analysis and critical review. Psychological Medicine 15, 543-53.

Jorm, A. F., Korten, A. E., and Henderson, A. F. (1987). The prevalence of dementia: a quantitive integration of the literature. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 76, 465-79.

Jowett, S. and Ryan, T. (1985). Skin disease and handicap: an analysis of the impact of skin conditions. Social Science and Medicine 20, 421-5.

Kahlbaum, K. (1863). Die Gruppirung der psychichen Krankheiten. Kafemann, Danzig.

Kahn, E. (1928). Die psychopäthischen Persönlichkeiten. In Handbuch der Geisteskrankheiten, Vol. 5, p. 227. Springer, Berlin.

Kales, A., Soldatos, C. R., and Kales, J. D. (1987). Sleep disorders: insomnia, sleepwalking, night terrors, nightmares, and enuresis. Annals of Internal Medicine 106, 582-92.

Kalinowsky, L. B. and Hoch, P. H. (1947). Shock treatments and other somatic procedures in psychiatry. Heinemann Medical, London.

Kallen, B. and Tandberg, A. (1983). Lithium and pregnancy — a cohort study of manic depressive women. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 62, 134-9.

Kallmann, F. J. (1938). The genetics of schizophrenia. Augustin, New York.

Kallmann, F. J. (1946). The genetic theory of schizophrenia: an analysis of 691 schizophrenic twin index families. American Journal of Psychiatry 103, 309-22.

Kallmann, F. J. (1952). Study on the genetic affects of male homosexuality. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 115, 1283-98.

Kalucy, R. S., Crisp, A. H., and Harding, B. (1977). A study of 56 families with anorexia nervosa. British Journal of Medical Psychology 50, 381-95.

Kaminski, M., Rumeau-Rouquette, C., and Schwartz, D. (1976). Consommation d’alcool chez les femmes enceintes et issue de la grossesse. Revue d’Epidemiologie et de Santé Publique 24, 27–40.

Kane, J. M. (1986). Somatic therapy. In Psychiatry update. The American Psychiatric Association annual review, Vol. 5 (ed. A. J. Frances, and R. E. Hales). American Psychiatric Press, Washington, D. C.

Kane, J. M. (1987). Treatment of schizophrenia Schizophrenia Bulletin 13, 133-56.

Kane, J. M. and Smith, J. M. (1982). Tardive dyskinesia: prevalence and risk factors (1959–1979). Archives of General Psychiatry 39, 473-81.

Kane, R. L. (1985). Special needs of the elderly. In Oxford textbook of public health (ed. W. W. Holland), Vol. 4. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Kanner, L. (1943). Autistic disturbance of affective contact. Nervous Child 2, 217-50.

Kantor, J. S., Zitrin, C. M., and Zeldis, S. M. (1980). Mitral valve prolapse in agoraphobic patients. American Journal of Psychiatry 137, 467-9.

Kaplan, H. I., Freedman, A. M., and Sadock, B. J. (eds.) (1980). Comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (3rd edn). Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Kaplan, N. (1985). Non-drug treatment of hypertension. Annals of Internal Medicine 102, 359-73.

Karasu, T. B. (1979). Psychotherapy of the medically ill. American Journal of Psychiatry 136, 1-11.

Karush, A., Daniels, G. E., O’Connor, J. F., and Stern, L. O. (1977). Psychotherapy in chronic ulcerative colitis. Saunders, Philadelphia.

Kasanin, J. (1933). The acute schizoaffective psychoses. American Journal of Psychiatry 13, 97-126.

Katon, W. J., Ries, R. K., Bokan, J. A., and Kleinman, A. (1980). Hyperemesis gravidarum: a biopsychosocial perspective. International Journal of Psychiatry in Medicine 10, 151-62.

Katon, W., Kleinman, A., and Rosen, G. (1982). Depression and somatization: a review. Part I. American Journal of Medicine 72, 127-35.

Katon, W., Ries, R. K., and Kleinman, A. (1984). A prospective DSMIII study of 100 consecutive somatization patients. Comprehensive Psychiatry 25, 305-14.

Katon, W., Egan, K., and Miller, D. (1985). Chronic pain: lifetime psychiatric diagnosis and family history. American Journal of Psychiatry 142, 1156-60.

Katz, S. E. (1985). Partial hospitalization and comprehensive community services. In Comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (ed. H. I. Kaplan and B. J. Sadock) (4th edn). Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Kavka, J. (1949). Pinel’s conception of the psychopathic state. Bulletin of the History of Medicine 23, 461-8.

Kay, D. W. K. (1962). Outcome and cause of death in mental disorders of old age. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 38, 249-76.

Kay, D. W. K. (1963). Late paraphrenia and its bearing on the aetiology of schizophrenia. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 39, 159-69.

Kay, D. W. K. and Bergmann, K. (1980). Epidemiology of mental disorder among the aged in the community. In Handbook of mental health and ageing (ed. J. E. Birren and R. B. Sloane). Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs.

Kay, D. W. K. and Roth, M. (1961). Environmental and hereditary factors in the schizophrenias of old age (‛late paraphrenia’) and their bearing on the general problem of causation in schizophrenia. Journal of Mental Science 107, 649-86.

Kay, D. W. K., Beamish, P., and Roth, M. (1964). Old age mental disorders in Newcastle-upon-Tyne: 1: a study in prevalence. British Journal of Psychiatry 110, 146-58.

Kay, D. W. K., Bermann, K., Foster, E. M., McKechnie, A. A., and Roth, M. (1970). Mental illness and hospital usage in the elderly: a random sample followed up. Comprehensive Psychiatry 11, 26–35.

Kay, D. W. K., Cooper, A. F., Garside, R. F., and Roth, M. (1976). The differentiation of paranoid and affective psychoses by patients’ premorbid characteristics. British Journal of Psychiatry 129, 207-15.

Kedward, H. B. and Cooper, B. (1966). Neurotic disorders in urban practice: a 3 year follow-up. Journal of the Royal College of General Practitioners 12, 148-63.

Keefe, F. J. and Gil, K. M. (1986). Behavioural concepts in the analysis of chronic pain syndromes. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 54, 776-83.

Keefe, F. J., Gil, K. M., and Rose, S. C. (1986). Behavioural approaches in the multidisciplinary management of chronic pain: programs and issues. Clinical Psychology Review 6, 87-113.

Keeley, S. M., Shemberg, K. M., and Carbonell, J. (1976). Operant clinical intervention: behaviour management or beyond? Where are the data? Behaviour Therapy 7, 292–305.

Kellam, A. M. P. (1987). The neuroleptic malignant syndrome, so called: a survey of the world literature. British Journal of Psychiatry 150, 752-9.

Kellar, K. J. and Stockmeier, C. A. (1986). Effects of electroconvulsive shock and serotonin axon lesions on betaadrenergic and serotonin-2 receptors in rat brain. In Basic research issues (ed. S. Malitz and H. A. Sackheim), Annals of the New York Academy of Science 467, 76–90.

Keller, M. (1976). The disease concept of alcoholism revisited. Journal of Studies on Alcohol 37, 1694-717.

Keller, M. B., Klerman, G. L., Lavori, P. W., Coryell, W., Endicott, J., and Taylor, J. (1984). Long-term outcome of episodes of major depression: clinical and public health significance. Journal of the American Medical Association 252, 788-92.

Keller, M. B., Beardslee, W. R., Dorer, D. J., Lavori, P. W., Samuelson, H., and Klerman, G. L. (1986). Impact of severity and chronicity of parental affective illness on adaptive functioning and psychopathology in children. Archives of General Psychiatry 43, 930-7.

Kellner, R. (1985). Functional somatic symptoms and hypochondriasis. A survey of empirical studies. Archives of General Psychiatry 42, 821-33.

Kellner, R. (1987). Hypochondriasis and somatization. Journal of the American Medical Association 258, 2718-21.

Kelly, G. A. (1955). The psychology of personal constructs, Vols. I and 2. Norton, New York.

Kelly, W. F., Checkley, S. A., Bender, D. A., and Mashifer, K. (1985). Cushing’s syndrome and depression — a prospective study of 26 patients. British Journal of Psychiatry 142, 16–19.

Kemmer, F. W., Bisping, R., Steingruber, H. J., et al (1986). Psychological stress and metabolic control in patients with type 1 diabetes mellitus. New England Journal of Medicine 314, 1078-84.

Kemp, N. J. (1981). Social-psychological aspects of blindness: a review. Current Psychological Reviews 1, 69–89.

Kempe, C. H., Silverman, F. N., Steele, B. F., Droegemueller, W., and Silver, H. K. (1962). The battered child syndrome. Journal of the American Medical Association 181, 17–24.

Kempe, R. S. and Goldbloom, R. B. (1987). Malnutrition and growth retardation (failure to thrive) in the context of child abuse and neglect. In The battered child (ed. R. E. Helfer and R. S. Kempe), Chapter 16, pp. 315-35. University of Chicago Press, London.

Kendell, R. E. (1968). The classification of depressive illness. Maudsley Monograph No. 18. Oxford University Press, London.

Kendell, R. E. (1975). The role of diagnosis in psychiatry. Blackwell, Oxford.

Kendell, R. E. (1981). The present status of electroconvulsive therapy. British Journal of Psychiatry 139, 265-83.

Kendell, R. E. (1983). DSMIII: a major advance in psychiatric nosology. In International perspectives on DSMIII (ed. R. L. Spitzer, J. R. W. Williams, and A. E. Skodol). American Psychiatric Association Press, Washington, DC.

Kendell, R. E. (1985). Emotional and physical factors in the genesis of puerperal mental disorders. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 29, 3-11.

Kendell, R. E., Hall, D. J., Pichot, P., and von Cranach, M. (1974). Diagnostic criteria of English, French and German psychiatrists. Psychological Medicine 4, 187-95.

Kendell, R. E., Hall, D. J., Wainwright, S., Hailey, A., and Shannon, B. (1976). The influence of childbirth on psychiatric morbidity. Psychological Medicine 6, 297–302.

Kendell, R. E., Hall, D. J., Rennie, D., Clarke, J. A., and Dean, C. (1981). The social and obstetric correlates of psychiatric admission in the puerperium. Psychological Medicine 11, 341-50.

Kendell, R. E., de Roumanie, M., and Ritson, E. B. (1983). Influence of an increase in excise duty on alcohol consumption and its adverse effects. British Medical Journal 287, 809-11.

Kendell, R. E., Chalmers, J. C., and Platz, C. (1987). Epidemiology of puerperal psychoses. British Journal of Psychiatry 150, 662-73.

Kendler, K. S. (1982). Demography of paranoid psychosis (delusional disorder). Archives of General Psychiatry 39, 890–902.

Kendler, K. S. (1986). Genetics of schizophrenia. In American Psychiatric Association annual review (ed. A. J. Frances and R. E. Hales), Vol. 5. American Psychiatric Press, Washington, D. C.

Kendler, K. S. (1987). Paranoid disorders in DSM-III, a critical review. In: Diagnosis and classification in psychiatry (ed. G. L. Tischler). Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Kendler, K. S. and Davis, K. L. (1981). The genetics and biochemistry of paranoid schizophrenia and other paranoid psychoses. Schizophrenia Bulletin 7, 689–769.

Kendler, K. S. and Gruenberg, A. M. (1984). An independent analysis of the Danish adoption study of schizophrenia. VI. The relationship between psychiatric disorders as defined by DSMIII in the relatives and adoptees. Archives of General Psychiatry 41, 555-64.

Kendler, K. S. and Tsuang, M. T. (1981). Nosology of paranoid schizophrenia and other paranoid psychoses. Schizophrenia Bulletin 7, 594–610.

Kendler, K. S., Gruenberg, A. M., and Strauss, J. S. (1981). An independent analysis of the Copenhagen sample for the Danish adoption study of schizophrenia. The relationship between schizotypal personality disorder and schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry 38, 982-7.

Kennedy, A. and Neville, J. (1957). Sudden loss of memory. British Medical Journal ii, 428-33.

Kennedy, P. (1972). Efficacy of a regional poisoning treatment centre in preventing further suicidal behaviour. British Medical Journal iv, 255-7.

Kennedy, P. and Kreitman, N. (1973). An epidemiological survey of parasuicide (’attempted suicide’) in general practice. British Journal of Psychiatry 123, 23–34.

Kennedy, W. A. (1965). School phobia: a rapid treatment of 50 cases. Journal of Abnormal Psychology 70, 285-9.

Kennerley, H., and Gath, D. (1986). Maternity blues reassessed. Psychiatric Developments 1, 1-17.

Kenyon, F. E. (1964). Hypochondriasis: a clinical study. British Journal of Psychiatry 110, 478-88.

Kenyon, F. E. (1965). Hypochondriasis: a survey of some historical, clinical and social aspects. British Journal of Medical Psychology 38, 117-33.

Kenyon, F. E. (1968). Studies in female homosexuality: social and psychiatric aspects: sexual development, attitudes and experience. British Journal of Psychiatry 114, 1337-50.

Kenyon, F. E. (1980). Homosexuality in gynaecological practice. Clinics in Obstetrics and Gynaecology 1, 363-86.

Kerr, T. A., Roth, M., Shapira, K., and Gurney, C. (1972). The assessment and prediction of outcome in affective disorders. British Journal of Psychiatry 121, 167-74.

Kerr, T. A., Roth, M., and Shapira, K. (1974). Prediction of outcome in anxiety states and depressive illness. British Journal of Psychiatry 124, 125-31.

Kessel, N. (1977a). Self-poisoning. British Medical Journal ii, 1265-70 and 1336-40.

Kessel, N. (1977b). The foetal alcohol syndrome from the public health standpoint. Health Trends 9, 86-9.

Kessel, N. (1978). Report of the Advisory Committee on Alcoholism. HMSO, London.

Kessel, N. and Grossman, G. (1965). Suicide in alcoholics. British Medical Journal ii, 1671-2.

Kessler, S. (1980). The genetics of schizophrenia: a review. Schizophrenia Bulletin 6, 404-16.

Kety, S. (1980). The syndrome of schizophrenia. British Journal of Psychiatry 136, 421-36.

Kety, S. (1983). Mental illness in the biological and adoptive relatives of schizophrenic adoptees: findings relevant to genetic and environmental factors in etiology. American Journal of Psychiatry 140, 720-7.

Kety, S., Rosenthal, D., Wender, P. H., Schulsinger, F., and Jacobsen, B. (1975). Mental illness in the biological and adoptive families of adopted individuals who have become schizophrenic. In Genetic research in psychiatry (ed. R. R. Fieve, D. Rosenthal and H. Bull). Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore.

Khoo, C. T. K. (1982). Cosmetic surgery — where does it begin? British Journal of Plastic Surgery 35, 277-80.

Kidd, C. B. (1962). Misplacement of the elderly in hospital. British Medical Journal ii, 1491-5.

Kidson, M. A. (1973). Personality and hypertension. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 17, 35–41.

Kiev, A. (1971). Suicide prevention. In Identifying suicide potential (ed. D. B. Anderson and L. J. McClean), pp. 3-13. Behaviour Publications, New York.

Kiev, A. (1972). Transcultural psychiatry. Penguin, Harmondsworth.

Kilmann, P. R. (1982). The treatment of sexual paraphilias: a review of outcome research. Journal of Sex Research 18, 193–252.

Kiloh, L. G. and Garside, R. F. (1963). The independence of neurotic depression and endogenous depression. British Journal of Psychiatry 109, 451-63.

Kiloh, L. G., Child, J. P., and Latner, G. (1960). A controlled trial in the treatment of endogenous depression. Journal of Mental Science 106, 1139-44.

Kiloh, L. G., Ball, J. R. B., and Garside, R. F. (1962). Prognostic factors in treatment of depressive states with imipramine. British Medical Journal i, 1225-7.

Kiloh, L. G., Andrews, G., Nielson, M., and Bianchi, G. N. (1972). The relationship between the syndromes called endogenous and neurotic depression. British Journal of Psychiatry 121, 183-96.

Kind, D. (1958). Die psychiatrie der hypophyseninsuffizienz speziell der Simmondsschen Krankheit. Forschritte der Neurologie-Psychiatrie 26, 501-63.

King, B. H. and Ford, C. V. (1988). Pseudologia fantastica. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 77, 1–6.

King, J. R. and Hullin, R. P. (1983). Withdrawal symptoms from lithium; four case reports and a questionnaire study. British Journal of Psychiatry 143, 30–35.

King, R., Raynes, N., and Tizard, J. A. (1971). Patterns of residential care. Routledge and Kegan Paul, London.

Kingman, R. and Jones, D. P. H. (1987). Incest and other forms of sexual abuse. In The battered child (eds. R. E. Helfer and R. S. Kempe) (4th edn). University of Chicago Press, London.

Kinnell, H. G. (1987). Fragile X syndrome: an important preventable cause of mental handicap. British Medical Journal 295, 564.

Kinsey, A. C., Pomeroy, W. B., and Martin, C. E. (1948). Sexual behavior in the human male. Saunders, Philadelphia.

Kinsey, A. C., Pomeroy, W. B., Martin, C. E., and Gebhard, P. H. (1953). Sexual behaviour in the human female. Saunders, Philadelphia.

Kirman, B. (1987). Self-injury and mental handicap. British Medical Journal 295, 1085-6.

Kirsner, J. B. (1981). The irritable bowel syndrome: a clinical review and ethical consideration. Archives of Internal Medicine 141, 635-9.

Kitson, T. M. (1977). The disulfiram-ethanol reaction. Journal of Studies on Alcoholism 38, 96-113.

Klaf, F. S. and Hamilton, J. G. (1961). Schizophrenia — a hundred years ago and today. Journal of Mental Science 107, 819-28.

Klein, D. F. (1964). Delineation of two drug-responsive anxiety syndromes. Psychopharmacologia 5, 397–408.

Klein, M. (1934). A contribution to the psychogenesis of manic-depressive states. Reprinted in Contributions to psychoanalysis 1921–1945: developments in child and adolescent psychology, pp. 282–310. Hogarth Press, London (1948).

Klein, M. (1963). The psychoanalysis of children (translated by A. Strachey). Hogarth Press and Institute of Psychoanalysis, London.

Klein, R. H. and Nimorwicz, P. (1982). Psychosocial aspects of hemophilia in families: assessment strategies and instruments. Clinical Psychology Review 2, 153-69.

Kleinknecht, R. A., Klepac, R. K., and Alexander, L. D. (1973). Origin and characteristics of fear of dentistry. Journal of the American Dental Association 86, 842-8.

Kleinman, A. (1982). Neurasthenia and depression: a study of somatization and culture in China. Culture Medicine and Psychiatry 6, 117-96.

Kleist, K. (1928). Cycloid paranoid and epileptoid psychoses and the problem of the degenerative psychosis. Reprinted in Themes and variations in European psychiatry (ed. S. R. Hirsch and M. Shepherd). Wright, Bristol (1974).

Kleist, K. (1930). Alogical thought disorder: an organic manifestation of the schizophrenic psychological deficit. In The clinical roots of the schizophrenic concept (ed. J. Cutting and M. Shepherd). Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (1987).

Knight, G. (1972). Neurosurgical aspects of psychosurgery. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine 65, 1099-104.

Knights, A. and Hirsch, S. R. (1981). Revealed depression and drug treatment for schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry 38, 806-11.

Knights, E. B. and Folstein, M. F. (1977). Unsuspected emotional and cognitive disturbance in medical patients. Annals of Internal Medicine 87, 723-4.

Knott, D. G. and Beard, J. D. (1971). In Treatment of the alcohol withdrawal syndrome (ed. F. A. Seixas), p. 29. National Council on Alcoholism, New York.

Koch, J. L. A. (1891). Die Psychopathischen Minderwertigkeiter Dom, Ravensburg.

Koegel, R., Schreibman, L., O’Neil, R. E., and Burke, J. C. (1983). The personality and family interaction characteristics of parents with autistic children. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 51, 683-92.

Koehler, K. (1979). First rank symptoms of schizophrenia: questions concerning clinical boundaries. British Journal of Psychiatry 134, 236-48.

Koehler, T. (1985). Stresses and rheumatoid arthritis: a survey of empirical evidence in human and animal studies. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 29, 655-63.

Kolle, K. (1931). Die primare Verrücktheit: psychopathologishe, klinische und genealogische Untersuchungen. Thieme, Leipzig.

Kolodny, R. C., Master, W. H., and Johnson, V. E. (1979). Textbook of sexual medicine. Little Brown, Boston.

Kolvin, I. and Fundudis, T. (1981). Elective mute children: psychological development and background factors. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 22, 219-32.

Kolvin, I., Garside, R. F., and Nichol, A. R. (1981). Help starts here: the maladjusted child in the ordinary school. Tavistock, London.

Kopelman, M. D. (1986). Clinical tests of memory. British Journal of Psychiatry 148, 517–625.

Kopelman, M. D. (1987). Amnesia: organic and psychogenic. British Journal of Psychiatry 150, 428-42.

Kornfeld, D. S. (1980). The intensive care unit in adults: coronary care and general medical/surgical. Advances in Psychosomatic Medicine 10, 1-29.

Korobkin, R., Ashbury, A. K., Sumner, A. J., and Nielsen, M. D. (1975). Glue-sniffing neuropathy. Archives of Neurology 32, 158-62.

Korsakov, S. S. (1889). Translated and reprinted as ’Psychic disorder in conjunction with multiple neuritis. ’Neurology 5, 394–406.

Koryani, E. K. (1979). Morbidity and rate of undiagnosed physical illness in a psychiatric clinic population. Archives of General Psychiatry 36, 414-19.

Koss, M. P., Gidycz, C. A., and Wisniewski, N. (1987). The scope of rape: incidence and prevalence of sexual aggression and victimization in a national sample of higher education students. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 55, 162-70.

Kosviner, A. (1976). Social science and cannabis use. In Cannabis and health (ed. J. D. F. Graham). Academic Press, London.

Kotin, J. and Goodwin, F. K. (1972). Depression during mania. Clinical observations and theoretical implications. American Journal of Psychiatry 129, 679-86.

Ko vacs, M.. and Beck, A. T. (1977). An empirical clinical approach toward a definition of childhood depression. In Depression and childhood (ed. J. G. Schulterbrandt and A. Raskin). Raven Press, New York.

Kraepelin, E. (1897). Dementia praecox. In Clinical roots of the schizophrenia concept (ed. J. Cutting and M. Shepherd), Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (1981).

Kraepelin, E. (1904). Clinical psychiatry: a textbook for students and physicians (edited and translated from 7th edition of Kraepelin’s Textbook by A. R. Diefendot). Macmillan, New York.

Kraepelin, E. (1912). Uber paranoide Erkrankungen. Zentralblatt für die gesamte Neurologie und Psychiatrie 11, 617-38.

Kraepelin, E. (1915). Der Verfolgungswahn der Schwerhörigen. Psychiatrie Auflage 8, Band IV. Barth, Leipzig.

Kraepelin, E. (1919). Dementia praecox and paraphrenia. Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Kraepelin, E. (1920). Patterns of mental disorder. Reprinted in Themes and variations in European psychiatry (ed. S. R. Hirsch and M. Shepherd). Wright, Bristol (1974).

Kraepelin, E. (1921). Manic depressive insanity and paranoia (translated by R. M. Barclay from the 8th edition of Lehrbuch der Psychiatrie, Vols. Ill and IV). E. and S. Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Krafft-Ebing, R. (1888). Lehrbuch der Psychiatrie. Enke, Stuttgart.

Krafft-Ebing. R. (1924). Psychopathic sexuality with special reference to contrary sexual instinct. Authorized translation of the 7th German edition by C. G. Chaddock. F. A. Davis, Philadelphia.

Kral, A. A. (1978). Benign senescent forgetfulness. In Alzheimer’s disease: senile dementia and related disorders (ed. R. Katzman, R. D. Terry, and K. L. Bick). Raven Press, New York.

Krauthammer, C. and Klerman, G. L. (1978). Secondary mania. Archives of General Psychiatry 35, 1333-9.

Krauthammer, C. and Klerman, G. L. (1979). The epidemiology of mania. In Manic illness (ed. B. Shopsin), pp. 11–28. Raven Press, New York.

Kreitman, N. (ed.) (1977). Parasuicide. Wiley, London.

Kreitman, N. and Dyer, J. A. T. (1980). Suicide in relation to parasuicide. Medicine 2nd series, 1826-30.

Kreitman, N., Sainsbury, P., Pearce, K., and Costain, W. R. (1965). Hypochondriasis and depression in out-patients at a general hospital. British Journal of Psychiatry 111, 607-15.

Kreitman, N., Smith, P., and Tan, E. S. (1969). Attempted suicide in social networks. British Journal of Preventive and Social Medicine 23, 116-23.

Kreitman, N., Collins, J., Nelson, B., and Troop, J. (1970). Neurosis and marital interaction. British Journal of Psychiatry 117, 33–46 and 47–58.

Kretschmer, E. (1921). Physique and character. Translated from the original German. Harcourt Brace, New York.

Kretschmer, E. (1924). Physique and character. Kegan Paul, London.

Kretschmer, E. (1927). Der sensitive Beziehungswahn. Reprinted and translated as Chapter 8 in Themes and variations in European psychiatry (ed. S. R. Hirsch and M. Shepherd). Wright, Bristol (1974).

Kretschmer, E. (1936). Physique and character (2nd edn) (translated by W. J. H. Sprott and K. Paul Trench). Trubner, New York.

Kretschmer, E. (1961). Hysteria, reflex and instinct (translated into English by V. and W. Baskin from the German). Peter Owen, London.

Kringlen, E. (1965). Obsessional neurosis: a long term follow up. British Journal of Psychiatry 111, 709-22.

Kringlen, E. (1967). Heredity and environment in the functional psychoses. Heinemann, London.

Kringlen, E. (1980). Schizophrenia: research in Nordic countries. Schizophrenia Bulletin 6, 566-78.

Kripke, D. F., Risch, S. C., and Janowsky, D. S. (1983). Bright light alleviates depression. Psychiatry Research 10, 105–112.

Krishnan, H. R. R., Davidson, J. R. T., and Guajardo, C. (1985). Trichotillomania — a review. Comprehensive Psychiatry 26, 123-8.

Kroll, J. (1979). Philosophical foundation of French and U. S. nosology. American Journal of Psychiatry 136, 1135-8.

Kübler-Ross, E. (1969). On death and dying. Macmillan, New York.

Kuhn, R. (1957). Ober die Behandlung depressiver Zustände mit einem Iminodibenzylderivat. Schweizerische medizinische Wochenschrift 36, 1135-40.

Kushlick, A. (1980). Evaluation of residential facilities for the severely mentally handicapped. Advances in Behaviour Research and Therapy 3, No. 1.

Kushlick, A. and Blunden, R. (1974). The epidemiology of mental subnormality. In Mental deficiency: the changing outlook (ed. A. M. Clarke and A. D. B. Clarke) (3rd edn). Methuen, London.

Lacey, J. I. and Lacey, B. C. (1958). Verification and extension of autonomic response stereotype. American Journal of Psychology 71, 50–75.

Lader, M. H. (1969). Psychophysiological aspects of anxiety. In Studies of anxiety (ed. M. H. Lader). British Journal of Psychiatry Special Publication, № 3.

Lader, M. H. (1975). The psychophysiology of mental illness. Routledge and Kegan Paul, London.

Lader, M. H. and Sartorius, N. (1968). Anxiety in patients with hysterical conversion symptoms. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and Psychiatry 31, 490-7.

Lader, M. H. and Wing, L. (1966). Physiological measures, sedative drugs and morbid anxiety. Maudsley Monograph No. 14. Oxford University Press, London.

Lader, M. H., Ron, M., and Petursson, H. (1984). Computed axial brain tomography in long-term benzodiazepine users. Psychological Medicine 14, 203-6.

Laidlaw, J,Richens, A., and Oxley, J. (1988). A textbook of epilepsy (3rd edn). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Laing, R. (1965). The divided self. Penguin, Harmondsworth.

Lamb, H. R. (1987). Incompetency to stand trial: appropriateness and outcome. Archives of General Psychiatry 44, 754.

Lamb, H. R. and Talbott, J. A. (1986). The homeless mentally ill. Journal of the American Medical Association 256, 498–501.

Lambourn, J. and Gill, D. (1978). A controlled comparison of simulated and real ECT. British Journal of Psychiatry 133, 514-19.

Lancet (1979). Lithium and the kidney. Grounds for cautious optimism (Editorial) Lancet ii, 1056-7.

Lancet (1981). Epilepsy and violence (Editorial). Lancet ii, 966-7.

Lancet (1982a). Solvent abuse (Editorial). Lancet ii, 1139-40.

Lancet (1982b). Trials of coronary heart disease prevention (Editorial). Lancet ii, 803-4.

Lancet (1983). Crime as destiny (Editorial). Lancet i, 35-6.

Lancet (1986). Secure accommodation in psychiatric hospitals (Editorial). Lancet 2, 24-5.

Lancet (1987a). Non-convulsive status epilepticus (Editorial). Lancet 1, 958-9.

Lancet (1987b). Psychiatric day hospitals for all? (Editorial). Lancet 2, 1184-5.

Lander, E. S. (1988). Splitting schizophrenia. Nature 336, 105-6.

Landesmann-Dyer, S. (1981). Living in the community. American Journal of Mental Deficiency 86, 223-34.

Lange, J. (1929). Verbrechen als Schisksal: Studien kriminellen Zwillingen. Thieme, Leipzig.

Lange, J. (1931). Crime as destiny (translated by C. Haldane). George Allen, London.

Langfeldt, G. (1938). The prognosis in schizophrenia and the factors influencing the course of the disease. Acta Psychiatrica et Neurologica Scandinavica Suppl. 13.

Langfeldt, G. (1939). The schizophreniform states. Munksgaard, Copenhagen.

Langfeldt, G. (1960). Diagnosis and prognosis of schizophrenia. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine 53, 1047-51.

Langfeldt, G. (1961). The erotic jealousy syndrome. A clinical study. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica Suppl. 151.

Langsley, D. G. (1985). Community psychiatry. In Comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (ed. H. I. Kaplan and B. J. Sadock) (4th edn). Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Larson, E., Reifler, B. V., Featherstone, H. J., and English, D. R. (1984). Dementia in elderly out-patients: a prospective study. Annals of Internal Medicine 100, 417-23.

Larsson, T., Sjögren, T., Jacobson, G. with the assistance of Sjögren, G. (1963). Senile dementia. A clinical, sociomedical and genetic study. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica Suppl. 167, 1-259.

Lasègue, C. (1877). Les exhibitionnistes. Union Medicale 23, 709-14.

Latcham, R. W. (1985). Familial alcoholism: evidence from 237 alcoholics. British Journal of Psychiatry 147, 54-7.

Latimer, P. R. (1978). Crohn’s disease: a review of the psychological and social outcome. Psychological Medicine 8, 649-56.

Latimer, P. R. (1981). Irritable bowel syndrome: a behavioural model. Behaviour Research and Therapy 19, 475-83.

Laurell, B. (1970). Comparison of electric and flurothyl convulsive therapy. II antidepressive effect. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica Suppl. 145, 22–35.

Lauter, I. H. and Meyer, J. E. (1968). Clinical and nosological concepts of dementia. In Senile dementias (ed. C. Müller and L. Ciompi). Hans Hüber, Bern.

Lazar, I., Darlington, R., Murray, H., Royce, J., and Snipper, A. (1982). Lasting effects of early education. Monographs of the Society for Research and Child Development 47 (1–2, Serial No. 194).

Lazarus, R. S. (1966). Psychological stress and the coping processes. McGraw-Hill, New York.

Leach, J. and Wing, J. K. (1980). Helping destitute men. Tavistock, London.

Ledermann, S. (1956). Alcool, alcoolisme, alcoolisation. Presses Universitaires de Paris, Paris.

Lee, K., Miller, L., Hardt, F., Haubek, A., and Jensen, E. (1979). Alcohol-induced brain and liver damage in young males. Lancet ii, 759-61.

Leff, J. (1978). Social and psychological causes of the acute attack. In Schizophrenia: towards a new synthesis (ed. J. K. Wing). Academic Press, London.

Leff, J. (1981). Psychiatry around the globe: a transcultural view. Marcel Dekker, New York.

Leff, J. (1985). Family treatment of schizophrenia. In Recent advances in clinical psychiatry (ed. K. Granville-Grossman), Vol. 5. Churchill Livingstone, London.

Leff, J. (1986). Planning a community psychiatric service: from theory to practice. In The provision of mental health services in Britain (ed. G. Wilkinson and H. Freeman). Gaskell, London.

Leff, J. and Isaacs, A. D. (1978). Psychiatric examination in clinical practice. Blackwell, Oxford.

Leff, J. and Vaughn, C. (1972). Psychiatric patients in contact and out of contact with services; a clinical and social assessment. In Evaluating a community psychiatric service (ed. J. K. Wing and A. M. Hailey). Oxford University Press, London.

Leff, J. and Vaughn, C. (1981). The role of maintenance therapy and relative expressed emotion in relapse of schizophrenia: a two year follow-up. British Journal of Psychiatry 139, 102-4.

Leff, J. and Wing, J. K. (1971). Trial of maintenance therapy in schizophrenia. British Medical Journal iii, 599–604.

Leff, J., Kuipers, L., Berkowitz, R., Everlein-Vries, R., and Sturgeon, D. A. (1982). A controlled trial of social intervention in the families of schizophrenic patients. British Journal of Psychiatry 141, 121-34.

Leff, J. P., Kuipers, L., Berkowitz, R., and Sturgeon, D. (1985a). A controlled trial of intervention in the families of schizophrenic patients: two year follow-up. British Journal of Psychiatry 146, 594–600.

Leff, J., Kuipers, L., Berkowitz, R., Vaughn, C., and Sturgeon D. (1985b). Life events, relative expressed emotion and maintenance narcoleptics in schizophrenic relapse. Psychological Medicine 13, 799–806.

Leff, J., Wig, N. N., Ghosh, A. et al. (1987). Influence of relatives’ expressed emotion on the course of schizophrenia in Chandigarh. British Journal of Psychiatry 151, 166-73.

Lehrke, R. (1972). A theory of X-linkage of major intellectual traits. American Journal of Mental Deficiency 76, 611-19.

Lemere, F., Voegtlin, W. L., Broz, W. R., O’Hailaren, P., and Tupper, W. E. (1942). Conditioned reflex treatment of chronic alcoholism. VIII: a review of six years experience with this treatment of 1526 patients. Journal of the American Medical Association 120, 269-70.

Lemert, E. (1951). Social pathology: a systematic approach to the theory of sociopathic behaviour. McGraw-Hill, New York.

Lemoine, P., Harousseau, H., Borteyru, J. -P., and Menuet, J. -C. (1968). Les enfants de parents alcooliques: anomalies observées à propos de 127 cas. Ouest Médical 25, 477-82.

Leonhard, K. (1957). The classification of endogenous psychoses. English translation of the 8th German edition of Aufteiling der Endogenen Psychosen by R. Berman. Irvington. New York (1979).

Leonhard, K., Korff, I., and Schulz, H. (1962). Die Temperamente und den Familien der monopolaren und bipolaren phasishen Psychosen. Psychiatrie und Neurologie 143, 416-34.

Lerer, B., Moore, N., Meyendorff, E., Cho, S. R., and Gershon, S. (1987). Carbamazepine versus lithium in mania: a double blind study. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry 48, 89–93.

Lerman, C. E. (1987). Rheumatoid arthritis: psychological factors in the etiology, course, and treatment. Clinical Psychology Review 7, 413-25.

Levenson, J. L., Hamer, R. M., Myers, T., Hart, R. P., and Kaplowitz, L. G. (1987). Psychological factors predict symptoms of severe recurrent genital herpes infection. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 31, 153-9.

Levy, N. B. (1986). Renal transplantation in the new medical era .Advances in Psychosomatic Medicine 15, 167-79.

Levy, R. and Post, F. (1982). The psychiatry of late life. Blackwell, Oxford.

Levy, R., Isaacs A., and Hawks, G. (1970). Neurophysiological correlates of senile dementia: I. Motor and sensory nerve conduction velocity. Psychological Medicine 1,40-7.

Levy, R., Janssen, R., Bush, T., and Rosenblum, M. (1988). Neuroepidemiology of AIDS. Journal of Acquired Immune-Deficiency Syndromes 1, 81-8.

Lewis, A. J. (1934). Melancholia: a clinical survey of depressive states. Journal of Mental Science 80, 277-8.

Lewis, A. J. (1936a). Melancholia: prognostic study and case material. Journal of Mental Science 82, 488–558.

Lewis, A. J. (1936b). Problems of obsessional neurosis. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine 29, 325-36.

Lewis, A. J. (1938). States of depression: their clinical and aetiological differentiation. British Medical Journal ii, 875-8.

Lewis, A. J. (1942). Discussion on differential diagnosis and treatment of post confusional states. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine 35, 607-14.

Lewis, A. J. (1953a). Hysterical dissociation in dementia paralytica. Monatsschrift für Psychiatrie und Neurologie 125, 589–604.

Lewis, A. J. (1953b). Health as a social concept. British Journal of Sociology 4, 109-24.

Lewis, A. J. (1956). Psychological medicine. In Price’s textbook of the practice of medicine (ed. D. Hunter) (9th edn). Oxford University Press, London.

Lewis, A. J. (1957). Obsessional illness. Acta Neuropsiquiàtrica Argentina 3, 323-35. Reprinted as Chapter 7 in Inquiries in psychiatry: clinical and social investigations. Routledge and Kegan Paul, London.

Lewis, A. J. (1968). A glossary of mental disorders. Studies on medical and population subjects 22. General Register Office. HMSO, London.

Lewis, A. J. (1970). Paranoia and paranoid: a historical perspective. Psychological Medicine 1, 2-12.

Lewis, A. J. (1976). A note on classification of phobia. Psychological Medicine 6, 21-2.

Lewis, E. (1979). Grieving by the family after a stillbirth or neonatal death. Archives of the Diseases of Childhood 54, 303-6.

Lewis, E. O. (1929). Report on an investigation into the incidence of mental deficiency in six areas. 1925-27. In Report of the mental deficiency committee, Part IV. HMSO, London.

Lewis, H. R. and Streitfeld, H. S. (1970). Growth games. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, New York.

Lewis, N. D. S. and Yarnell, P. (1951). Pathological firesetting. Nervous and Mental Diseases Monograph No. 82. New York.

Lex, B. W. (1985). Alcohol problems in special populations. In The diagnosis and treatment of alcoholism (ed. J. H. Mendelson and N. K. Mello). McGraw-Hill, New York.

Ley, P. (1977). Psychological studies of doctor-patient communication. In Contributions to medical psychology (ed. S. Rachman), Vol. 1. Pergamon Press, Oxford.

Ley, P. (1982). Satisfaction, compliance and communication. British Journal of Clinical Psychology 21, 241-54.

Lhermitte, J. (1951). Visual hallucinations of the self. British Medical Journal i, 431-4.

Liakos, A. (1967). Familial transvestism. British Journal of Psychiatry 113, 49–51.

Liberman, R. P., Mueser, K. T., Wallace, C. J., et al. (1986). Training skills in the psychiatrically disabled: learning coping and competence. Schizophrenia Bulletin 12, 631-47.

Lidz, R. W. and Lidz, T. (1949). The family environment of schizophrenic patients. American Journal of Psychiatry 106, 332-45.

Lidz, T., Fleck, S., and Cornelison, A. (1965). Schizophrenia and the family. International Universities Press, New York. Lieberman, M. A., Yalom, I. D., and Miles, M. B. (1973). Encounter groups: first facts. Basic Books, New York.

Liebowitz, M. R. (1979). Is borderline a distinct entity? Schizophrenia Bulletin 5, 23–38.

Liebowitz, M R., Gorman, J. M., Fyer, A. J., and Klein, D. F. (1985). Social phobia: review of a neglected anxiety disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry 42, 729-36.

Liem, J. H. (1980). Family studies of schizophrenia: an update and commentary. Schizophrenia Bulletin 6, 429-55.

Lim, L., Ron, M. A., Ormerod, I. E. C., David, J., Miller, D. H., Logsdail, S. J., Walport, M. J., and Harding, A. E. (1988). Psychiatric and neurological manifestations in systemic lupus erythematosus. Quarterly Journal of Medicine 66, 27–38.

Lind, K. (1982). A synthesis of studies on stroke rehabilitation. Journal of Chronic Disorders 35, 133-49.

Lindemann, E. (1944). Symptomatology and management of acute grief. American Journal of Psychiatry 101, 141-8.

Lindsay, J. (1986). Suicide and attempted suicide in old age. In Affective disorders in the elderly (ed. E. Murphy). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Lindsay, M. (1985). Emotional management. In Care of the child with diabetes (ed. J. D. Baum and A. L. Kinmonth). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Lindstedt, G., Nilsson, L. A., Wâlinder, J., Skott, A., and Ohman, R. (1977). On the prevalence, diagnosis and management of lithium-induced hypothyroidism in psychiatric patients. British Journal of Psychiatry 130, 452-8.

Lineberger, H. P. (1981). Social characteristics of a haemophiliac clinic population. General Hospital Psychiatry 3, 157-63.

Ling, M. H. M., Perry, P. J., and Tsuang, M. T. (1981). Side effects of corticosteroid therapy. Archives of General Psychiatry 38, 471-7.

Lingjaerde, O., Edlund, A. H., Gormsen, C. A., Gottfries, C. G., Haugstad, A., Hermann, I. L., Hollnagel, P., Mäkimattila, A., Rasmussen, K. E., Remvig, J., and Robak, O. H. (1974). The effects of lithium carbonate in combination with tricyclic antidepressants in endogenous depression. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 50, 233-42.

Linn, M. W., Caffey, E. M., Klett, J., Hogarty, G. E., and Lamb, R. (1979). Day treatment and psychotropic drugs in the aftercare of schizophrenic patients. Archives of General Psychiatry 36, 1055-66.

Linton, S. J. (1986). Behavioural remediation of chronic pain, a status report. Pain 24, 125-41.

Lipkin, M., Fisher, L., Rawley, P. T., Loader, S., and Iker, H. P. (1986). Genetic counselling of symptomatic carriers in a primary care setting. Annals of Internal Medicine 105, 115-23.

Lipowski, Z. J. (1980a). Delirium. Acute brain failure in man. Thomas, Springfield, Ill.

Lipowski, Z. J. (1980b). Organic mental disorders: introduction and review of syndromes. In Comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (ed. H. I. Kaplan, A. M. Freedman, and B. J. Sadock) (3rd edn). Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Lipowski, Z. J. (1983). Transient cognitive disorders (delirium, acute confusional states) in the elderly. American Journal of Psychiatry 140, 1426-36.

Lipowski, Z. J. (1984). Organic brain syndromes: new classification, concepts and prospects. Canadian Journal of Psychiatry 29, 198–204.

Lipowski, Z. J. (1985). Psychosomatic medicine and liaison psychiatry. Plenum, New York.

Lipowski, Z. J. (1986). Consultation-liaison psychiatry: the first half century. General Hospital Psychiatry 8, 305-15.

Lishman, W. A. (1968). Brain damage in relation to psychiatric disability after head injury. British Journal of Psychiatry 114, 373–410.

Lishman, W. A. (1978). Research into the dementias. Psychological Medicine 8, 353-6.

Lishman, W. A. (1981). Cerebral disorder in alcoholism: syndromes of impairment. Brain 104, 1-20.

Lishman, W. A. (1987). Organic psychiatry (2nd edn). Blackwell, Oxford.

Lishman, W. A., Ron, M., and Acker, W. (1980). Computed tomography of the brain and psychometric assessment of alcoholic patients — a British study. In Addiction and brain damage (ed. D. Richter). Croom Helm, London.

Liskow, B., Othmer, E., Renick, E. C., De Souza, C., and Gabelli, W. (1986). Is Briquet’s syndrome aheterogeneous disorder? American Journal of Psychiatry 143, 626-9.

Liston, E. H. and La Rue, A. (1985). Clinical differentiation of primary degenerative and multi-infarct dementia: a critical review of the evidence. Part 1: clinical studies. Biological Psychiatry 18, 1451-65.

Litman, R. E., Curphey, T., Shneidman, E. S., Farberow, N. C., and Tabachnick, N. (1963). The psychological autopsy of equivocal suicides. Journal of the American Medical Association 184, 924-9.

Littlewood, R. and Lipsedge, M. (1988). Psychiatric illness among British Afro-Caribbeans. British Medical Journal 296, 950-1.

Livingston, M. G. (1986). Assessment of need for coordinated approach in families with victims of head injury. British Medical Journal 293, 742-4.

Livingston, M. G., Brooks, D. N., and Bond, M. R. (1985). Patient outcome in the year following severe head injury and relatives psychiatric and social functioning. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and Psychiatry 48, 876-81.

Ljungberg, L. (1957). Hysteria. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica Suppl. 12.

Lloyd, G. G. (1980). Whence and whither liaison’ psychiatry? Psychological Medicine 10, 11–14.

Lloyd, G. G. (1985). Emotional aspects of physical illness. In Recent advances in clinical psychiatry (ed. K. Granville-Grossman), Vol. 5. London.

Lloyd, G. G., Parke, A. C., Ludlam, C. A., and Macguire, R. I. (1984). Emotional impact of diagnosis and early treatment of lymphomas. Journal of Psychological Research 28, 157-62.

Lloyd, K. G., Farley, I. J., Deck, J. H. N., and Homykiewicz, O. (1974). Serotonin and 5-hydroxyindolacetic acid in discrete areas of the brain stem of suicide victims and control patients. Advances in Biochemical Psychopharmacology 11, 387-97.

Longsley, D. G. (1985). Community psychiatry. In Comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (ed. H. I. Kaplan and B. J. Sadock) (4th edn). Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Loudon, J. B. (1987). Prescribing in pregnancy: psychotropic drugs. British Medical Journal 293, 167-9.

Loudon, J. B. and Waring, H. (1976). Toxic reactions to lithium and haloperidol. Lancet ii, 1088.

Lovibond, S. H. (1964). Conditioning and enuresis. Pergamon Press, Oxford.

Lovibond, S. H. and Coote, M. A. (1970). Enuresis. In Symptoms of psychopathology (ed. G. G. Costello). Wiley, New York.

Lowman, R. L. and Richardson, L. M. (1987). Pseudoepileptic seizures of psychogenic origin: a review of the literature. Clinical Psychology Review 7, 363-89.

Lown, B., (1982). Mental stress, arrhythmias and sudden death. American Journal of Medicine 72, 177-80.

Lown, B., de Silva, R. A., Reich, P., and Murawski, B. J. (1980). Psychophysiologic factors in sudden cardiac death. American Journal of Psychiatry 137, 1325-35.

Luborsky, L., Singer, B., and Luborsky, L. (1975). Comparative studies of psychotherapies. Archives of General Psychiatry 31, 995-1008.

Lukianowicz, N. (1958). Autoscopic phenomena. Archives of Neurology and Psychiatry 80, 199–220.

Lukianowicz, N. (1959). Survey of various aspects of transvestism in the light of our present knowledge. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 128, 36–64.

Lukianowicz, N. (1967). ’Body image’ disturbances in psychiatric disorders. British Journal of Psychiatry 113, 31–47.

Lundberg, S. G. and Guggenheim, F. (1986). Sequelae of limb amputation. In: Psychological aspects of surgery. Advances in Psychosomatic Medicine 15, 199–210.

Lundquist, G. (1945). Prognosis and course in manic depressive psychosis. A follow-up study of 319 first admissions. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica Suppl. 35.

Luxenberger, H. (1928). Vorläufiger Bericht über psychiatrische Serienuntersuchungen an Zwillingen. Zeitschrift für die gesamte Neurologie und Psychiatrie 116, 297–326.

Lynch, M. and Roberts, J. (1982). Consequences of child abuse. Academic Press, London.

MacAlpine, I. and Hunter, R. (1966). The ’insanity’ of King George III: a classic case of porphyria. British Medical Journal i, 65–71.

McCabe, B. J. (1986). Dietary tyramine and other pressoramines in MAOI regimens: a review. Journal of the American Dietetic Association 86, 1059-64.

MacCarthy, D. (1981). The effects of emotional disturbance and deprivation and somatic growth. In Scientific foundations of paediatrics (ed. J. A. Davis and J. Dobbing), pp. 54–73. Heinemann, London.

McCarthy, P. D. and Walsh, D. (1975). Suicide in Dublin: 1. The under-reporting of suicide and the consequences for national statistics. British Journal of Psychiatry 126, 301-8.

McClure, G. M. G. (1984a). Recent trends in suicide amongst the young. British Journal of Psychiatry 144, 134-8.

McClure, G. M. G. (1984b). Suicide in England and Wales 1975-84. British Journal of Psychiatry 150, 309-14.

McCombie, S. L., Bassuk, E., Savitz, R., and Pell, S. (1976). Development of a medical center rape crisis intervention programme. American Journal of Psychiatry 133, 418-21.

McCreadie, R. G., and Farmer, J. G. (1985). Lithium and hair texture. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 72, 387-8.

McCulloch, D. K., Young, R. J., Prescott, R. J., Campbell, I. W., and Clark, B. F. (1984). Natural history of impotence in diabetic men. Diabetologia 26, 437-40.

MacCulloch, M. J., Snowden, P. R., Wood, P. J. W., and Mills, H. E. (1985). Sadistic fantasy, sadistic behaviour, and offending. British Journal of Psychiatry 143, 20-9.

McDonald, C. (1969). Clinical heterogeneity in senile dementia. British Journal of Psychiatry 115, 267-72.

MacDonald, J. M. (1964). The threat to kill. American Journal of Psychiatry 120, 125-30.

McEvedy, C. P. and Beard, A. W. (1970). Concept of benign myalgic encephalomyelitis. British Medical Journal i, 11–15.

MacFarlane, A. B. (1985). Medical evidence in the Court of Protection. Bulletin of the Royal College of Psychiatrists 9, 26-8.

McGuffin, P. (1984). Principles and methods in psychiatric genetics. In The scientific principles of psychopathology (ed. P. McGuffin, M. F. Shanks, and R. J. Hodgson). Academic Press, London.

McGuffin, P. (1987). The new genetics and childhood psychiatric disorder. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 28, 215-22.

McGuffin, P. and Katz, R. (1986). Nature, nuture and affective disorder. In The biology of depression (ed. J. F. W. Deakin), pp. 26–52, Gaskell, London.

McGuffin, P., Fanner, A. E., Gottesman, M., Murray, R. M., and Reveley, A. M. (1984). Twin concordance for operationally defined schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry 49, 541-5.

McHugh, P. R. and Slavney, P. R. (1986). The perspectives of psychiatry. Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore.

MacKay, A. V. P. and Sheppard, G. P. (1979). Pharmacotherapeutic trials in tardive dyskinesia. British Journal of Psychiatry 135, 489-99.

Mackay, R. I. (1982). The causes of severe mental handicap. Developmental Medicine and Child Neurology 24, 386-93.

McKenna, P. J. (1984). Disorders with overvalued ideas. British Journal of Psychiatry 145, 579-85.

McKinney, W. T., Suomi, S. J., and Harlow, H. F. (1972). Repetitive peer separation of juvenile-age rhesus monkeys. Archives of General Psychiatry 27, 200-3.

Macleod, J. and Walton, H. (1969). Liaison between physicians and psychiatrists in a teaching hospital. Lancet ii, 789-92.

McLoone, P. and Crombie, I. K. (1987). Trends in suicide in Scotland 1974-84: an increasing problem. British Medical Journal 295, 629-31.

McLoughlin, I. J. (1986). Bereavement in the mentally handicapped. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 31, 256-60.

McLoughlin, I. J. (1987). The picas. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 37, 286-90.

MacMillan, J. F., Crow, T. J., Johnson, A. L., and Johnstone, E. C. (1986). The Northwick Park study of first episodes of schizophrenia IV. Expressed emotion and relapse. British Journal of Psychiatry 148, 133-43.

McSweeney, A. J., Grant, I., Medien, R. K., Adams, K. M., and Timms, R. M. (1982). Life quality of patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Archives of Internal Medicine 142, 473-8.

Madanes, C. and Haley, J. (1977). Dimensions of family therapy. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 165, 88–98.

Maguire, G. P. (1983). Psychological and social aspects of childhood malignancy. Annales Nestlé 41, 32–43.

Maguire, G. P. (1985). Psychosocial intervention in women with breast cancer. In: Psychological aspects of cancer (eds. M. Watson and T. Morris). Pergamon Press, Oxford.

Maguire, G. P. and Granville-Grossman, K. L. (1968). Physical illness in psychiatric patients. British Journal of Psychiatry 115, 1365-9.

Maguire, G. P., Julier, D. L., Hawton, K. E., and Bancroft, J. H. J. (1974). Psychiatric morbidity and referral on two general medical wards. British Medical Journal i, 268-70.

Maguire, G. P., Lee, E. O., Bevington, D. J., Kucheman, C. S., Crabtree, R. J., and Cornell, C. E. (1978). Psychiatric problems in the first year after mastectomy. British Medical Journal i, 963-5.

Maguire, G. P., Tait, A., Brooke, M., Thomas, C., and Sellwood, R. (1980). Effect of counselling on the psychiatric morbidity associated with mastectomy. British Medical Journal 281, 1454-6.

Mahendra, B. (1981). Where have all the catatonics gone? Psychological Medicine 11, 669-71.

Mahl, G. F. (1953). Physiological changes during chronic fear. Annals of the New York Academy of Science 56, 240-9.

Make, B. J. (1986). Introduction to pulmonary rehabilitation. Clinics in Chest Medicine 7, 519-48.

Malan, D. H. (1963). A study of brief psychotherapy. Tavistock, London.

Malitz, S., Sackheim, H. A., Decina, P., Kanzler, M., and Ker, B. (1986). The efficacy of electroconvulsive therapy: doseresponse interactions with modality. In Electroconvulsive therapy: clinical and basic research issues. Annals of the New York Academy of Science 467, 56–64.

Maletzky, B. M. (1973). The episodic dyscontrol syndrome. Diseases of the Nervous System 34, 178-84.

Maletzky, B. M. (1974). ’Assisted’ covert sensitization in the treatment of exhibitionism. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 42, 34–40.

Maletzky, B. M. (1976). The diagnosis of pathological intoxication. Journal of Studies on Alcoholism 37, 1215-20.

Maletzky, B. M. (1977). ’Booster’ sessions in aversion therapy: the permanency of treatment. Behaviour Therapy 11, 655-7.

Malin, N., Race, D., and Jones, G. (1980). Services for the mentally handicapped in Britain. Croom Helm, London.

Malmo, R. B. (1962). Activation. In Experimental foundations of clinical psychology (ed. A. J. Bachrach). Basic Books, New York.

Malzberg, B. and Lee, E. S. (1956). Migration and mental disease: a study of first admission to hospitals for mental disease in New York 1939-41. Social Science Research Council, New York.

Mann, A. H. (1977). The psychological effect of a screening programme and clinical trial for hypertension upon the participants. Psychological Medicine 7, 431-8.

Mann, A. H. (1986). Psychological aspects of essential hypertension. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 30, 527-41.

Mann, A. H., Jenkins, R., and Belsey, E. (1981). The twelvemonth outcome of patients with neurotic illness in general practice. Psychological Medicine 11, 535-50.

Mann, J. J., Stanley, M., McBride, P. A., and McEwen, B. S. (1986). Increased serotonin, and beta-adrenergic receptor binding in the frontal cortices of suicide victims. Archives of General Psychiatry 43, 954-9.

Mann, S. A. and Cree, W. (1976). New long stay patients: a national survey of 15 mental hospitals in England and Wales 1972-3. Psychological Medicine 6, 603-16.

Manschreck, T. C., Maher, B. A., Rucklos, M. E., and Vereen, D. R. (1982). Disturbed voluntary motor activity in schizophrenic disorder. Psychological Medicine 12, 73–84.

Mapother, E. (1926). Manic depressive psychosis. British Medical Journal ii, 872-9.

Marcé, L. V. (1858). Traité de la folie des femmes enceintes, des nouvelles accouchés et des nourrices. Baillière, Paris.

Marks, I. M. (1969). Fears and phobias. Heinemann, London.

Marks, I. M. (1981). Space phobia: a pseudo-agoraphobic syndrome. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and Psychiatry 44, 387-91.

Marks, I. M. and Gelder, M. G. (1966). Different ages of onset of varieties of phobia. American Journal of Psychiatry 123, 218-21.

Marks, I. M. and Gelder, M. G. (1967). Transvestism and fetishism; clinical and psychological changes during faradic aversion. British Journal of Psychiatry 113, 711-29.

Marks, I. M., Rachman, S., and Gelder, M. G. (1965). Method for the assessment of aversion therapy in fetishism with narcissism. Behaviour Research and Therapy 3, 253-8.

Marks, I. M., Stern, R. S., Mawson, D., Cobb, J., and McDonald, R. (1980). Clomipramine and exposure for obsessive compulsive rituals. British Journal of Psychiatry 136, 1-25.

Marks, I. M., Gray, S., Cohen, D., Hill, R., Mawson, D., Ramm, E., and Stern, R. S. (1983). Imipramine and brief therapist-aided exposure in agoraphobics having self-exposure homework. Archives of General Psychiatry 40, 153-62.

Marks, V. and Rose, F. C. (1965). Hypoglycaemia. Blackwell, Oxford.

Marsden, C. D. (1983). Pain, as illustrated by the problems of headache and facial pain. In Handbook of Psychiatry, Vol. 2. Mental disorders and somatic illness (ed. M. H. Lader). Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Marsden, C. D. (1984). Neurological causes of dementia other than Alzheimer’s disease. In Handbook of studies on psychiatry and old age (eds. D. W. K. Kay and G. D. Burrows). Elsevier, Amsterdam.

Marsden, C. D. and Jenner, R. (1980). Pathophysiology of extrapyramidal side-effects of neuroleptic drugs. Psychological Medicine 10, 55–72.

Martin, P. R. (1982). Spasmodic torticollis; a behavioral perspective. Journal of Behavioral Medicine 5, 249-74.

Martin, P. R. and Mathews, A. (1978). Tension headaches: a physiological investigation. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 22, 389-99.

Masters, W. H. and Johnson, V. E. (1970). Human sexual inadequacy. Churchill, London.

Masters, W. H. and Johnson, V. E. (1979). Homosexuality in perspective. Little Brown, Boston.

Mathews, A. and Ridgeway, V. (1981). Personality and surgical recovery: a review. British Journal of Clinical Psychology 20, 243-60.

Mathews, A., Gelder, M. G., and Johnston, D. (1981). Agoraphobia: nature and treatment. Tavistock, London.

Maudsley, H. (1879). The pathology of mind. Macmillan, London.

Maudsley, H. (1885). Responsibility in mental disease. Kegan Paul and Trench, London.

Maughan, B., Gray, G., and Rutter, M. (1985). Reading retardation and antisocial behaviour: a follow-up into employment Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 25, 741-58.

Mavissakalian, M., Salemi, R., Thompson, M. E., and Mitchelson, L. (1983). Mitral valve prolapse and agoraphobia. American Journal of Psychiatry 140, 1612-40.

May, P. R. A. (1968). Treatment of schizophrenia. Science House, New York.

Mayer, W. (1921). Über paraphrene psychosen. Zentralblatt für die gesamte Neurologie und Psychiatrie 71, 187–206.

Mayer-Gross, W. (1932). Die Schizophrenie. In Bumke’s Handbuch der Geisteskrankheiten, Vol. 9. Springer, Berlin.

Mayer-Gross, W. (1935). On depersonalization. British Journal of Medical Psychology 15, 103-26.

Mayer-Gross, W., Slater, E., and Roth, M. (1969). Clinical psychiatry. Ballière Tindall and Cox, London.

Mayfield, D., Millard, G., and Hall, P. (1974). The CAGE questionnaire: validation of a new alcoholism screening instrument. American Journal of Psychiatry 131, 1121-3.

Mayou, R. A. (1975). Psychological morbidity in a clinic for sexually transmitted disease. British Journal of Venereal Disease 51, 57–60.

Mayou, R. A. (1976). The nature of bodily symptoms. British Journal of Psychiatry 129, 55–60.

Mayou, R. A. (1979). The course and determinants of reactions to myocardial infarction. British Journal of Psychiatry 134, 588-94.

Mayou, R. A. (1986). The psychiatric and social consequences of coronary artery surgery. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 30, 255-71.

Mayou, R. A. and Hawton, K. E. (1986). Psychiatric disorder in the general hospital. British Journal of Psychiatry 149, 172-90.

Mayou, R. A., Sleight, P., MacMahon, D., and Florencio, M. J. (1981). Early rehabilitation after myocardial infarction. Lancet ii, 1399-401.

Meacher, M. (1972). Taken for a ride. Longmans, London.

Meadow, R. (1985). Management of Munchausen syndrome by proxy. Archives of Diseases of Childhood 60, 385-93.

Mechanic, D. (1962). The concept of illness behaviour. Journal of Chronic Diseases 15, 189-94.

Mechanic, D. (1978). Medical sociology (2nd edn). Free Press, Glencoe.

Mechanic, D. (1979). Future issues in health care; social policy and the rationing of medical services. Free Press, New York.

Mechanic, D. and Aiken, L. H. (1987). Improving the care of patients with chronic mental illness. New England Journal of Medicine 317, 1634-8.

Medical Research Council Drug Trials Subcommittee (1981). Continuation therapy with lithium and amitriptyline in unipolar depressive illness: a controlled clinical trial. Psychological Medicine 11, 409-16.

Mednick, S. A. (1958). A learning theory approach to research in schizophrenia. Psychological Bulletin 55, 316-27.

Mednick, S. A. and Schulsinger, F. (1968). In The transmission of schizophrenia (ed. D. Rosenthal and S. Kety). Pergamon Press, Oxford.

Mednick, S. A., Moffitt, T. E., and Stack, S. (1987). The causes of crime. New biological approaches. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Meduna, L. (1938). General discussion of cardiazol therapy. American Journal of Psychiatry 94, Suppl. 40.

Meecham, W. C. and Smith, N. (1977). Effects of jet aircraft noise on mental hospital admissions. British Journal of Audiology 11, 81-5.

Megargee, E. I. (1966). Uncontrolled and overcontrolled personality type in extreme antisocial aggression. Psychological Monographs 80, No. 3.

Meichenbaum, D. H. (1977). Cognitive-behaviour modification. Plenum, New York.

Mellinger, G. D., Balter, M. B., and Uhlenhuth, E. H. (1985). Insomnia and its treatment. Archives of General Psychiatry 42, 225-32.

Mellor, C. S. (1982). The present status of first-rank symptoms. British Journal of Psychiatry 140, 423-4.

Meitzer, E. S. and Kumar, R. (1985). Puerperal mental illness, clinical features and classification: a study of 142 motherand-baby admissions. British Journal of Psychiatry 147, 647-54.

Melzack, R. and Wall, P. D. (1965). Pain mechanisms: a new theory. Science 130, 971-9.

Mendels, J. (1965). Electroconvulsive therapy and depression I: the prognostic significance of clinical features. British Journal of Psychiatry 111, 675-81.

Mendels, J., Secunda, S. K., and Dyson, W. L. (1972). A controlled study of the antidepressant effects of lithium carbonate. Archives of General Psychiatry 26, 456-72.

Mendelson, M. (1982). Psychodynamics of depression. In Handbook of affective disorders (ed. E. S. Paykel). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Mendelson, W. B. (1980). The use and misuse of sleeping pills: a clinical guide. Plenum, New York.

Mendelwicz, J. and Rainer, J. D. (1977). Adoption study supporting genetic transmission of manic depressive illness. Nature 268, 327-9.

Menninger, K. (1948). Changing concepts of disease. Viking Press, New York.

Merikangas, K. R., Leckman, J. F., Prusoff, B. A., Pauls, D. L., and Weissman, M. M. (1985). Familial transmission of depression and alcoholism. Archives of General Psychiatry 42, 367-72.

Merskey, H. (1980). Psychiatry and the treatment of pain. British Journal of Psychiatry 136, 600-2.

Merskey, H. (1984). Too much pain. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 30, 63–66.

Merskey, H. and Spear, F. G. (1967). Pain, psychological and psychiatric aspects. Baillière, Tindall and Cassell, London.

Meyer, A. J. and Henderson, J. B. (1974). Multiple risk factor reductions in the prevention of cardiovascular disease. Preventive Medicine 3, 225-36.

Meyer, J. K. and Reter, D. J. (1979). Sex reassignment: follow up. Archives of General Psychiatry 36, 1010-15.

Meyer, V. and Levy, R. (1971). Treatment of obsessive compulsive neurosis. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine 64, 1115-18.

Meyers, S., Walfish, J. S., Sachar, D. B., Greenstein, A. J., Hill, A. G., and Janowitz, H. D. (1980). Quality of life after surgery for Crohn’s disease: a psychosocial survey. Gastroenterology 78, 1–6.

Mezey, G. C. (1985). Rape — victimological and psychiatric aspects. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 28, 152-8.

Mezzich, J. E., Fabrega, H., Mezzich, A. C., and Coffman, G. A. (1985). International Experience with DSMIII. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disorders 173, 738-41.

Michael, R. P. and Gibbons, J. L. (1963). Interrelationships between the endocrine system and neuropsychiatry. International Review of Neurobiology 5, 243–302.

Milano, M. R. and Kornfeld, D. S. (1984). Psychiatry and surgery. In: Psychiatry update. The American Psychiatric Association Annual review, Vol. 3. (ed. L. Grinspoon). American Psychiatric Press, Washington.

Miles, A. (1979). Some psychosocial consequences of multiple sclerosis: problems of social interaction and group identity. British Medical Journal iii, 321-31.

Miles, P. (1977). Conditions predisposing to suicide: a review. Journal of Nervous and Mental Diseases 164, 231-46.

Miller, D. H., Clancy, J., and Cumming, E. (1953). A comparison between unidirectional current non-convulsive electrical stimulation given with Reiter’s machine, standard alternating current electroshock (Cerletti method) and pentothal in chronic schizophrenia. American Journal of Psychiatry 109, 617-20.

Miller, E. (1980a). Cognitive assessment of the older adult. In Handbook of mental health (ed. J. E. Birren and R. E. Sloane). Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs.

Miller, E. (1980b). Psychological intervention in the management and rehabilitation of neuropsychological impairments. Behaviour Research and Therapy 18, 527-35.

Miller, G. H. and Agnew, N. (1974). The Lederman model of alcohol consumption. Quarterly Journal of Studies on Alcoholism 35, 877-98.

Miller, H. (1961). Accident neurosis. British Medical Journal i, 919-25 and 992-8.

Miller, H. and Stern, G. (1965). The long-term prognosis of severe head injury. Lancet i, 225-9.

Miller, H. L., Coombs, D. W., Leeper, J. D., and Barlor, S. N. (1984). An analysis of the effects of suicide prevention facilities on suicide rates in the United States. Journal of Public Health 74, 340-3.

Miller, R. J., Horn, A. S., and lversen, L. L. (1974). The action of neuroleptic drugs on dopamine-stimulated adenosine cyclic 3′ 5′ monophosphate production in rat neostriatum and limbic forebrain. Molecular Pharmacology 10, 759-66.

Mindham, R. H. S. (1970). Psychiatric symptoms in Parkinsonism. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and Psychiatry 33, 188-91.

Mindham, R. H. S. (1974). Psychiatric aspects of Parkinson’s disease. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 11, 411-14.

Mindham, R. H. S. (1979). Tricyclic antidepressants and amine precursors. In Psychopharmacology of affective disorders (ed. E. S. Paykel and A. Coppen). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Mindham, R. H. S., Bagshaw, A., Howland, C., and Shepherd, M. (1973). An evaluation of continuation therapy with tricyclic antidepressants in depressive illness. Psychological Medicine 3, 5-17.

Mindham, R. H. S., Ahmed, S. W., and Clough, S. G. (1982). A controlled study of dementia in Parkinson’s disease. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and Psychiatry 45, 969-74.

Minski, L. and Guttmann, E. (1938). Huntington’s chorea: a study of thirty four families. Journal of Mental Science 84, 21–96.

Minuchin, S. (1974). Families and family therapy. Tavistock, London.

Minuchin, S. and Fishman, H. C. (1981). Family therapy techniques. Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Mass.

Minuchin, S., Rosman, B., and Baker, L. (1978). Psychosomatic families: anorexia nervosa in context. Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Mass.

Mitchell, A. R. K. (1985). Psychiatrists in primary health care settings. British Journal of Psychiatry 147, 371-9.

Mitchell, J. E. (1986). Anorexia nervosa: medical and physiological aspects. In: Handbook of eating disorders: physiology, psychology and treatment of obesity, anorexia and bulimia (eds. K. D. Brownell, and K. J. P. Forreyt). Basic Books, New York.

Mitchell, W., Falconer, M. A., and Hill, D. (1954). Epilepsy with fetishism relieved by temporal lobectomy. Lancet ii, 626-30.

Mitchell-Heggs, N., Kelly, D., and Richardson, A. (1976). Stereotactic limbic leucotomy — a follow-up after 16 months. British Journal of Psychiatry 128, 226-41.

Mitcheson, M. C. (1983). Drug addiction. In The Oxford textbook of medicine (ed. D. J. Weatherall, J. G. G. Ledingham, and D. A. Warrell). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Mohr, J. W., Turner, R. E., and Jerry, M. B. (1964). Pedophilia and exhibitionism. University Press, Toronto.

Monteiro, W., Marks, I. M., and Ramm, E. (1985). Marital adjustment and treatment outcome in agoraphobia. British Journal of Psychiatry 146, 383-90.

Morel, B. A. (1860). Traité des malades mentales. Masson, Paris.

Morgan, H. G. (1979). Death wishes? The understanding and management of deliberate self-harm. Wiley, Chichester.

Morgan, H. G. (1985). Functional vomiting. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 29, 341-52.

Morgan, H. G., Bums-Cox, C. J., Pocock, H., and Pottle, S. (1975). Deliberate self-harm: clinical and socio-economic characteristics of 368 patients. British Journal of Psychiatry 127, 564-74.

Morris, P. (1969). Put away. Routledge and Kegan Paul, London.

Morrison, J. R. (1975). The family histories of manic-depressive patients with and without alcoholism. Journal of Nervous and Mental Diseases 160, 227-9.

Morselli, E. (1886). Sulla dismorfofobia e sulla tabefobia. Bolletin Academica Medica VI, 110-19.

Morstyn, R., Duffy, F. H., and McCarley, R. W. (1983). Altered P300 topography in schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry 40, 729-34.

Mortimer, P. S. and Dawber, R. P. R. (1984). Hair loss and lithium, commentary. International Journal of Dermatology 23, 603-4.

Mosher, L. R. (1983). Alternatives to psychiatric hospitalisation. New England Journal of Medicine 309, 1579-80.

Mosher, L. and Keith, S. (1980). Psychosocial treatment: individual, group, family and community support approaches. Schizophrenia Bulletin 6, 10–41.

Moss, A. R. (1987). AIDS and intravenous drug use: the real heterosexual epidemic. British Medical Journal 294, 389-90.

Moss, P. D. and McEvedy, C. P. (1966). An epidemic of overbreathing among schoolgirls. British Medical Journal ii, 1295-300.

Mowat, R. R. (1966). Morbid jealousy and murder. Tavistock, London.

Mowrer, O. H. (1950). Learning theory and personality dynamics. Ronald Press, New York.

Mrazek, D. and Mrazek, P. (1985) Child maltreatment. In Child and adolescent psychiatry (ed. M. Rutter and L. Hersov) (2nd edn). Blackwell, Oxford.

Mrazek, D., Secunda, S. K., and Dyson, W. L. (1972). A controlled study of the antidepressant effects of lithium carbonate. Archives of General Psychiatry 26, 154-7.

Mrazek, D., Stinnett, J. L., Bums, D., and Frazer, A. (1975). Amine precursors and depression. Archives of General Psychiatry 32, 22–30.

Mullen, P. E. and Maack, L. H. (1985). Jealousy, pathological jealousy and aggression. In Aggression and dangerousness (ed. D. P. Farington and J. Gunn). Wiley, Chichester.

Munetz, M. R. and Comes, C. L. (1982). Akathisia, pseudoakathisia and tardive dyskinesia. Comprehensive Psychiatry 23, 345-52.

Munro, A. (1980). Monosymptomatic hypochondriacal psychosis. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 24, 34-8.

Munro, A. (1987). Paranoid (delusional) disorders: DSMIIIR and beyond. Comprehensive Psychiatry 28, 35-9.

Munroe, R. L. (1955). Schools of psychoanalytic thought. Hutchinson Medical, London.

Munthe-Kaas, A. (1980). Rectal administration of diazepam: theoretical basis and clinical experience. In Antiepileptic therapy: advances in drug monitoring (ed. S. L. Johannensen et al.). Raven Press, New York.

Murphy, E. (1986). Affective disorders in the elderly. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Murphy, E., Lindesay, J., and Grundy, E. (1986). 60 years of suicide in England and Wales. Archives of General Psychiatry 43, 969-76.

Murphy, E., Smith, R., Lindesay, J., and Slattery, J. (1988). Increased mortality rates in late-life depression. British Journal of Psychiatry 152, 347-53.

Murphy, G. E. (1982). Social origins of depression in old age. British Journal of Psychiatry 141, 135-42.

Murphy, G. E. (1983). The prognosis of depression in old age. British Journal of Psychiatry 142, 111-19.

Murphy, G. E. (1986). Suicide and alcoholism. In Suicide (ed. A. Roy). Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Murphy, G. E. and Guze, S. B. (1960). Setting limits: the management of the manipulative patient. American Journal of Psychotherapy 14, 30–47.

Murphy, G. E., Simons, A. D., Wetzel, R. D., and Lustman, P. J. (1984). Cognitive therapy and pharmacotherapy: singly and together in the treatment of depression. Archives of General Psychiatry 41, 33–41.

Murphy, H. B. M. (1968). Cultural factors in the genesis of schizophrenia. In The transmission of schizophrenia (ed. D. Rosenthal and S. S. Kety). Pergamon Press, Oxford.

Murphy, H. B. M. (1977). Migration, culture and mental health. Psychological medicine 7, 677-84.

Murphy, H. B. M. and Raman, A. C. (1971). The chronicity of schizophrenia in indigenous tropical people. British Journal of Psychiatry 118, 489-97.

Murphy, S. B. and Donderi, D. C. (1980). Predicting the success of cataract surgery. Journal of Behavioral Medicine 3, 1-14.

Murray, R. M. (1976). Characteristics and prognosis of alcoholic doctors. British Medical Journal 2, 1537-9.

Murray, R. M. and Reveley, A. (1981). The genetic contributioin to the neuroses. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 25, 185-90.

Murray, R. M., Reveley, A. M., and McGuffin, P. (1986). Genetic vulnerability to schizophrenia. In Psychiatric clinics of North America (ed. A. Roy), Vol. 9. Saunders, Philadelphia.

Myers, J. B., Morgan, T. O., Carney, S. L., and Ray, C. (1980). Effects of lithium on the kidney. Kidney International 18, 601-8.

Myers, J. K. et al. (1984). Six-month prevalence of psychiatric disorder in three communities, 1980–1982. Archives of General Psychiatry 41, 959-67.

Nadelson, C. C., Notman, M. T., Zackson, H., and Garnick, J. (1982). A follow-up study of rape victims. American Journal of Psychiatry 139, 1266-70.

Nagler, S. H. (1957). Fetishism. Psychiatric Quarterly 31, 713-41.

Naguib, M. and Levy, R. (1982). Prediction of outcome in senile dementia — a computed tomography study. British Journal of Psychiatry 140, 263-7.

Navia, B. and Price, R. (1987). AIDS dementia complex and the presenting or sole manifestation of HIV infection. Archives of Neurology 44, 65-9.

Naylor, G. J., Dick, D. A. T., Dick, E. G., Le Poidevin, D., and Whyte, S. F. (1973). Electrolyte membrane cation carrier in depressive illness. Psychological Medicine 3, 502-8.

Naylor, G. T., Worrall, E. P., Peet, M., and Dick, P. (1976). Whole blood adenosine triphosphate in manic depressive illness. British Journal of Psychiatry 129, 233-5.

Naysmith, A., Hinton, J. M., Meredith, R., Marks, M. D., and Berry, R. J. (1983). Surviving malignant disease. Psychological and family aspects. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 30, 22–27.

Ndetei, D. M. and Muhangi, J. (1979). The prevalence and clinical presentation of psychiatric illness in a rural setting in Kenya. British Journal of Psychiatry 135, 269-72.

Neale, J. M. and Oltmans, T. F. (1980). Schizophrenia, Chapter 6. Wiley, Chichester.

Neary, D., Snowden, J. S., and Mann, D. M. A. (1986). Alzheimer’s disease: a correlative study. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and Psychiatry 49, 229-37.

Needleman, H., Gunnoe, C., Leviton, A., Reed, R., Peresie, H., Muher, C., and Barrett, P. (1979). Deficits in psychologic and classroom performances of children with elevated dentine lead levels. New England Journal of Medicine 300, 689-95.

Neligan, G. and Prudham, D. (1969). Norms for four standard developmental milestones by sex, social class and place in the family. Developmental Medicine and Child Neurology 11, 413-22.

Nemiah, J. C. and Sifneos, P. E. (1970). Psychosomatic illness: a problem of communication. Psychotherapy and Psychosomatics 18, 154-60.

Newson-Smith, J. G. B. and Hirsch, S. R. (1979a). Psychiatric symptoms in self-poisoning patients. Psychological Medicine 9, 493–500.

Newson-Smith, J. G. B. and Hirsch, S. R. (1979b). A comparison of social workers and psychiatrists in evaluating suicide. British Journal of Psychiatry 134, 335-42.

Nichols, P. J. R. (1975). Some psychosocial aspects of rehabilitation and their implication in research. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine 68, 537-44.

Nicholson, W. A. (1967). Collection of unwanted drugs from private homes. British Medical Journal iii, 730-1.

Nicol, A. R. (1982). Psychogenic abdominal pain in childhood. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 27, 351-3.

Nielsen, J. and Sorensen, K. (1979). Alcohol policy: alcohol consumption, alcohol prices, delirium tremens and alcoholism as causes of death in Denmark. Social Psychiatry 14, 133-8.

Nilsson, A., Kay, L., and Jacobson, L. (1967). Postpartum mental disorder in an unselected sample: psychiatric history. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 11, 327-40.

NiNuallain, M., O’Hare, A., and Walsh, D. (1987). Incidence of schizophrenia in Ireland. Psychological Medicine 17, 943-8.

Nirje, B. (1970). Normalisation. Journal of Mental Subnormality 31, 62–70.

Notman, M. T. and Nadelson, C. C. (1984). The rape victim. In Manual of psychiatric consultation and emergency care (ed. F. G. Guggenheim and M. Weiner). Jason Aronson, New York.

Nott, P. N., Franklin, M., Armitage, C., and Gelder, M. G. (1976). Hormonal changes and mood in the puerperium. British Journal of Psychiatry 128, 379-83.

Noyes, R. and Clancy, J. (1976). Anxiety neurosis: a 5 year follow-up. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 162, 200-5.

Noyes, R. and Kathol, R. G. (1986). Depression and cancer. Psychiatric Developments 2, 77-100.

Noyes, R., Kathol, R. G., Crowe, R., Hoenk, P. R., and Slymen, D. J. (1978). The familial prevalence of anxiety neurosis. Archives of General Psychiatry 35, 1057-9.

Nurnberger, J. I. and Gershon, E. S. (1982). Genetics. In Handbook of affective disorders (ed. E. S. Paykel), pp. 126-45. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Oates, R. K., Peacock, A., and Forrest, D. (1985). Long-term effects of nonorganic failure to thrive. Paediatrics 75, 36–40.

O’Brien, S. J. (1986). The controversy surrounding epilepsy and driving: a review. Public Health 100, 21-7.

O’Connor, A. A. (1987). Female sex offenders. British Journal of Psychiatry 150, 615-20.

O’Connor, N. (1968). Psychology and intelligence. In Studies in psychiatry (ed. M. Shepherd and D. L. Davis). Oxford University Press, London.

Ødegaard, Ø. (1932). Emigration and insanity. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica Suppl. 4.

Odium, D. (1955). Fetishism. British Medical Journal i, 302.

Office of Health Economics. (1986a). Cystic fibrosis. Office of Health Economics, London.

Office of Health Economics (1986b). Mental handicap. Partnership in the community? Office of Health Economics, London.

Okuma, T., Inanaga, K., Otsuki, S., Sarai, K., Takayashi, R., Hazama, H., Mori, A., and Watanabe, M. (1981). A preliminary double-blind study of the efficacy of carbamazepine in the prophylaxis of manic-depressive illness. Psychopharmacology 73, 95-6.

Oliver, C. and Holland, A. J. (1986). Down’s syndrome and Alzheimer’s disease: a review. Psychological Medicine 16, 307-22.

Oliver, J. E. (1970). Huntington’s chorea in Northamptonshire. British Journal of Psychiatry 116, 241-53.

Olsen, M. R. (1985). The care of the chronically mentally ill. Current themes in psychiatry (ed. R. N. Gaind et al.), Vol. 4. Spectrum. New York.

Olsen, R. (1979a). Services for the elderly and mentally infirm. In Community care for the mentally disabled (ed. J. K. Wing and R. Olsen). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Olsen, R. (1979b). Alternative patterns of residential care for discharged psychiatric patients. British Association of Social Workers, London.

O’Malley, T., Everitt, D. E., O’Malley, H. C., and Campion, W. (1983). Identifying and preventing family-mediated abuse and neglect of elderly persons. Annals of Internal Medicine 98, 998-1005.

Orford, J. (1973). A comparison of alcoholics whose drinking is totally uncontrolled and those whose drinking is mainly controlled. Behaviour Research and Therapy 11, 565-76.

Orford, J. (1985). Excessive appetites: a psychological view of addictions. Wiley, Chichester.

Orford, J. (1979). Alcohol and the family. In Alcoholism in perspective (ed. M. Grant and P. Gwinner). Croom Helm, London.

Orford, J. and Edwards, G. (1977). Alcoholism. Maudsley Monographs No. 26. Oxford University Press, London.

Orley, J., and Wing, J. K. (1979). Psychiatric disorder in two African villages. Archives of General Psychiatry 36, 513-20.

Orme, M. L’E. (1984). Antidepressants and health disease. British Medical Journal 289, 1–2.

Osberg, J. W., Meares, G. J., McKee, D. C. M., and Burnett, G. B. (1982). Intellectual functioning in renal failure and chronic dialysis. Journal of Chronic Diseases 35, 445-57.

Osborn, M. (1981). Physical and psychological determinants of premenstrual tension: research issues and a proposed methodology. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 25, 363-7.

Osborn, M. (1984). Depression at the menopause. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 126-9.

Osborn, M., Hawton, K., and Gath, D. (1988). Sexual dysfunction among middle-aged women in the community. British Medical Journal 296, 959-62.

Osler, W. (1910). Angina pectoris. Lancet i, 697–702 and 839-44.

Osmond, H., Smythies, J. R., and Harley-Mason, J. (1952). Schizophrenia: a new approach. Journal of Mental Science 98, 309-15.

Osofsky, H. J. and Blumenthal, S. T. (1985). Premenstrual syndrome: current findings and current directions. American Psychiatric Association Press, Washington, D. C.

Ovenstone, I. M. K. and Kreitman, N. (1974). Two syndromes of suicide. British Journal of Psychiatry 124, 336-45.

Owen, F., Cross, A. J., Crow, T. J., Longden, A., Pulter, M., and Riley, G. J. (1978). Increased dopamine receptor sensitivity in schizophrenia. Lancet ii, 223-5.

Owens, D. G. C., Johnstone, E. C., Crow, T. J., Frith, C. D., Jagoe, J. R., and Kreel, L. (1985). Lateral ventricular size in schizophrenia: relationship to the disease process and its clinical manifestations. Psychological Medicine 15, 27–41.

Pachalis, A. P., Kimmei, H. D., and Kimmel, E. (1972). Further study of diurnal instrumental conditioning in the treatment of enuresis nocturna. Journal of Behaviour Research and Experimental Psychiatry 3, 253-6.

Packard, E. H. (1909). An analysis of the psychoses associated with Graves’ disease. American Journal of Insanity 66, 189–202.

Paffenberger, R. S. (1964). Epidemiological aspects of postpartum mental illness. British Journal of Social and Preventive Medicine 18, 189-95.

Pare, C. M. B. and Sandler, M. J. (1959). A clinical and biochemical study of a trial of iproniazid in the treatment of depression. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and Psychiatry 22, 247-51.

Parker, G. (1979). Parental characteristics in relation to depressive disorders. British Journal of Psychiatry 134, 138-47.

Parkes, C. M. (1978). Psychological reactions to loss of a limb. In Modern perspectives in the psychological aspects of surgery (ed. J. G. Howells). Macmillan, London.

Parkes, C. M. (1985). Bereavement. British Journal of Psychiatry 146, 11–17.

Parkes, C. M. and Brown, R. J. (1972). Health after bereavement: a controlled study of young Boston widows and widowers. Psychosomatic Medicine 34, 449-61.

Parkes, C. M., Benjamin, B., and Fitzgerald, R. G. (1969). Broken heart: a statistical study of increased mortality among widowers. British Medical Journal i, 740-3.

Parkes, J. D. (1985). Sleep and its disorders. Saunders, London.

Parkes, K. R. (1982). Occupational stress among student nurses: a natural experiment. Journal of Applied Psychology 67, 784-96.

Parloff, M. B., Waskow, I. E., and Wolfe, B. E. (1978). Research on therapist variables in relation to process and outcome. In Handbook of psychotherapy and behaviour change (ed. S. L. Garfield and A. E. Bergin (2nd edn). Wiley, New York.

Parnas, J., Schulsinger, F., Teasdale, T. W., Schulsinger, H., Feldman, P. M., and Mednick, S. A. (1982). Perinatal complications and clinical outcome within the schizophrenia spectrum. British Journal of Psychiatry 140, 416-20.

Parry-Jones, W. Ll. (1972). The trade in lunacy. Routledge and Kegan Paul, London.

Parry-Jones, W. Ll. (1973). Criminal law and complicity in suicide and attempted suicide. Medicine, Science and the Law 13, 110-19.

Parry-Jones, W. L., Santer-Westrate, H. C., and Crawley, R. C. (1970). Behaviour therapy in a case of hysterical blindness. Behaviour Research and Therapy 8, 79–85.

Parsons, T. (1951). The social system. Free Press, Glencoe.

Pasamanick, B. and Knobloch, H. (1966). Retrospective studies on the epidemiology of reproductive casualty: old and new. Merril-Paimer Quarterly of Behavioral Development 12, 7—26.

Pasamanick, B., Scarpitti, F. R., and Lefton, M. (1964). Home versus hospital care for schizophrenics. Journal of the American Medical Association 187, 177-81.

Patel, C. (1975). 12 month follow-up of yoga and biofeedback in the management of hypertension. Lancet i, 62-4.

Paton, W. D. M. (1969). A pharmacological approach to drug dependence and drug tolerance. In Scientific basis of drug dependence (ed. H. Steinberg). Churchill, London.

Patterson, E. M. (1977). The experience of dying. Prentice-Hall, London.

Patterson, R. L. and Jackson, G. M. (1980). Behaviour modification with the elderly. Progress in Behaviour Modification 9, 205-39.

Pattison, E. M. (1966). A critique of alcoholism treatment concepts. Quarterly Journal of Studies on Alcoholism 27, 49–71.

Pauls, D. L., Cohen, D. J., Heimbuch, R., Detlor, J., and Kidd, K. K. (1981). Familial pattern and transmission of Gilles de la Tourette syndrome and multiple tics. Archives of General Psychiatry 38, 1091-3.

Paykel, E. S. (1974). Recent life events and clinical depression. In Life stress and illness (ed. E. G. Gunderson and R. H. Rahe), pp. 134-63. Thomas, Springfield, Ill.

Paykel, E. S. (1978). Contribution of life events to causation of psychiatric illness. Psychological Medicine 8, 245-53.

Paykel, E. S. (1981). Have multivariate statistics contributed to classification? British Journal of Psychiatry 139, 357-62.

Paykel, E. S. (1982). Life events and environment. In Handbook of affective disorder (ed. E. S. Paykel), pp. 146-61. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Paykel, E. S. (1983). Methodological aspects of life event research. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 21, 341-52.

Paykel, E. S., Myers, J. K., Dienelt, M. N., Klerman, G. L., Lindenthal, J. J., and Pepper, M. P. (1969). Life events and depression: a controlled study. Archives of General Psychiatry 21, 753-60.

Paykel, E. S., Prusoff,B. A., and Myers, J. K. (1975a). Suicide attempts and recent life events: a controlled comparison. Archives of General Psychiatry 32, 327-33.

Paykel, E. S., Di Mascio, A., Haskell, D., and Prusoff, B. A. (1975b). Effects of maintenance amitriptyline and psychotherapy on symptoms of depression. Psychological Medicine 5, 67–77.

Paykel, E. S., Emms, E. M., Fletcher, J., and Rassaby, E. S. (1980). Life events and support in puerperal depression. British Journal of Psychiatry 136, 339-46.

Paykel, E. S., Rao, B. M., and Taylor, C. N. (1984). Life stress and symptom pattern in outpatient depression. Psychological Medicine 14, 559-68.

Paykel, E. S., Griffith, J. H., and Mangen, S. P. (1985). Community psychiatric nursing. In Current themes in psychiatry (ed. R. N. Gaind, F. I. Fawzy, B. L. Hodson, and R. O. Pasnau), Vol. 4. Spectrum. New York.

Payne, B. and Norfleet, M. A. (1986). Chronic pain and the family: a review. Pain 26, 1-22.

Payne, R. W. (1962). An object classification test as ameasure of over-inclusiveness in schizophrenic patients. British Journal of Social and Clinical Psychology 1, 213-21.

Payne, R. W. (1973). Cognitive abnormalities. In Handbook of abnormal psychology (ed. H. J. Eysenck) (2nd edn). Pitman Medical, London.

Payne, R. W. and Friedlander, D. (1962). A short battery of simple tests for measuring over-inclusive thinking. Journal of Mental Science 108, 362-7.

Pedley, T. A. and Meldrum, B. S. (eds.) (1983). Recent advances in epilepsy, Vol. 1. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Pedley, T. A. and Meldrum B. S. (eds.) (1985). Recent advances in epilepsy, Vol. 2. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Pedley, T. A. and Meldrum, B. S. (eds.) (1986). Recent advances in epilepsy, Vol. 3. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Penrose, L. (1938). A clinical and genetic study of 1280 cases of mental deficiency. HMSO, London.

Penrose, R. J. J. and Storey, P. (1972). Life events before subarachnoid haemorrhage. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 16, 329-33.

Perley, M. J. and Guze, S. B. (1962). Hysteria — the stability and usefulness of clinical criteria. New England Journal of Medicine 266, 421-6.

Perlmutter, L. C., Hakami, M. K., Hodgson-Harrington, C., Ginsberg, J., Katz, J., Singer, D. E., and Nathan, D. M. (1984). Decreased cognitive function in aging non-insulin-dependent diabetic patients. American Journal of Medicine 77, 1043-48.

Peris, F., Hefferline, R. F., and Goodman, P. (1951). Gestalt therapy: excitement and growth in human personality. Penguin, Harmondsworth.

Peroutka, S. J., Lebovitz, R. M., and Snyder, S. H. (1986). Two distinct serotonin receptors with different physiological functions. Science 212, 827-9.

Perr, I. N. (1985). Liability of the mentally ill and their insurers in negligence and other civil actions. American Journal of Psychiatry 142, 1414-18.

Perrin, G. M. (1961). Cardiovascular aspects of electric shock therapy. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 36, Suppl. 152, 1-45.

Perris, C. (1966). A study of bipolar (manic depressive) and unipolar recurrent depressive psychoses. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 42, Suppl. 194.

Perris, C. (1974). A study of cycloid psychoses. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica, Suppl. 253.

Perry, E. K., Perry, R. H., Blessed, G., and Tomlinson, B. E. (1977). Necropsy evidence of central cholinergic deficits in senile dementia. Lancet i, 189.

Perry, E. K., Tomlinson, B. E., and Blessed, G. (1978). Correlation of cholinergic abnormalities with senile plaques and mental test scores in senile dementia. British Medical Journal ii, 1457-9.

Perry, E. K., Oakley, A. E., and Candy, J. M. (1981). Neurochemical activities in human temporal lobe related to ageing and Alzheimer-type changes. Neurobiology of Ageing 2, 251-6.

Perry, P. S., Morgan, D. E., Smith, R. E., and Tsuang, M. T. (1982). Treatment of unipolar depression accompanied by delusions. Journal of Affective Disorders 4, 195–200.

Perry, R. and Perry, E. K. (1982). The ageing brain and its pathology. In The psychiatry of late life (ed. R. Levy and F. Post). Blackwell, Oxford.

Perry, T. L., Hansen, S., and Kloster, M. (1973). Huntington’s chorea: deficiency of gamma-aminobutyric acid in brain. New England Journal of Medicine 288, 337-42.

Peters, S. D., Wyatt, G. E., Finkelhor, D. (1986), Prevalence. In A source book on child sexual abuse (ed. D. Finkelhor). Sage, London.

Petersen, P. (1968). Psychiatric disorders in primary hyperparathyroidism. Journal of Clinical Endocrinology and Metabolism 28, 1491-5.

Peterson, B., Kristenson, H., Sternby, N. H., Trell, E., Fex, G., and Hood, B. (1980). Alcohol consumption and premature death in middle-aged men. British Medical Journal i, 1403-6.

Petursson, H. and Lader, M. H. (1984). Dependence on tranquillizers. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Pfohl, B. and Andreasen, N. C. (1986). Schizophrenia: diagnosis and classification. In American Psychiatric Association annual review (ed. A. J. Frances and R. E. Hales), Vol. 5. American Psychiatric Press, Washington, DC.

Philippopoulos, G. S., Wittkower, E. D., and Cousineau, A. (1958). The etiologic significance of emotional factors in onset and exacerbations of multiple sclerosis. Psychosomatic Medicine 20, 458-74.

Pichot, P. (1982). The diagnosis and classification of mental disorders in French speaking countries: background, current view and comparison with other nomenclature. Psychological Medicine 12, 475-92.

Pichot, P. (1984). The French approach to classification. British Journal of Psychiatry 144, 113-18.

Pilowsky, I. (1969). A general classification of abnormal illness behaviours. British Journal of Medical Psychology 51, 131-7.

Pilowsky, I. (1978). Psychodynamic aspects of pain experience. In The psychology of pain (ed. R. A. Sternbach). Raven Press, New York.

Pilowsky, I. and Spence, N. D. (1975). Patterns of illness behaviour in patients with intractable pain. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 19, 279-87.

Pincus, J. H. and Tucker, G. J. (1985). Behavioural neurology (3rd edn). Oxford University Press, New York.

Pinel, P. (1806). A treatise on insanity (translated by D. D. Davis). Reprinted 1962. Hafner, New York.

Pippard, J. and Ellam, L. (1981). Electroconvulsive treatment in Great Britain. Gaskell, London.

Pitres, A. and Régis, E. (1902). Les obsessions et les impulsions. Doin, Paris.

Pitt, B. (1968). ’Atypical’ depression following childbirth. British Journal of Psychiatry 114, 1325-35.

Pitts, F. N. and McClure, J. N. (1967). Lacate metabolism in anxiety neurosis. New England Journal of Medicine 25, 1329-36.

Pitts, F. N. and Winokur, G. (1964). Affective disorders III: diagnostic correlates and incidence of suicide. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 139, 176-81.

Planansky, K. and Johnston, R. (1977). Homicidal aggression in schizophrenic men. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 55, 65–73.

Plant, M. A. (1975). Drug takers in an English Town. Tavistock, London.

Plant, M. A., Peck, D. F., and Stuart, R. (1982). Self-reported drinking habits and alcohol-related consequences among a cohort of Scottish teenagers. British Journal of Addiction 77, 75–90.

Plant, M. A., Peck, D. F., and Samuel, E. (1985). Alcohol, drugs and school leavers. Tavistock, London.

Platt, S. (1986). Parasiticide and unemployment. British Journal of Psychiatry 149, 401-3.

Platt, S. (1987). Suicide trends in 24 European countries 1972–1984. In Current issues in suicidology (ed. J. Möller, A. Schmidtke, and R. Wetz). Springer, Berlin.

Pokorny, A. (1964). Suicide rates in various psychiatric disorders. Archives of General Psychiatry 139, 499–506.

Pollard, R. (1973). Surgical implications of some types of drug dependence. British Medical Journal i, 784-7.

Pollin, W. and Stabenau, J. (1968). Biological, psychological, and historical differences in a series of monozygotic twins discordant for schizophrenia. In Transmission of schizophrenia (ed. D. Rosenthal and S. Kety). Pergamon Press, London.

Pollin, W., Cardon, P. V. Jr, and Kety, S. S. (1961). Effects of aminoacid feedings in schizophrenic patients treated with iproniazid. Science 133, 104-5.

Pollitt, J. (1957). Natural history of obsessional states. British Medical Journal i, 194-8.

Pollitt, J. (1960). Natural history studies in mental illness: a discussion based upon a pilot study of obsessional states. Journal of Mental Science 106, 93-113.

Pond, D. A. (1957). Psychiatric aspects of epilepsy. Journal of the Indian Medical Profession 3, 1441-51.

Pond, D. A. and Bidwell, B. H. (1960). A survey of epilepsy in fourteen general practices. II: Social and psychological aspects. Epilepsia 1, 285-99.

Pond, D. A., Bidwell, B. H., and Stein, L. (1980). A survey of epilepsy in fourteen general practices. 1: Demographic and medical data. Psychiatrica, Neurologia, et Neurochirurgia 63, 217-36.

Pope, H. G., Jonas, J. M., Hudson, J. I., Cohen, B. M., and Gunderson, J. G. (1983). The validity of DSMIII borderline personality disorder: a phenomenological, family histoiy, treatment response, and long term follow-up study. Archives of General Psychiatry 40, 23–30.

Popham, R. E. (1956). The Jellinek alcoholism estimation formula and its application to Canadian data. Quarterly Journal of Studies on Alcohol 17, 559-93.

Popkin, M. K., Callies, A. L., and Mackenzie, J. D. (1985). The outcome of antidepressant use in the medically ill. Archives of General Psychiatry 42, 1160-3.

Post, F. (1965). The clinical psychiatry of late life. Pergamon Press, New York.

Post, F. (1966). Persistent persecutory states in the elderly. Pergamon Press, London.

Post, F. (1971). Schizo-affective symptomatology in late life. British Journal of Psychiatry 118, 437-45.

Post, F. (1972). The management and nature of depressive illnesses in late life: a follow-through study. British Journal of Psychiatry 121, 393–404.

Post, R. M., Uhde, T. W., Ballenger, J. C., and Squillace, K. M. (1983). Prophylactic efficacy of carbamazepine in manic-depressive illness. American Journal of Psychiatry 140, 1602-4.

Post, R. M., Uhde, T. W., Roy-Byrne, P. P., and Joffe, R. T. (1986). Antidepressant effects of carbamazepine. American Journal of Psychiatry 143, 29–34.

Powell, G. F., Brasel, J. A., and Blizzard, R. M. (1967). Emotional deprivation and growth retardation simulating idiopathic hypopituitarism. New England Journal of Medicine 276, 1271-83.

Power, D. J. (1969). Subnormality and crime. Medicine, Science and the Law 9, 82–93 and 162-71.

Power, D. J., Benn, R. T., and Homes, J. N. (1972). Neighbourhood, school and juveniles before courts. British Journal of Criminology 12, 111-32.

Pratt, J. H. (1908). Results obtained in treatment of pulmonary tuberculosis by the class method. British Medical Journal ii, 1070-1.

Pratt, R. T. C. (1951). An investigation of psychiatric aspects of disseminated sclerosis. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and Psychiatry 14, 326-35.

President’s Panel on Mental Retardation (1972). National action to combat mental retardation. United States Government Printing Office, Washington, DC.

Price, J. (1968). The genetics of depressive behaviour. In Recent developments affective disorders (ed. A. Coppen and S. Walk). British Journal of Psychiatry Special Publication No. 2.

Price, L. H., Charney, D. S., and Heninger, G. R. (1985). Efficacy of lithium-tranylcypromine treatment in refractory depression. American Journal of Psychiatry 142,619-23.

Prichard, J. C. (1835). A treatise on insanity. Sherwood Gilbert and Piper, London.

Prien, R. F. and Kupfer, D. J. (1986). Continuation drug therapy for major depressive episodes: how long should it be maintained? American Journal of Psychiatry 143, 18–23.

Prien, R. F., Caffey, E. M., and Glett, C. J. (1972). Comparison of lithium carbonate and chlorpromazine in the treatment of mania. Archives of General Psychiatry 26, 146-53.

Prien, R. F., Caffey, E. M., and Glett, C. J. (1973). Prophylactic efficacy of lithium carbonate in manic depressive illness. Archives of General Psychiatry 28, 337-41.

Prien, R. F., Kupfer, D. J., Mansky, P. A., Small, J. G., Tuason, V. B., Voss, C. B., and Johnson, W. E. (1984). Drug therapy in the prevention of recurrences in unipolar and bipolar affective disorders: report of the NIMH collaborative study group comparing lithium carbonate, imipramine, and lithium carbonate— imipramine combination. Archives of General Psychiatry 41, 1096-104.

Prigatano, G. P., Wright, E. C., and Levin, D. (1984). Quality of life: its predictors in patients with mild hypoxaemia and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Archives of Internal Medicine 144, 1613-19.

Prince, Morton (1908). Dissociation of personality, a biographical study in abnormal psychology. Longmans Green, New York.

Pritchard, M. (1982). Psychological problems in a renal unit. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 27, 512-15.

Pritchard, M. and Graham, P. (1966). An investigation of a group of patients who have attended both the child and adult departments of the same psychiatric hospital. British Journal of Psychiatry 112, 603-12.

Protheroe, C. (1969). Puerperal psychoses: a long term study, 1927–1961. British Journal of Psychiatry 115, 9-30.

Prusoff, B. A., Weissman, M. M., Klerman, G. L., and Rounsaville, B. J. (1980). Research diagnostic criteria subtypes of depression as predictors of differential response to psychotherapy and drug treatment. Archives of General Psychiatry 37, 796–801.

Prys-Williams, G. and Glatt, M. M. (1966). The incidence of longstanding alcoholism in England and Wales. British Journal of Addiction 61, 257-68.

Pugh, R., Jerath, B. K., Schmidt, W. M., and Reed, R. B. (1963). Rates of mental disease related to child bearing. New England Journal of Medicine 22, 1224-8.

Quay, H. C. (1986). Classification. In Psychopathological disorders of childhood (ed. H. C. Quay and J. S. Werry) (3rd edn). John Wiley, New York.

Quay, H. C. and Werry, J. S. (1986). Psychopathological disorders of Childhood (3rd edn). John Wiley, New York.

Querido, A. (1959). Forecast and follow-up. An investigation into the clinical, social and mental factors determining the results of hospital treatment. British Journal of Preventive and Social Medicine 13, 334-9.

Quine, L. (1986). Behaviour problems in severely mentally handicapped children. Psychological Medicine 16, 895–907.

Quitkin, F., Rifkin, A., and Klein, D. (1976). Neurologic soft signs in schizophrenia and character disorders. Archives of General Psychiatry 33, 845-53.

Quitkin, F. M., Rabkin, J. G., Ross, D., and McGrath, P. J. (1984). Duration of antidepressant drug treatment: what is an adequate trial? Archives of General Psychiatry 41, 238-45.

Rachman, S. (1966). Sexual fetishism — an experimental analogue. Psychological Record 16, 293-6.

Rachman, S. (1974). Primary obsessional slowness. Behaviour Research and Therapy 11, 463-71.

Rachman, S. and Hodgson, R. J. (1980). Obsessions and compulsions. Prentice-Hall, New Jersey.

Rachman, S. and Teasdale, J. (1969). Aversion therapy and behaviour disorders: an analysis. Pergamon Press, Oxford.

Radomski, J. K., Fuyat, H. N., Belson, A. A., and Smith, P. K. (1950). The toxic effects, excretion and distribution of lithium chloride. Journal of Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics 100, 429-44.

Radzinowicz, L. (1957). Sexual offences. Macmillan, London.

Radzinowicz, L. and King, J. (1977). The growth of crime. Penguin, Harmondsworth.

Rae, W. A. (1977). Childhood conversion reactions: a review of incidence in pediatric settings. Journal of Clinical Child Psychology 6, 66–72.

Rahe, R. (1973). Subjects recent life changes and the near future illness reports. Annals of Clinical Research 4, 1-16.

Rahe, R., Gunderson, E. K. E., and Arthur, R. J. (1970). Demographic and psychosocial factors in acute illness reporting. Journal of Chronic Diseases 23, 245-55.

Rahe, R. H., McKean, J. D., and Ransom, J. A. (1967). A longitudinal study of life-changes and illness patterns. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 10, 355-66.

Ramsay, A. M. (1973). Benign myalgic encephalomyelitis. British Journal of Psychiatry 122, 618-19.

Rapoport, J. L. (1986). Childhood obsessive compulsive disorders. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 27, 289-95.

Rapoport, R. N. (1960). Community as doctor. Tavistock, London.

Ratcliffe, S. G. (1982). Speech and learning disorders in children with sex chromosome abnormalities. Developmental Medicine and Child Neurology 24, 80-4.

Ratnoff, O. D. (1980). The psychogenic purpuras: a review of autoerythrocyte sensitization to DNA, ’Hysterical’ and facticial bleeding, and the religious stigmata. Seminars in Hematology 17, 192–213.

Rawnsley, K. (1984). Alcoholic doctors. Alcohol and Alcoholism 19, 257-60.

Raynes, N. V. and Sumpton, R. C. (1987). Differences in the quality of residential provision for mentally handicapped people. Psychological Medicine 17, 999-1008.

Razani, J., White, J., Simpson, G., Sloane, R. B., Rebal, R., and Palmer, R. (1983). The safety and efficacy of combined amitriptyline and tranylcypromine antidepressant treatment. Archives of General Psychiatry 40, 657-61.

Razin, A. M. (1982). Psychosocial intervention in coronary artery disease: a review. Psychosomatic Medicine 44, 363-87.

Reed, G. F. and Sedman, G. (1964). Personality and depersonalization under sensory deprivation conditions. Perceptual and Motor Skills 18, 659-60.

Reed, T. E. and Chandler, J. H. (1958). Huntington’s chorea in Michigan. I: Demography and genetics. American Journal of Human Genetics 10, 201-25.

Rees, W. D. and Lutkins, S. G. (1967). Mortality of bereavement. British Medical Journal iv, 13–16.

Reich, J. (1985). The relationship between antisocial behaviour and affective illness. Comprehensive Psychiatry 26, 296–303.

Reich, P. and Gottfried, L. A. (1983). Factitious disorders in a teaching hospital. Annals of Internal Medicine 99, 240-7.

Reich, P., Regestein, Q. R., Murawski, B. J., De Silva, R. A., and Lown, B. (1983). Unrecognized organic mental disorders in survivors of cardiac arrest. American Journal of Psychiatry 140, 1194-7.

Reid, A. H. (1982). The psychiatry of mental handicap. Blackwell, Oxford.

Reid, A. H. and Ballinger, B. R. (1987). Personality disorder in mental handicap. Psychological Medicine 17, 983-7.

Reisberg, B. (1983). Alzheimer’s disease. Collier Macmillan, London.

Reisberg, B., Ferris, S. H., and Gershon, S. (1981). An overview of pharmacologic treatment of cognitive decline in the aged. American Journal of Psychiatry 138, 593–600.

Resnick, P. J. (1969). Child murder by parents. American Journal of Psychiatry 126, 325-34.

Reuler, J. B., Girard, D. E., and Nardone, D. A. (1980). The chronic pain syndrome: misconceptions and management. Annals of Internal Medicine 93, 588-96.

Reynolds, E. H. (1968). Mental effects of anticonvulsants and folic acid metabolism. Brain 91, 197–214.

Reynolds, E. H., Preece, J., and Chanarin, I. (1969). Folic acid and anticonvulsants. Lancet i, 1264-5.

Reynolds, E. H. and Trimble, M. R. (eds.) (1981). Epilepsy and psychiatry. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Reynolds, G. P. (1983). Increased concentration and lateral asymmetry of amygdala dopamine in schizophrenia. Nature 305, 527-9.

Rich, R. F. and Burgess, A. W. (1986). Panel recommends comprehensive program for victims of violent crime. Hospital Community Psychiatry 37, 437-45.

Richards, J. S. (1986). Psychologic adjustment to spinal cord injury during the first post discharge year. Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation 67, 362-3.

Richardson, A. (1973). Stereotactic limbic leucotomy: surgical technique. Postgraduate Medical Journal 49, 860.

Richings, J. S., Khara, G. S., and McDowell, M. (1986). Suicide in young doctors. British Journal of Psychiatry 149, 475-8.

Richman, N., Stevenson, J., and Graham, P. (1982). Preschool to school: a behavioural study. Academic Press, London.

Richman, N., Douglas, J., Hunt, H., Lansdown, R., and Levine, R. (1985). Behavioural methods in the treatment of sleep disorders — a pilot study. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 26, 581-90.

Rickies, N. K. (1950). Exhibitionism. Lippincott, Philadelphia.

Ridges, A. P. (1973). Abnormal metabolites in schizophrenia. In Biochemistry and mental illness (ed. L. L. Iversen and S. P. R. Rose), pp. 175-88. Biochemical Society Special Publication No. 1.

Ridgeway, V. and Mathews, A. (1982). Psychological preparation for surgery: a comparison of methods. British Journal of Clinical Psychology 21, 271-80.

Rimm, D. C. and Masters, J. C. (1974). Behaviour therapy: techniques and empirical findings. Academic Press, New York.

Rimmer, E. M. and Richens, A. (1982). Clinical pharmacology and medical treatment. In A textbook of epilepsy (ed. J. Laidlaw, A. Richens, and J. Oxley) (3rd edn). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Ritson, B. (1977). Alcoholism and suicide. In Alcoholism: new knowledge and new responses (ed. G. Edwards and M. Grant). Croom Helm, London.

Ritson, B. (1982). Helping the problem drinker. British Medical Journal 284, 327-9.

Rivinus, T. M., Jamison, D. L., and Graham, P. J. (1975). Childhood organic neurological disease presenting as psychiatric disorder. Developmental Medicine and Child Neurology 23, 747-60.

Rix, B., Pearson, D. J., and Bentley, S. J. (1984). A psychiatric study of patients with supposed food allergy. British Journal of Psychiatry 145, 121-6.

Roberts, A. H. (1969). Brain damage in boxers. Pitman, London.

Roberts, J. and Hawton, K. (1980). Child abuse and attempted suicide. British Journal of Psychiatry 137, 319-23.

Robin, A. A. and Harris, J. A. (1962). A controlled comparison of imipramine and electroplexy. Journal of Mental Science 108, 217-19.

Robin, A. A. and deTissera, S. A. (1982). A double-blind controlled comparison of the therapeutic effects of low and high energy electroconvulsive therapies. British Journal of Psychiatry 141, 357-66.

Robin, A. A., Binne, C. D., and Copas, J. B. (1985). Electrophysiological and hormonal responses to three types of electroconvulsive therapy. British Journal of Psychiatry 147, 707-12.

Robins, E., Gassner, S., Kayes, J., Wilkinson, R. H., and Murphy, G. E. (1959). The communication of suicidal intent: a study of 134 successful (completed) suicides. American Journal of Psychiatry 115, 724-33.

Robins, L. N. (1966). Deviant children grown up. Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Robins, L. (1970). Follow-up studies investigating childhood disorders. In Psychiatric epidemiology (ed. E. H. Hare and J. K. Wing). Oxford University Press, London.

Robins, L. N. (1978). Sturdy childhood predictors of adult antisocial behaviour: replications from longitudinal studies. Psychological Medicine 8, 611-22.

Robins, L. N. (1979a). Follow-up studies. In Pathological disorders of childhood (ed. H. C. Quay and J. S. Werry), pp. 483–513. Wiley, New York.

Robins, L. N. (1979b). N. I. M. H. diagnostic interview. National Institutes of Mental Health, Bethesda.

Robins, L. N., Davis, D. H., and Goodwin, D. W. (1974). Drug use by the US army enlisted men in Vietnam: a follow-up on their return home. American Journal of Epidemiology 99, 235-49.

Robins, L. N., Helzer, J. E., Ratcliff, K. S., and Seyfried, W. (1982). Validity of the Diagnostic Interview Schedule, version II: DSMIII diagnoses. Psychological Medicine 12, 855-70.

Robins, L. N., Helzer, J. E., Weissman, M. M., Orschavel, H., Gruenberg, E., Burke, J. D., and Regier, D. A. (1984). Lifetime prevalence of specific psychiatric disorder in three sites. Archives of General Psychiatry 41, 949-58.

Robinson, D. (1978). Self-help groups. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 20, 306-11.

Robinson, D. (1979). Talking out of alcoholism: the self-help process of Alcoholics Anonymous. Croom Helm, London.

Robinson, G. E., Stewart, D. E., and Flak, E. (1986a). Rational use of psychotropic drugs in pregnancy and post partum. Canadian Journal of Psychiatry 31, 183-90.

Robinson, R. G., Bolla-Wilson, K., Kaplan, E., Lipsey, J. R., and Price, T. R. (1986b). Depression influences intellectual impairment in stroke patients. British Journal of Psychiatry 148, 541-47.

Robinson, R. G., Kubos, K. L., Storr, L. B., Krisha, R., and Price, T. R. (1984). Mood disorders in stroke patients: importance of location of lesion. Brain 107, 87–94.

Rochford, J. M., Detre, T., Tucker, G. J., and Harrow, M. (1970). Neuropsychological impairments in functional psychiatric disease. Archives of General Psychiatry 22, 114-19.

Rodin, G. M., Johnson, L. E., Garfunkel, P. E., Daneman, D., and Kenshole, A. B. (1986). Eating disorders in female adolescents with insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus. International Journal of Psychiatry in Medicine 16, 49–57.

Rodnight, R., Murray, R. M., Oon, M. C. H., Brockington, I. F., Nicholls, P., and Birley, J. L. T. (1977). Urinary dimethyltryptamine and psychiatric symptomatology and classification. Psychological Medicine 6, 649-57.

Rodrigo, E. K. and Wilhams, P. (1986). Frequency of selfreported ’anxiolytic withdrawal’ symptoms in a group of female students experiencing anxiety. Psychological Medicine 16, 467-72.

Rogers, C. R. and Dymond, R. F. (ed.) (1954). Psychotherapy and personality change. University of Chicago Press.

Rogers, M. and Reich, P. (1986). Psychological intervention with surgical patients: evaluation of outcome. Advances in Psychosomatic Medicine 15, 25–30.

Rogers, S. C. and May, P. M. (1975). A statistical review of controlled trials of imipramine and placebo in the treatment of depressive illness. British Journal of Psychiatry 127, 599–603.

Rollin, H. R. (1969). The mentally abnormal offender and the law. Pergamon, Oxford.

Romans-Clarkson, S. E., Clarkson, J. E., and Dittmer, I. D. (1986). Impact of a handicapped child on mental health of patients. British Medical Journal 293, 1395-417.

Ron, M. A. (1977). Brain damage in chronic alcoholism: a neuropathological, neuro-radiological and psychological review. Psychological Medicine 7, 103-12.

Ron, M. A. (1986a). Volatile solvent abuse; a review of possible long-term neurological, intellectual and psychiatric sequellae. British Journal of Psychiatry 148, 235-6.

Ron, M. A. (1986b). Multiple sclerosis: a psychiatric and psychometric abnormalities. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 30, 3-11.

Ron, M. A., Acker, W., and Lishman, W. A. (1980). Morphological abnormalities in the brains of chronic alcoholics. A clinical, psychological and computerised axial tomographic study. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica Suppl. 286, 51-6.

Ron, M. A., Toone, B. K., Garralda, M. E., and Lishman, W. A. (1979). Diagnostic accuracy in presenile dementia. British Journal of Psychiatry 134, 161-8.

Ron, M. A., Acker, W., Shaw, K. K., and Lishman, W. A. (1982). Computerized tomography of the brain in chronic alcoholism. Brain 105, 497–514.

Rook, A. (1959). Student suicides. British Medical Journal i, 600-3.

Rooth, F. G. (1971). Indecent exposure and exhibitionism. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 5, 521-33.

Rooth, F. G. (1973). Exhibitionism, sexual violence and paedophilia. British Journal of Psychiatry 122, 705-10.

Rooth, F. G. (1980). Exhibitionism: an eclectic approach to its management. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 23, 366-70.

Rooth, F. G. and Marks, I. M. (1974). Persistent exhibitionism: short-term response to aversion self regulation and relaxation treatment. Archives of Sexual Behaviour 3, 227-43.

Rosalki, S. B., Rau, D., Lehmann, D., and Prentice, M. (1970). Determination of serum gamma-glutamyl transpeptidase activity and its clinical applications. American Journal of Clinical Biochemistry 7, 143-7.

Rosanoff, A. J., Handy, L. M., and Rosanoff, I. A. (1934). Criminality and delinquency in twins. Journal of Criminal Law and Criminology 24, 923-34.

Rosanoff, A. J., Handy, L. M., and Plesset, I. R. (1941). The ecology of child behaviour difficulties, juvenile delinquency and adult criminality with special reference to the occurrence in twins. Psychiatric Monograph (California) No. 1. Department of Institutions, Sacramento.

Rosen, B. K. (1981). Suicide pacts: a review. Psychological Medicine 11, 525-33.

Rosen, I. (1979). Exhibitionism, scopophilia and voyeurism. In Sexual deviations (ed. I. Rosen) (2nd edn). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Rosenbaum, M. (1983). Crime and punishment — the suicide pact. Archives of General Psychiatry 40, 979-82.

Rosenham, D. (1973). On being sane in insane places. Science 179, 250-8.

Rosenman, R. H., Brand, R. J., Jenkins, C. D., Friedman, H., Straus, R., and Wurner, H. (1975). Coronary heart disease: a western collaborative group study. Final follow-up experience of eight and a half years. Journal of the American Medical Association 233, 872-7.

Rosenthal, A. and Levine, S. V. (1971). Brief psychotherapy with children: process and therapy. American Journal of Psychiatry 128, 141-5.

Rosenthal, D., Wender, P. H., Kety, S. S., and Welner, J. (1971). The adopted-away offspring of schizophrenics. American Journal of Psychiatry 128, 307-11.

Rosenthal, N. E., Sack, D. A., Gillin, J. C., Lewy, A. J., Goodwin, F. K., Davenport, Y., Mueller, P. S., Newsome, D. A., and Weher, T. A. (1984). Seasonal affective disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry 41, 72–80.

Rosenthal, N. E., Sack, D. A., Carpenter, C. J., Parry, B. L., Mendelson, W. B., Wehr, T. A. (1985). Antidepressant effect of light in seasonal affective disorder. American Journal of Psychiatry 142, 163-70.

Rosenthal, P. A. and Rosenthal, S. (1984). Suicide behaviour by pre-school children. American Journal of Psychiatry 141, 520-5.

Rosenthal, R. and Bigelow, L. B. (1972). Quantitative brain measurements in chronic schizophrenia. British Journal of Psychiatry 121, 259-64.

Rosie, J. S. (1987). Partial hospitalization: a review of recent literature. Hospital and Community Psychiatry 38, 1291-99.

Ross, T. A. (1937). The common neuroses: their treatment by psychotherapy (2nd edn). Edward Arnold, London.

Rosser, A. M. and Guz, A. (1981). Psychological approach to breathlessness and its treatment. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 25, 439-47.

Roth, B., Neusimalova S., and Rechtschaffen, W. L. (1972). Hypersomnia with sleep drunkenness. Archives of General Psychiatry 26, 456-72.

Roth, M. (1955). The natural history of mental disorder in old age. Journal of Mental Science 101, 281–301.

Roth, M. (1959). The phobic anxiety-depersonalization syndrome. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine 52, 587-95.

Roth, M. (1971). Classification and aetiology in mental disorders of old age: some recent developments. In Recent developments in psychogeriatrics (ed. D. W. K. Kay and A. Walk). Headley Brothers, Ashford.

Roth, M. and Ball, J. R. B. (1964). Psychiatric aspects of intersexuality. In Intersexuality in vertebrates including man (ed. C. N. Armstrong and A. J. Marshall). Academic Press, London.

Roth, M. and Bluglass, R. (1985). A postscript on the discussions at the Cambridge Conference on society, psychiatry and the law. In Psychiatry, human rights and the law (ed. M. Roth and R. Bluglass), pp. 228-41. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Roth, M. and Iverson, L. (eds.) (1986). Alzheimer’s disease and related disorders. British Medical Bulletin 42, 1-115.

Roth, M. and Kroll, J. (1987). The reality of mental illness. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Rothman, D. (1971). The discovery of the asylum. Little Brown, Boston.

Rothschild, D. (1942). Neuropathological changes in arteriosclerotic psychosis and their psychiatric significance. Archives of Neurology and Psychiatry, Chicago 48, 417-36.

Rowan, P. R., Paykel, E. S., and Parker, R. P. (1982). Phenelzine and amitriptyline effects on symptoms of neurotic depression. British Journal of Psychiatry 140, 475-83.

Roy, A. (1976). Psychiatric aspects of narcolepsy. British Journal of Psychiatry 128, 562-5.

Roy, A. (1982). Suicide in chronic schizophrenia. British Journal of Psychiatry 141, 171-7.

Roy, A. (1985). Suicide in doctors. Psychiatric Clinics of North America 8, 377-87.

Roy, A. and Bhanji, S. (1976). Sleep deprivation in depression: a review. Postgraduate Medical Journal 52, 50-2.

Royal College of Physicians (1981). Organic mental impairment in the elderly. Report of the College Committee on geriatrics. Journal of the Royal College of Physicians 15, 141-67.

Royal College of Physicians (1984). Medication for the elderly. Journal of the Royal College of Physicians 18, 7-17.

Royal College of Physicians (1987). A great and growing evil: the medical consequences of alcohol abuse. Tavistock, London.

Royal College of Physicians and the British Nutrition Foundation (1984). Food intolerance and food aversion. Journal of the Royal College of Physicians 18, 83-123.

Royal College of Psychiatrists (1977). Memorandum on the use of electroconvulsive therapy. British Journal of Psychiatry 131, 261-72.

Royal College of Psychiatrists (1979). Alcohol and alcoholism. The report of a special committee of the Royal College of Psychiatrists. Tavistock, London.

Royal College of Psychiatrists (1986). Alcohol: our favourite drug: new report on alcohol and alcohol related problems. Tavistock, London.

Rubinow, D. R. and Roy-Byrne, P. (1984). Premenstrual syndromes: overview from a methodologic perspective. American Journal of Psychiatry 141, 163-72.

Rüdin, E. (1916). Studien über Vererbung und Entstehung geistiger Störungen: I. Zur Vererbung und Neuentstehung der Dementia Praecox. Springer, Berlin.

Rüdin, E. (1953). Ein Beitrag zur Frage der Zwangskrankeit, unsbesondere ihrer hereditären Beziehungen. Archiv für Psychiatrie und Nervenkrankheiten 191, 14–54.

Rund, D. A. and Huter, J. C. (1983). Emergency psychiatry. Mosby, St. Louis.

Rush, A. J., Beck, A. T., Kovacs, M., and Hollon, S. (1977). Comparative efficacy of cognitive therapy and imipramine in the treatment of depressed outpatients. Cognitive Therapy and Research 1, 17–31.

Rush, Benjamin (1830). Medical inquiries and observations upon the diseases of the mind (4th edn). Philadelphia.

Russell, G. F. M. (1977). The present status of anorexia nervosa. Psychological Medicine 7, 363-7.

Russell, G. F. M. (1979). Bulimia nervosa: an ominous variant of anorexia nervosa. Psychological Medicine 9, 429-48.

Russell, G. F. M. (1981). The current treatment of anorexia nervosa. British Journal of Psychiatry 138, 164-6.

Russell, O. (1970). Autistic children: infancy to adulthood. Seminars in Psychiatry 2, 435-40.

Russell, O. (1971). Normal psychosexual development. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 11, 259-83.

Russell, O. (1985). Mental handicap. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Rutter, M. (1971). Parent-child separation: psychological effects on the children. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 14, 201-8.

Rutter, M. (1972). Relationships between child and adult psychiatric disorders. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 48, 3-21.

Rutter, M. (ed.) (1980). Scientific foundations of developmental psychiatry. Heinemann, London.

Rutter, M. (1981). Maternal deprivation reassessed. Penguin, Harmondsworth.

Rutter, M. (1982). Syndromes attributed to ’minimal brain dysfunction’ in childhood. American Journal of Psychiatry 139, 21–33.

Rutter, M. (1985a). Infantile autism and other pervasive developmental disorders. In: Child and adolescent psychiatry: modern approaches (eds. M. Rutter and L. Hersov) (2nd edn). Blackwell, Oxford.

Rutter, M. (1985b). Resilience in the face of adversity: protective factors and resistance to psychiatric disorder. British Journal of Psychiatry 147, 598–611.

Rutter, M. (1985c). The treatment of autistic children. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 2, 193–214.

Rutter, M. and Giller, H. (1983). Juvenile delinquency, trends and perspectives. Penguin, Harmondsworth.

Rutter, M. and Gould, M. (1985). Classification. In Child and adolescent psychiatry: modern approaches (ed. M. Rutter and L. Hersov) (2nd edn). Blackwell, Oxford.

Rutter, M. L. and Hersov, L. (1985). Child and adolescent psychiatry. Modern approaches. Blackwell, Oxford.

Rutter, M. and Lockyer, L. (1967). A five to fifteen year follow-up study of infantile psychosis: 1. Description of sample. British Journal of Psychiatry 113, 1169-82.

Rutter, M. and Madge, N. (1976). Cycles of disadvantage: a review of research. Heinemann, London.

Rutter, M., Graham, P., and Birch, H. G. (1970a). A neuropsychiatric study of childhood. Clinics in Developmental Medicine No. 35/36. Heinemann, London.

Rutter, M., Tizard, J., and Whitmore, K. (eds.) (1970b). Education, health and behaviour. Longmans, London.

Rutter, M., Yule, W., Berger, M., Yule, B., Morton, J., and Bagley, C. (1974). Children of West Indian immigrants. I. Rates of behavioural deviance and of psychiatric disorder. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 15,241-62.

Rutter, M., Shaffer, D., and Shepherd, M. (1975a). A multiaxial classification of child psychiatric disorders. World Health Organization, Geneva.

Rutter, M. L., Cox, A., Tupling, C., Berger, M., and Yule, W. (1975b). Attainment and adjustment in two geographical areas: 1. Prevalence of psychiatric disorders. British Journal of Psychiatry 126, 493–509.

Rutter, M., Yule, B. Quinton, D., Rowlands, O., Yule, W., and Berger, N. (1975c). Attainment and adjustment in two geographical areas III: Some factors accounting for area differences. British Journal of Psychiatry 126, 520-33.

Rutter, M., Tizard, J., Yule, W., Graham, P., and Whitmore, K. (1976a). Isle of Wight Studies 1964–1974. Psychological Medicine 6, 313-32.

Rutter, M., Graham, P., Chadwick, O., and Yule, W. (1976b)). Adolescent turmoil: fact or fiction. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 17, 35–56.

Rutter, M., Izard, C., and Read, P. (1986). Depression in young people. Guilford Press, London.

Ryan, N. D. and Puig-Antich, J. (1986). Affective illness in adolescence. American Psychiatric Association Annual Review 5 (eds. A. J. Frances and R. E. Hales). American Psychiatric Association, Washington DC.

Ryan, P. (1979). Residential care for the mentally disabled. In Community care for the mentally disabled (ed. J. K. Wing and R. Olsen). Oxford University Press.

Saario, I., Linnoila, M., and Maki, M. (1975). Interaction of drugs with alcohol on human psychomotor skills related to driving: effects of sleep deprivation or two weeks treatment with hypnotics. Journal of Clinical Pharmacology 15, 52-9.

Sachar, E. J. (1982). Endocrine abnormalities in depression. In Handbook of affective disorders (ed. E. S. Paykel). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Sacks, O. (1973). Awakenings. Duckworth, London.

Saghir, M. T. and Robins, E. (1973). Male and female homosexuality: a comprehensive investigation. Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Sainsbury, P. (1955). Suicide in London. Maudsley Monograph No. 1. Chapman and Hall, London.

Sainsbury, P. (1962). Suicide in later life. Gerontologia Clinica 4, 161-70.

Sainsbury, P. (1986). The epidemiology of suicide. In Suicide (ed. A. Roy). Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Sainsbury, P. and Barraclough, B. (1968). Differences between suicide rates. Nature 220, 1252-3.

St George-Hyslop, P. H. et al. (1987). The genetic defect causing familial Alzheimer’s disease maps on chromosome 21. Science 20, 885-9.

Sakel, M. (1938). The pharmacological shock treatment of schizophrenia. Nervous and Mental Diseases Monograph.

Series No. 62. Nervous and Mental Diseases Publications Co., New York.

Salkovskis, P. M. and Warwick, H. M. C. (1986). Morbid preoccupations, health anxiety and reassurance: a cognitive-behavioural approach to hypochondriasis. Behaviour Research and Therapy 24, 597–602.

Salter, A. (1949). Conditioned reflex therapy. Farrar Strauss, New York.

Sammons, M. T. and Karoly, P. (1987). Psychosocial variables in irritable bowel syndrome: a review and proposal. Clinical Psychology Review 7, 187–204.

Sander, J. W. A. S. and Shorvon, S. D. (1987). Incidence and prevalence studies in epilepsy and their methodological problems: a review. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and Psychiatry 50, 829-39.

Sanders, S. H. (1979). Behavioural assessment and treatment of clinical pain: appraisal of current status. Progress in Behaviour Modification 8, 249-92.

Sandifer, M. G., Hordern, A., Timbury, G. C., and Green, L. M. (1968). Psychiatric diagnosis: a comparative study in North Carolina. British Journal of Psychiatry 114, 1–9.

Sandler, J., Dare, C., and Holder, A. (1970a). Basic psychoanalytic concepts: II. The treatment alliance. British Journal of Psychiatry 116, 555-8.

Sandler, J., Dare, C. and Holder, A. (1970b). Basic psychoanalytic concepts: III. Transference. British Journal of Psychiatry 116, 667-72.

Sandler, J., Dare, C. and Holder, A. (1970c). Basic psychoanalytic concepts: IV. Countertransference. British Journal of Psychiatry 117, 83-8.

Sandler, J., Dare, C. and Holder, A. (1970d). Basic psychoanalytic concepts: V. Resistance. British Journal of Psychiatry 117, 215-21.

Sandler, J., Dare, C. and Holder, A. (1970e). Basic psychoanalytic concepts: VI. Acting out. British Journal of Psychiatry 117, 329-35.

Sargant, W. and Dally, P. (1962). Treatment of anxiety state by antidepressant drugs. British Medical Journal i, 6–9.

Sargant, W. and Slater, E. (1940). Acute war neuroses. Lancet ii, 1–2.

Sargant, W. and Slater, E. (1963). An introduction to physical methods of treatment in psychiatry. Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Sartorius, N., Jablensky, A., Cooper, J. E., and Burke, J. D. (eds.) (1988). Psychiatric classification in an international perspective. British Journal of Psychiatry 152, Suppl. 1.

Satir, V. (1967). Conjoint family therapy. Science and Behaviour Books, Palo Alto.

Saunders, C. (1969). The moment of truth: care of the dying person. In Death and dying (ed. L. Pearson). Case Western Reserve University Press, Cleveland.

Saunders, J. B., Davis, M., and Williams, R. (1981). Do women develop alcoholic liver disease more readily than men? British Medical Journal 282, 1140-3.

Savage, R. L. (1976). Drugs and breast milk. Adverse Drug Reactions Bulletin 61, 212-14.

Scadding, J. G. (1963). Meaning of diagnostic terms in bronchopulmonary disease. British Medical Journal ii, 1425-30.

Schade, D. S., Drumm, D. A., Eaton, R. P., and Sterling, W. A. (1985). Factitious brittle diabetes mellitus. The American Journal of Medicine 78, 777-83.

Schaefer, C. (1979). Childhood encopresis and enuresis. Van Nostrand, New York.

Schaefer, C., Coyne, J. C., and Lazarus, R. S. (1981). The health-related functions of social support. Journal of Behavioral Medicine 4, 381–406.

Schapira, K., Davison, K., and Brierley, H. (1979). The assessment and management of transsexual problems. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 22, 63-9.

Schapira, K., Roth, M., Kerr, T. A., and Gurney, C. (1972). The prognosis of affective disorders. The differentiation of anxiety states from depressive illness. British Journal of Psychiatry 121, 175-81.

Scharfetter, C. (1980). General psychopathology: an introduction (translated from the German by H. Marshall). Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Scheff, T. J. (1963). The role of the mentally ill and the dynamics of mental disorder: a research framework. Sociometry 26, 436-53.

Schilder, P. (1935). The image and appearance of the human body. International Universities Press, New York.

Schizophrenia Bulletin (1987). High risk research. Schizophrenia Bulletin 13, 369–496.

Schmideberg, M. (1947). The treatment of psychopaths and borderline patients. American Journal of Psychotherapy 1, 45–70.

Schmidt, W. and de Lindt, J. E. E. (1972). The causes of death in alcoholics. Quarterly Journal of Studies on Alcoholism 33, 171-85.

Schneider, K. (1950). Psychopathic personalities (translation of 9th edition by M. W. Hamilton). Cassel, London.

Schneider, K. (1959). Clinical psychopathology. Grune and Stratton, New York.

Schooler, N. R., Levine, J., Severe, J. B., Bruazer, B., diMascio, A., Klerman, G., and Tuason, V. B. (1980). Prevention of relapse in schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry 37, 16–24.

Schou, M., Amisden, A., Jensen, S. E., and Olsen, T. (1968). Occurrence of goitre during lithium treatment. British Medical Journal iii, 710-13.

Schreiner-Engel, P., and Schiavi, R. C. (1986). Lifetime psychopathology in individuals with low sexual desire. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 174, 646-51.

Schrenck-Notzing, A. von (1895). The use of hypnosis in psychopathia sexualis with special reference to contrary sexual instinct. Trans. by C. G. Chaddock. The Institute of Research in Hypnosis Publication Society and the Julian Press, New York (1956).

Schulberg, H. C. (1984). The treatment of psychiatric patients in general hospitals: a research agenda and annotated bibliography. National Institutes of Mental Health, Rockville.

Schulsinger, F. (1982). Psychopathy: heredity and environment. International Journal of Mental Health 1, 190–206.

Schultz, J. H. (1932). Das autogene training. Thieme, Liepzig.

Schultz, J. H. and Luthe, W. (1959). Autogenic training: a psychophysiological approach. Grune and Stratton, New York.

Schwartz, M. A. (1973). Pathways of metabolism of diazepines. The benzodiazepines (ed. S. Garrattini, E. Mussini, and L. O. Randall). Raven Press, New York.

Scott, P. D. (1953). Psychiatric reports for magistrates courts. British Journal of Delinquency 4, 82–98.

Scott, P. D. (1957). Homosexuality with special reference to classification. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine 50, 655-9.

Scott, P. D. (1960). The treatment of psychopaths. British Medical Journal i, 1641-6.

Scott, P. D. (1965). The Ganser syndrome. British Journal of Criminology 5, 127-34.

Scott, P. D. (1973). Parents who kill their children. Medicine Science and the Law 13, 120-6.

Scott, P. D. (1977). Assessing dangerousness in criminals. British Journal of Psychiatry 131, 127-42.

Seager, C. P. and Flood, R. A. (1965). Suicide in Bristol. British Journal of Psychiatry 111, 919-32.

Sedler, M. J. (1985). The legacy of Ewald Hecker: a new translation of ’Die Hebephrenie’. American Journal of Psychiatry 142, 1265-71.

Sedman, G. (1966). A phenomenological study of pseudohallucinations and related experiences. British Journal of Psychiatry 113, 1115-21.

Sedman, G. (1970). Theories of depersonalization: a reappraisal. British Journal of Psychiatry 117, 1-14.

Sedvall, G., Farde, L., Persson, A., and Wiesel, F. A. (1986). Imaging of neurotransmitter receptors in the living human brain. Archives of General Psychiatry 43, 995-1005.

Segal, H. (1963). Introduction to the work of Melanie Klein. Heinemann Medical Books, London.

Seguin, E. (1864). Origin of the treatment and training of idiots. In History of mental retardation (ed. M. Rosen, G. R. Clark, and M. S. Kivitz), Vol. 1. University Park Press, Baltimore (1976).

Seguin, E. (1866). Idiocy and its treatment by the physiological method. Brandown, Albany.

Seidel, U., Chadwick, O. F. D., and Rutter, M. L. (1975). Psychological disorder in crippled children: a comparative study of children with and without brain damage. Developmental Medicine and Child Neurology 17, 563-73.

Seligman, M. E. P. (1975). Helplessness: on depression, development and death. Freeman, San Francisco.

Selye, H. (1950). Stress. Acta, Montreal.

Serieux, P. and Capgras, J. (1987). Misinterpretation delusional states (English translation). In The clinical roots of the schizophrenia concept (ed. J. Cutting and M. Shepherd). Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Settle, E. C. (1984). Rapid neuroleptization. In Manual of psychiatric consultation and emergency care (ed. F. Guggenheim and M. Weiner). Jason Aronson, New York.

Shaffer, D. (1974). Suicide in childhood and early adolescence. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 15, 275-91.

Shaffer, D. (1985a). Enuresis. In Child psychiatry: modern approaches (ed. M. Rutter and L. Hersov) (2nd edn). Blackwell, Oxford.

Shaffer, D. (1985b). Brain damage. In Child and adolescent psychiatry: modern approaches, (ed. M. Rutter and L. Hersov) (2nd edn). Blackwell, Oxford.

Shaffer, D., Costello, A. J., and Hill, I. D. (1968). Control of enuresis with imipramine. Archives of Diseases of Childhood 43, 665-71.

Shalev, A. and Munitz, H. (1986). The neuroleptic malignant syndrome; agent and host interaction. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 73, 337-47.

Shannon, F. T., Fergusson, D. M., and Dimond, M. E. (1984). Early hospital admissions and subsequent behaviour problems in six-year-olds. Archives of Diseases of Childhood 59, 815-19.

Shapiro, A. K., Shapiro, E. S., Bruun, R. D., and Street, R. D. (1978). Gilles de la Tourette Syndrome. Raven Press, New York.

Shapiro, D. (1976). The effects of therapeutic conditions: positive results revisited. British Journal of Medical Psychology 49, 315-23.

Shapiro, P. A. and Kornfeld, D. S. (1987). Psychiatric aspects of head and neck cancer surgery. Psychiatric Clinics of North America 10, 87-100.

Sharan, S. N. (1965). Family interaction with schizophrenia and their siblings. Journal of Abnormal Psychology 71, 345-53.

Shaw, P. M. (1979). A comparison of three behaviour therapies in the treatment of social phobias. British Journal of psychiatry 134, 620-3.

Shaw, S. (1980). The causes of increasing drinking problems among women. In Women and alcohol. Tavistock, London.

Sheehan, D. V., Ballenger, J., and Jacobson, G. (1980). Treatment of endogenous anxiety with phobic hysterical and hypochondriacal symptoms. Archives of General Psychiatry 37, 51-9.

Sheldon, W. H., Stevens, S. S., and Tucker, W. B. (1940). The varieties of human physique. Harper, London.

Sheldon, W. H., Stevens, S. S., and Tucker, W. B. (1942). The varieties of temperament. Harper, London.

Shepherd, M. (1961). Morbid jealousy: some clinical and social aspects of a psychiatric symptom. Journal of Mental Science 107, 687–753.

Shepherd, M. (ed.) (1983). Handbook of psychiatry. Vols. 1–5, Cambridge University Press.

Shepherd, M. and Gruenberg, E. M. (1957). The age for neuroses. Millbank Memorial Fund Quarterly 35, 258-65.

Shepherd, M. and Watt, D. C. (1977). Long term treatment with neuroleptics in psychiatry. Current Developments in Psychopharmacology 4, 217-47.

Shepherd, M., Cooper, B., Brown, A. C., and Kalton, G. W. (1966). Psychiatric illness in general practice. Oxford University Press, London.

Shepherd, M., Lader, M., and Rodnight, R. (1968). Clinical psychopharmacology. English Universities Press, London.

Shepherd, M., Harwin, B. G., Depla, C., and Cairns, V. (1979). Social work and primary care of mental disorder. Psychological Medicine 9, 661-70.

Shepherd, M., Wilkinson, G., and Williams, P. (1986). Mental illness in primary care settings. Tavistock, London.

Sheppard, G., Gruzella, J., Manchadra, R., et al. (1983). 150 positron emission tomographic scanning in predominantly never-treated patients. Lancet 2, 1448-52.

Sheppard, N. P., O’Loughlin, S., and Malone, J. P. (1986). Psychogenic skin disease. A review of 35 cases. British Journal of Psychiatry 149, 636-43.

Sherman, R. A., Sherman, C. J., and Bruno, G. M. (1987). Psychological factors influencing chronic phantom limb pain: an analysis of the literature. Pain 28, 285-95.

Shields, J. (1962). Monozygotic twins brought up apart and brought up together. Oxford University Press, London.

Shields, J. (1976). Heredity and environment. In Textbook of human psychology (ed. H. J. Eysenck and G. D. Wilson). MTP, Lancaster.

Shields, J. (1978). Genetics. In Schizophrenia: towards a new synthesis (ed. J. K. Wing). Academic Press, London.

Shields, J. (1980). Genetics and mental development. In Scientific foundations of developmental psychiatry (ed. M. Rutter). Heinemann Medical, London.

Shillito, F. H., Drinker, C. K., and Shaughnessy, T. J. (1936). The problem of nervous and mental sequelae of carbon monoxide poisoning. Journal American Medical Association 106, 669-74.

Shneidman, E. S. (1976). Suicide notes reconsidered. In Suicidology: contemporary developments (ed. E. S. Shneidman), pp. 253-78. Grune and Stratton, New York.

Shneidman, E. S., Farberow, N. L., and Litman, R. E. (1961). The suicide prevention centre. In The cry for help (ed. N. L. Farberow and E. S. Shneidman), pp. 6-118. McGraw-Hill, New York.

Shorvon, H. J., Hill, J. D. N., Burkitt, E., and Hastead, H. (1946). The depersonalization syndrome. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine 39, 779-92.

Showers, J. and Pickrell, E. (1987). Child firesetters: a study of three populations. Hospital and Community Psychiatry 38, 495–501.

Shulman, K. and Post, F. (1980). Bipolar affective disorder in old age. British Journal of Psychiatry 136, 26–32.

Shulman, K. T. (1986). Mania in old age. In Affective disorders in the elderly (ed. E. Murphy). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Shulman, R. (1967). Vitamin B₁₂ deficiency and psychiatric illness. British Journal of Psychiatry 113, 252-6.

Siegelman, M. (1974). Parental background of male homosexuals and heterosexuals. Archives of Sexual Behaviour 3, 3-18.

Sifneos, P. E. (1972). Short-term psychotherapy and emotional crisis. Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts.

Sigurdsson, B. and Gudmundsson, K. B. (1956). Clinical findings six years after an outbreak of Alkureyri disease. Lancet i, 766-8.

Silberfarb, P., Philibert, D., and Levine, P. M. (1980). Psychological aspects of neoplastic disease: II. Affective and cognitive effects of chemotherapy in cancer patients. American Journal of Psychiatry 137, 597–601.

Simmons, R. G., Anderson, C., and Kamstra, L. (1986). Comparison of quality of life on continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis, hemodialysis, and after transplantation. American Journal of Kidney Disease 4, 253-5.

Simon, N. M., Garber, E., and Arieff, A. J. (1977). Persistent nephrogenic diabetes insipidus after lithium carbonate. Annals of Internal Medicine 86, 446-7.

Simons, R. C. and Hughes, C. C. (1985). Culture bound syndromes: folk illnesses of psychiatric and anthropological interest. Reidel, Dordrecht.

Simpson, M. A. (1976). Self mutilation. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 16, 430-8.

Sims, A. (1973). Mortality and neurosis. Lancet ii, 1072-5.

Sims, A. C. P. (1978). Hypothesis linking neuroses with premature mortality. Psychological Medicine 8, 255-63.

Singer, H. S. (1982). Tics and Tourette syndrome. Johns Hopkins Medical Journal 151, 30-5.

Singer, M. T. and Wynne, L. C. (1965). Thought disorder and family relations of schizophrenics: IV. Results and implications. Archives of General Psychiatry 12, 201-12.

Sjöbring, H. (1973). Personality structure and development: a model and its applications. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica Suppl. 244.

Sjögren, T., Sjögren, H., and Lindgren, A. G. H. (1952). Morbus Alzheimer and morbus Pick. A genetic, clinical and patho-anatomical study. Acta Psychiatrica Neurologica Scandinavica Suppl. 82.

Skeels, H. (1966). Adult status of children with contrasting life experiences: a follow-up study. Monograph of the Society for Research into Child Development 31, No. 3.

Skegg, D. C. G., Doll, R., and Perry, J. (1977). Use of medicines in general practice. British Medical Journal i, 1561-3.

Skevington, S. M. (1986). Psychological aspects of pain in rheumatoid arthritis: a review. Social Science and Medicine 23, 567-75.

Skinner, B. F. (1953). Science and human behaviour. Macmillan, New York.

Sklar, L. S. and Anisman, H. (1981). Stress and cancer. Psychological Bulletin 89, 369–406.

Skuse, D. (1985). Non-organic failure to thrive. Archives of Disease in Childhood 60, 173-8.

Skuse, D. and Burrell, S. (1982). A review of solvent abusers and their management by a child psychiatric outpatient service. Human Toxicology 1, 321-9.

Skynner, A. C. R. (1969). Indications for and against conjoint family therapy, International Journal of Social Psychiatry 15, 245-9.

Skynner, A. C. R. (1976). One flesh, separate persons: principles of family and marital psychotherapy. Constable, London.

Skynner, A. C. R. and Brown, D. G. (1981). Referral of patients for psychotherapy. British Medical Journal 282, 1952-5.

Slater, E. (1943). The neurotic constitution: a statistical study of 2000 soldiers. Journal of Neurology and Psychiatry 6, 1-16.

Slater, E. (1951). Evaluation of electric convulsion therapy as compared with conservative methods in depressive states. Journal of Mental Science 97, 567-9.

Slater, E. (1953). Psychotic and neurotic illness in twins. HMSO, London.

Slater, E. (1958). The monogenic theory of schizophrenia. Acta Genetica Statistica Medica 8, 50-6.

Slater, E. (1961). Hysteria 311. Journal of Mental Science 107, 359-81.

Slater, E. (1965). The diagnosis of hysteria. British Medical Journal i, 1395-9.

Slater, E. and Cowie, V. (1971). The genetics of mental disorders. Oxford University Press, London.

Slater, E. and Glithero, E. (1965). A follow-up of patients diagnosed as suffering from hysteria. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 9, 9-13.

Slater, E. and Shields, J. (1969). Genetical aspects of anxiety. In Studies of anxiety (ed. M. H. Lader). British Journal of Psychiatry Special Publication No. 3.

Slater, E., Beard, A. W., and Glithero, E. (1963). The schizophrenia-like psychoses of epilepsy. British Journal of Psychiatry 109, 95-150.

Sloan, F. A., Khakoo, R., Cluff, L. E., and Waldman, R. M. (1979). Impact of infection and allergic disease on the quality of life. Social Science and Medicine 13, 473-82.

Slovenko, R. (1985). Forensic psychiatry. In Comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (ed. H. I. Kaplan and B. J. Sadock) (4th edn). Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Small, G. W. (1986). Pseudocyesis: an overview. Canadian Journal of Psychiatry 31, 452-7.

Small, I. F., Heimburger, R. F., Small, J. G., Milstein, V., and Moore, D. F. (1977). Follow-up of stereotaxic amygdalotomy for seizure and behaviour disorders. Biological Psychiatry 12, 401-11.

Small, J. G., Milstein, V., Klapper, M. H., Kellams, J. J., Miller, M. J., and Small, I. F. (1986). Electroconvulsive therapy in the treatment of manic episodes. In Electroconvulsive therapy: clinical and basic research issues (eds. S. Malitz and H. A. Sackheim). Annals of the New York Academy of Science 462, pp. 37–49.

Smart, R. G. and Cutler, R. E. (1976). The alcohol advertising ban in British Columbia: problems and effects on beverage consumption. British Journal of Addiction 71, 13–21.

Smigman, L. and Perris, C. (1983). Memory functions and prophylactic treatment with lithium. Psychological Medicine 13, 529-36.

Smith, G. R., Hanson, R. A., and Ray, D. C. (1986). Patients with multiple unexplained symptoms. Archives of Internal Medicine 146, 69–72.

Smith, J. C. and Hogan, B. (1983). Criminal law (5th edn). Butterworths, London.

Smith, J. S. and Brandon, S. (1973). Morbidity from acute carbon monoxide poisoning at 3 year follow-up. British Medical Journal i, 318-21.

Smith, M. (1986). Recent work on low level lead exposure and its impact on behaviour, intelligence and learning: a review. Journal of the American Academy of Child Psychiatry 24, 24–32.

Smith, M. L. and Glass, G. V. (1977). Meta-analysis of psychotherapy outcome studies. American Psychologist 32, 752-60.

Smith, R. (1981). Alcohol, women, and the young: the same old problem? British Medical Journal 283, 1170-2.

Smith, R. (1984). The mental health of prisoners. I — How many mentally abnormal offenders? British Medical Journal 288, 308-10.

Smith, R. (1985). Occupationless health. British Medical Journal 291, 1024-7; 1191-5; 1338-41; 1409-12.

Smith, S. L. (1970). School refusal with anxiety: a review of sixty-three cases. Canadian Psychiatric Association Journal 15, 257-64.

Smith, T. (1983). Denmark: the elderly living in style. British Medical Journal 287, 1053-5.

Smith, W. J. (1982). Long term outcome of early onset anorexia nervosa. Journal of American Academy of Child Psychiatry 21, 38–46.

Smoller, J. W., Wadden, T. A., and Stunkard, A. J. (1987). Dieting and depression: a critical review. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 31, 429-40.

Snaith, P. (1981). Clinical neurosis. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Snaith, R. P. and Taylor, C. M. (1985). Irritability: definition, assessment and associated factors. British Journal of Psychiatry 147, 127-36.

Sneddon, I. B. (1983). Simulated disease: problems in diagnosis and management. Journal of the Royal College of Physicians 17, 199–205.

Sneddon, I. B. and Sneddon, J. (1975). Self-inflicted injury: a follow-up study of 43 patients. British Medical Journal iii, 527-30.

Snowden, P. (1985). A survey of the regional secure unit programme. British Journal of Psychiatry 147, 499–507.

Sobell, L. C. and Sobell, M. B. (1973a). A self-feedback technique to monitor drinking behaviour in alcoholics. Behaviour Research and Therapy 11, 237-8.

Sobell, M. B. and Sobell, L. C. (1973b). Alcoholics treated by individualized behaviour therapy: one year treatment outcome. Behaviour Research Therapy 11, 599–618.

Solomon, Z. and Bromet, E. (1982). The role of social factors in affective disorder: an assessment of the vulnerability model of Brown and his colleagues. Psychological Medicine 12, 123-30.

Solyom, L., Beck, P., Solyom, C., and Hugel, R. (1974). Some etiological factors in phobic neurosis. Canadian Psychiatric Association Journal 19, 69–78.

Soothill, K. L. and Pope, P. J. (1973). Arson: a twenty-year cohort study. Medicine, Science and the Law 13, 127-38.

Sourindrin, I. (1985). Solvent abuse. British Medical Journal 290, 94-5.

Sourindrin, I. and Baird, J. A. (1984). Management of solvent abuse: a Glasgow community approach. British Journal of Addiction 79, 227-32.

Southard, E. E. (1910). A study of the dementia praecox group in the light of certain cases showing anomalies or sclerosis in particular brain regions. American Journal of Insanity 67, 119-76.

Sowerby, P. (1977). Balint reassessed. Journal of the Royal College of Practitioners 27, 583-9.

Sox, G. C. (1979). Quality of care by nurse, practitioner and physician and assistants: a ten year perspective. Annals of Internal Medicine 91, 459-68.

Spicer, R. F. (1985). Adolescents. In Oxford textbook of public health (ed. W. Holland, R. Detels, and G. Knox), Vol. 4. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Spitzer, R. L. and Endicott, J. (1968). DIAGNO: a computer programme for psychiatric diagnosis utilizing the differential diagnostic procedures. Archives of General Psychiatry 18, 746-56.

Spitzer, R. L. and Williams, J. B. W. (1985). Classification in psychiatry. In Comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (ed. H. I. Kaplan and B. J. Sadock) (4th edn). Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Spitzer, R. L., Endicott, J. and Robins, E. (1975). Clinical criteria for psychiatric diagnosis and DSM III. American Journal of Psychiatry 132, 1187-92.

Spitzer, R. L., Endicott, J., and Robins, E. (1978). Research diagnostic criteria: rationale and reliability. Archives of General Psychiatry 35, 773-82.

Spitzer, R. L., Endicott, J., and Gibson, M. (1979). Research diagnostic criteria: rationale and reliability. Archives of General Psychiatry 36, 17–24.

Squire, L. R., and Zouzounis, J. A. (1986). ECT and memory: brief pulse versus sine wave. American Journal of Psychiatry 143, 596–601.

Srinivasan, D. P. and Hullin, R. P. (1980). Current concepts of lithium. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 24, 466-75.

Srole, T., Langner, T., Michael, S., Opler, M., and Rennie, T. (1962). Mental health in the metropolis. McGraw-Hill, New York.

Stahl, S. (1986). Tardive dyskinesia: natural history studies assist the pursuit of preventive therapies. Psychological Medicine 16, 491-4.

Stam, H. J., Bultz, B. D., and Pittman, C. A. (1986). Psychosocial problems and interventions in a referred sample of cancer patients. Psychosomatic Medicine 48, 539-47.

Stark, O., Atkins, E., Wolff, O. H., and Douglas, J. W. B. (1981). Longitudinal study of obesity in the national survey of health and development. British Medical Journal 283, 13–17.

Stedeford, A. (1984). Facing death: patients, families and professionals. William Heinemann, London.

Stedeford, A. and Bloch, S. (1979). The psychiatrist in the terminal care unit. British Journal of Psychiatry 135,7-14.

Stein, L. I. and Test, M. A. (1980). An alternative to mental hospital treatment. Archives of General Psychiatry 37, 392-7.

Steinberg, D. (1982). Treatment, training, care or control. British Journal of Psychiatry 141, 306-9.

Stekel, W. (1952). Sexual aberrations; the phenomena of fetishism in relation to sex, 2 Vols (English translation by S. Parker). Vision Press, London.

Stekel, W. (1953). Sadism and masochism, 2 Vols. Liveright, London.

Stengel, E. (1941). On the aetiology of fugue states. Journal of Mental Science 87, 572-99.

Stengel, E. (1945). A study of some clinical aspects of the relationship between obsessional neurosis and psychotic reaction types. Journal of Mental Science 91, 166-87.

Stengel, E. (1952). Enquiries into attempted suicide. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine 45, 613-20.

Stengel, E. (1959). Classification of mental disorders. Bulletin of the World Health Organization 21, 601-63.

Stengel, E. and Cook, N. G. (1958). Attempted suicide: its social significance and effects. Maudsley Monograph No. 4. Chapman and Hall, London.

Stengel, E., Zeitlyn, B. B., and Rayner, E. H. (1958). Post operative psychosis. Journal of Mental Science 104, 389–402.

Stenstedt, A. (1952). A study of manic depressive psychosis: clinical, social and genetic investigations. Acta Psychiatrica et Neurologica Scandinavica Suppl. 79, 3-85.

Stenstedt, A. (1981). Involutional melancholia: an aetiological, clinical and social study of endogenous depression in later life with special reference to genetic factors. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica Suppl. 127.

Stephens, J. H. (1978). Long term prognosis and follow-up in schizophrenia. Schizophrenia Bulletin 4, 25–47.

Steptoe, A. (1981). Psychological factors in cardiovascular disease. Academic Press, London.

Steptoe, A. (1984). Psychological aspects of bronchial asthma. In Contributions to medical psychology 3 (ed. S. Rachman). Pergamon Press, Oxford.

Steptoe, A. (1985). Type-A coronary prone behaviour. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 27, 257-60.

Stern, N. J. and Cleary, P. (1982). The national exercise and heart disease project: long term psychosocial outcome. Archives of Internal Medicine 142, 1093-7.

Stern, R. S., Lipsedge, M. A., and Marks, I. M. (1973). Thought-stopping of neutral and obsessional thoughts: a controlled trial. Behaviour Research and Therapy 11, 659-62.

Stern, Z. A. and Susser, M. (1977). Recent trends in Down’s syndrome. In Research to practice in mental retardation: biomedical aspects (ed. P. Mittler), Vol. III. University Park Press, Baltimore.

Sternbach, R. A. (1986). The psychology of pain (2nd edn). Raven Press, New York.

Stevens, J. (1987). Brief psychoses: do they contribute to the good prognosis and equal prevalence of schizophrenia in developing countries? British Journal of Psychiatry 151, 393-6.

Stevens, J. R. (1966). Psychiatric implications of psychomotor epilepsy. Archives of General Psychiatry 14, 461-71.

Stevenson, J. and Richman, N. (1976). The prevalence of language delay in a population of 3-year-old children and its association with general retardation. Developmental Medicine and Child Neurology 18, 431-41.

Stewart, B. D., Hughes, C., Frank, E., Anderson, B., Kendall, and West D. (1987). The aftermath of rape. Profiles of immediate and delayed treatment seekers. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 175, 90-4.

Stewart, W. F. R. (1978). Sexual fulfillment for the handicapped. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 22, 676-80.

Stimson, G. V., Oppenheimer, E., and Thorley, A. (1978). Seven-year follow-up of heroin addicts. British Medical Journal i, 1190-2.

Stokes, P. E., Stoll, P. M., Shamoian, C. A., and Patton, M. J. (1971). Efficacy of lithium as acute treatment of manic depressive illness. Lancet i, 1319-25.

Stone, A. R., Frank, J. D., Nash, E. H., and Imber, S. D. (1961). An intensive five year follow-up study of treated psychiatric outpatients. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 133, 410-22.

Stone, W. N. and Tieger, M. E. (1971). Screening for T-groups: the myth of healthy candidates. American Journal of Psychiatry 127, 1485-90.

Stores, G. (1978). Antiepileptics (anticonvulsants). In Paediatric psychopharmacology (ed. J. S. Werry). Brunner-Mazel, New York.

Stores, G. (1981). Problems of learning and behaviour in children with epilepsy. In Epilepsy and psychiatry (ed. E. H. Reynolds and M. R. Trimble). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Stores, G. (1986). Psychological aspects of nonconvulsive status epilepticus and children. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 27, 575-82.

Storey, P. B. (1967). Psychiatric sequelae of subarachnoid haemorrhage. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 13, 175-82.

Storey, P. B. (1970). Brain damage and personality change after subarachnoid haemorrhage. British Journal of Psychiatry 117, 129-42.

Stoudemire, A., Cotanch, P., and Laszlo, J. (1984). Recent advances in the pharmacologic and behavioural management of chemotherapy-induced emesis. Archives of Internal Medicine 144, 1029-33.

Strachan, J. G. (1981). Conspicuous firesetting in children. British Journal of Psychiatry 138, 26-9.

Strain, J. J. and Grossman, S. (1975). Psychological care of the medically ill. Appleton-Century-Crofts, New York.

Strassman, R. J. (1984). Adverse reactions to psychedelic drugs. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 172, 577-95.

Strathdee, G. (1987). Primary care — psychiatry interaction: a British perspective. General Hospital Psychiatry 9, 102-10.

Straus, S. K. (1987). EB or not EB — that is the question. Journal of the American Medical Association 257, 2335-6.

Strauss, A. and Lehtinen, V. (1947). Psychopathology and education of the brain-injured child, Vol. 1. Grune and Stratton, New York.

Strauss, J. S. and Carpenter, W. T. (1974). The prediction of outcome of schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry 31, 37–42.

Strauss, J. S. and Carpenter, W. T. (1977). Prediction of outcome in schizophrenia III. Five-year outcome and its predictors. Archives of General Psychiatry 34, 159-63.

Streissguth, A. P., Clarren, S. K., and Jones, K. L. (1985). Natural history of the fetal alcohol syndrome: a 10-year follow-up of eleven patients. Lancet ii, 85–91.

Stroebel, C. F. (1985). Biofeedback and behavioural medicine. In Comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (ed. H. I. Kaplan and B. J. Sadock) (4th edn), pp. 1467-73. Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Strömgren, E. (1968). Psychogenic psychoses. In Themes and variations in European psychiatry (ed. S. R. Hirsch and M. Shepherd), pp. 97-120. Wright, Bristol (1974).

Strömgren, E. (1985). World-wide issues in psychiatric diagnosis and classification and the Scandinavian point of view. In Mental disorders, alcohol and drug related problems. Excerpta Medica, Amsterdam.

Strömgren, E. (1986). The development of the concept of reactive psychoses. Psychopathology 20, 62–67.

Ström-Olsen, R. and Carlisle, S. (1971). Bifrontal stereotactic tractotomy. British Journal of Psychiatry 118, 141-54.

Strunk, R. C., Mrazek, D. A., Fuhimann, G. S. W., and La Breque, J. F. (1985). Physiologic and psychological characteristics associated with death due to asthma in childhood. Journal of the American Medical Association 254, 1193-8.

Strupp, H. H., Hadley, S. W., and Gomes-Schwartz, B. (1977). Psychotherapy for better or worse. Aronson, New York.

Stuart, R. B. (1969). Operant interpersonal treatment for mental disorder. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 33, 675-82.

Stunkard, A. (1980). Obesity. In Comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (ed. H. I. Kaplan, A. M. Freedman, and B. J. Sadock) (3rd edn), Vol. 2. Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Stunkard, A. and McClaren-Hume, M. (1959). The results of treatment for obesity. Archives of Internal Medicine 103, 79–85.

Stunkard, A. J., Foster, G. D., and Grossman, R. T. (1986). Surgical treatment of obesity. Advances in Psychosomatic Medicine 12, 140-66.

Sturgeon, D., Turpin, G., Kuipers, L., Berkowitz, R., and Leff, J. (1984). Psychophysiological responses of schizophrenia patients to high and low expressed emotion relatives: a follow-up study. British Journal of Psychiatry 145, 62-9.

Stürup, G. K. (1968). Treating the ’untreatable’: chronic criminals at Herstedvester. Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore.

Suinn, R. and Richardson, F. (1971). Anxiety management training: a non-specific behaviour therapy programme for anxiety control. Behaviour Therapy 2, 498–510.

Sullivan, C., Grant, M. Q., and Grant, J. D. (1959). The development of interpersonal maturity: applications to delinquency. Psychiatry 20, 373-85.

Sulloway, F. J. (1979). Freud: biologist of the mind. Fontana, London.

Summerskill, W. H. J., Davidson, E. A., Sherlock, S., and Steiner, R. E. (1956). The neuropsychiatric syndrome associated with hepatic cirrhosis and an extensive portal collateral circulation. Quarterly Journal of Medicine 25, 245-66.

Suomi, S. J., Eisele, C. D., Gardy, S. A., and Harlow, H. F. (1975). Depressive behaviour in adult monkeys following separation from family environment. Journal of Abnormal Psychology 84, 576-8.

Surgeon General [US] (1981). Surgeon General’s advice on alcohol and pregnancy. FDA Drug Bulletin 11, 9-10.

Surman, O. S (1978). The surgical patient. In Massachusetts General Hospital handbook of general hospital psychiatry (ed. T. P. Hackett and N. H. Cassem). Mosby, St. Louis.

Surridge, D. (1969). An investigation into some psychiatric aspects of multiple sclerosis. British Journal of Psychiatry 115, 749-64.

Surridge, D. H. C., Erdahl, D. L. W., Lawson, J. S., Donald, M. W., Monga, T. N., Bird, C. E., and Letemendia, F. J. J. (1984). Psychiatric aspects of diabetes mellitus. British Journal of Psychiatry 145, 269-76.

Swan, W. and Wilson, L. J. (1979). Sexual and marital problems in a psychiatric outpatient population. British Journal of Psychiatry 135, 310-15.

Swan-Parente, A. (1982). Psychological problems in a neonatal ITU. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 27, 266-8.

Swartz, M. S. and Blazer, D. G. (1986). The distribution of affective disorders in old age. In Affective disorders in the elderly (ed. E. Murphy). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Swyer, G. I. M. (1985). Post partum mental disturbance and hormone changes. British Medical Journal 290, 1232-3.

Symmers, W. St. C. (1968). Carcinoma ofbreast in transsexual individuals after surgical and hormonal interference with primary and secondary sex characteristics. British Medical Journal ii 83-5.

Symonds, R. L. (1985). Psychiatric aspects of railway fatalities. Psychological Medicine 15, 609-21.

Symonds, A. and Symonds, M. (1985). Karen Homey. In Comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (ed. H. I. Kaplan and B. J. Sadock), Vol. 1, pp. 419-25. Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Szasz, T. S. (1957). Pain and pleasure. A study in bodily, feelings. Basic Books, New York.

Szasz, T. S. (1960). The myth of mental illness. American Psychologist 15, 113-18.

Szasz, T. S. (1976). Schizophrenia: the sacred symbol of psychiatry. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Szmukler, G. I. (1985). The epidemiology of anorexia nervosa and bulimia. Journal of Psychiatric Research 19, 143-53.

Szmukler, G. I. and Russell, G. F. M. (1986). Outcome and prognosis of anorexia nervosa. In Handbook of eating disorders: physiology, psychology and treatment of obesity, anorexia and bulimia (ed. K. D. Brownell, and J. P. Goreyt). Basic Books, New York.

Talbott, J. A. (1985). Community care for the chronically mentally ill. Psychiatric Clinics of North America 8, 437-48.

Talbott, J. A. and Click, I. D. (1986). The inpatient care of the chronically mentally ill. Schizophrenia Bulletin 12, 129-40.

Tan, E., Marks, I. M., and Marset, P. (1971). Bimedial leucotomy in obsessive compulsive neurosis: a controlled serial enquiry. British Journal of Psychiatry 118, 155-64.

Tanguay, P. E. and Cantor, S. L. (1986). Schizophrenia in children. Journal of the American Academy of Child Psychiatry 25, 591-4.

Tansella, M. and Williams, P. (1987). The Italian experience and its implications. Psychological Medicine 17, 283-9.

Tantam, D. (1985). Alternatives to psychiatric hospitalisation. British Journal of Psychiatry 146, 1–4.

Tanzi, R. E. et al. (1987). The genetic defect in familial Alzheimer’s disease is not tightly linked to the amyloid B-protein gene. Nature 329, 156-7.

Tardiff, K. (1987). Violence and the violent patient. In Annual Review, Vol. 6. American Psychiatric Association, Washington DC.

Tarnopolsky, A., and Berelowitz, M. (1987). Borderline personality: a review of recent research. British Journal of Psychiatry 151, 724-34.

Tarnopolsky, A., Watkins, G. V., and Hand, D. J. (1980). Aircraft noise and mental health: I. Prevalence of individual symptoms. Psychological Medicine 10, 683-98.

Tarsh, M. J. and Royston, C. (1985). A follow-up study of accident neurosis. British Journal of Psychiatry 146, 18–25.

Task Force of the American Psychiatric Association (1980). Tardive dyskinesia. American Journal of Psychiatry 137, 163-72.

Tattersall, R. B. (1981). Psychiatric aspects of diabetes — a physician’s view. British Journal of Psychiatry 139, 485-93.

Tattersall, R. B. (1985). Brittle diabetes. British Medical Journal 291, 555-6.

Taylor, C. B., Housten-Miller, N., Ahn, D. K., Haskell, W., and De Busk, R. F. (1986). Effects of an exercise training programme on psychosocial improvement in uncomplicated postmyocardial infarction patients. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 30, 581-7.

Taylor, E. A. (1984). Diet and behaviour. Archives of Disease of Childhood 59, 97-8.

Taylor, E. A. (1986). Childhood hyperactivity. British Journal of Psychiatry 149, 562-73.

Taylor, F. H. (1966). The Henderson therapeutic community. In Psychopathic disorders (ed. M. Craft). Pergamon Press, Oxford.

Taylor, F. K. (1958). A history of group and administrative therapy in Great Britain. British Journal of Medical Psychology 3, 153-73.

Taylor, F. K. (1979). Psychopathology: its causes and symptoms. Quartermaine House, Sunbury on Thames.

Taylor, F. K. (1981). On pseudo-hallucinations. Psychological Medicine 11, 265-72.

Taylor, G. J. (1984). Alexithymia: concept, measurement and implications for treatment. American Journal of Psychiatry 141, 725-32.

Taylor, P. J. (1985). Motives for offending among violent and psychotic men. British Journal of Psychiatry 147, 491-8.

Taylor, P. J. (1986a). The risk of violence in psychotics. Integrative Psychiatry 4, 12–24.

Taylor, P. J. (1986b). Psychiatric disorder in London’s lifesentenced offenders. British Journal of Criminology 26, 63–78.

Taylor, P. J. and Fleminger, J. J. (1980). ECT for schizophrenia. Lancet i, 1380-2.

Taylor, P. J. and Gunn, J. (1984a). Violence and psychosis. I — Risk of violence among psychotic men. British Medical Journal 288, 1945-9.

Taylor, P. J. and Gunn, J. (1984b). Violence and psychosis. II — Effect of psychiatric diagnosis on conviction and sentencing of offenders. British Medical Journal 289, 9-12.

Taylor, P. J. and Kopelman, M. D. (1984). Amnesia for a criminal offence. Psychological Medicine 14, 581-8.

Taylor, P. J. and Parrott, J. M. (1988). Elderly offenders: a study of age-related factors among custodially remanded prisoners. British Journal of Psychiatry 152, 340-6.

Taylor, P. J., Mahandra, B., and Gunn, J. (1983). Erotomania in males. Psychological Medicine 13, 645-50.

Taylor, S. E., Faike, R. L., Shoptow, S. J., and Lichtman, R. R. (1986). Social support, support groups and the cancer patient. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 54, 608-15.

Taylor, S. J. L. and Chave, S. (1964). Mental health and environment. Longman, London.

Teasdale, J. D. (1983). Changes in cognition during depression: psychopathological implications. Journal of the Royal Society of Medicine 76, 1038-44.

Teasdale, J. D. and Bancroft, J. (1977). Manipulation of thought content as a determinant of mood and corrugator electromyographic activity in depressed patients. Journal of Abnormal Psychology 86, 235-41.

Teasdale, J. D. and Fogarty, S. (1979). Differential aspects of induced mood on the retrieval of pleasant events from episodic memory. Journal of Abnormal Psychology 88, 248-57.

Teasdale, J. D., Taylor, R., and Fogarty, S. J. (1980). Effects of induced elation-depression on accessibility of memories of happy and unhappy experiences. Behaviour Research and Therapy 18, 339-46.

Teasdale, J. D., Fennell, M. J. V., Hibbert, G. A., and Amies, P. L. (1984). Cognitive therapy for major depressive disorder in primary care. British Journal of Psychiatry 144, 400-6.

Tellenbach, R. (1975). Typologische Untersuchungen zur prämorbiden Persön-lichkeit von Psychotikem unter besonderer Berucksichtigung manisch-depressiver. Confinia Psychiatrica 18, 1-15.

Temkin, O. (1971). The falling sickness. Johns Hopkins Press, Baltimore.

Tennant, C. (1985). Female vulnerability to depression. Psychological Medicine 15, 733-7.

Tennant, C. (1988). Psychosocial causes of duodenal ulcer. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry 22, 195–201.

Tennant, C. and Bebbington, P. (1978). The social causation of depression: a critique of the work of Brown and his colleagues. Psychological Medicine 8, 565-75.

Tennant, C., Bebbington, P., and Hurry, J. (1981a). The shortterm outcome of neurotic disorders in the community: the relation of remission to clinical factors and to ’neutralizing’ life events. British Journal of Psychiatry 139, 213-20.

Tennant, F. S., Rawson, R. A., and McCann, M. (1981b). Withdrawal from chronic phencyclidine (PCP) dependence with desimipramine. American Journal of Psychiatry 138, 845-6.

Teta, M. J., Del Po, M. C., Kasl, S. V., Meigs, J. W., Myers, M. H., and Muluihill, J. J. (1986). Psychosocial consequences of childhood and adolescent cancer survival. Journal of Chronic Diseases 39, 751-9.

Theander, S. (1970). Anorexia nervosa: a psychiatric investigation of female patients. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica Suppl. 214.

Theander, S. (1985). Outcome and prognosis in anorexia nervosa and bulimia: some results of previous investigations, compared with those of a Swedish long-term study. Journal of Psychiatric Research 19, 493–508.

Theorell, T. and Lind, E. (1973). Systolic blood pressure, serum cholesterol, and smoking in relation to sociological factors and myocardial infarctions. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 17, 327-32.

Thigpen, C. H., Thigpen, H., and Cleckley, H. M. (1957). The three faces of Eve. McGraw-Hill, New York.

Thomas, A., Chess, S., and Birch, H. G. (1968). Temperament and behaviour disorders in children. University Press, New York.

Thomas, A. J. (1981). Acquired deafness and mental health. British Journal of Medical Psychology 54, 219-29.

Thomas, C., Madden, F., and Jehu, D. (1984). Psychosocial morbidity in the first three months following stoma surgery. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 28, 251-7.

Thomas, C., Madden, F., and Jehu, D. (1987). Psychological effects of stomas — I. Psychosocial morbidity one year after surgery. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 31, 311-16.

Thomas, P. K. (1986). Brain atrophy and alcoholism. British Medical Journal 292, 787.

Thompson, W. G. and Heaton, K. W. (1980). Functional bowel disorder in apparently healthy people. Gastroenterology 79, 283-8.

Thorndike, E. L. (1913). Educational psychology, Vol. II. the psychology of learning. Teachers College, Columbia University, New York. [Also Kegan Paul, Trench, and Trubner, London (1923).]

Tienari, P. (1968). Schizophrenia in monozygotic male twins. In The transmission of schizophrenia (ed. D. Rosenthal and S. S. Kety). Pergamon Press, New York.

Tizard, B. (1962). The personality of epileptics: discussion of the evidence. Psychological Bulletin 59, 196–210.

Tizard, J. (1964). Community services for the mentally handicapped. Oxford University Press, London.

Tizard, J. (1968). Social psychiatry and mental subnormality. In Studies in psychiatry (ed. M. Shepherd and D. L. Davies). Oxford University Press, London.

Tizard, J. (1974). Services and evaluation of services. In Mental deficiency: the changing outlook (ed. A. M. Clarke, and A. D. M. Clarke). Methuen, London.

Tizard, J. and Grad, J. C. (1961). Mentally handicapped children and their families. Oxford University Press, London.

Tollison, C. D. and Adams, H. E. (1979). Sexual disorders: treatment, theory and research. Gardner Press, New York.

Tomlinson, B. E., Blessed, G., and Roth, M. (1970). Observations on the brains of demented old people. Journal of the Neurological Sciences 11, 205-42.

Tonks, C. M. (1964). Mental illness in hypothyroid patients. British Journal of Psychiatry 110, 706-10.

Toone, B. (1985). Sexual disorders in epilepsy. In Recent advances in epilepsy 2 (ed. T. A. Pedley and B. S. Meldrum). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Torgersen, S. (1979). The nature and origin of common phobic fears. British Journal of Psychiatry 134, 343-51.

Torgersen, S. (1984). Genetic and nosological aspects of schizotypal and borderline personality disorders: a twin study. Archives of General Psychiatry 41, 546-54.

Touwen, B. C. L. and Prechtl, H. F. R. (1970). The neurological examination of the child with minor nervous dysfunction. Clinics in Developmental Medicine No. 38. Spastics International Medical Publications and William Heinemann Medical, London.

Townsend, P. (1962). The last refuge. Routledge and Kegan Paul, London.

Treiman, D. M. and Delgado-Escueta, A. V. (1983). Violence and epilepsy: a critical review. In Recent advances in epilepsy 1 (ed. T. A. Pedley and B. S. Meldrum), Vol. 1. Churchill, Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Trethowan, W. (1979). Some rare psychiatric disorders. In Current themes in psychiatry, Vol. 2 (ed. R. Gaind and B. Hudson). Macmillan, London.

Trick, K. L. K. and Tennent, T. G. (1981). Forensic psychiatry: an introductory text. Pitman, London.

Trimble, M. R. (1981). Post-traumatic neurosis: from railway spine to the whiplash. Wiley, Chichester.

Trimble, M. R. (1985). Psychiatric and psychological aspects of epilepsy. In The epilepsies (ed. R. J. Porter, and P. L. Marselli). Butterworths, London.

Trimble, M. R. (ed.) (1986). New brain imaging techniques and psychopharmacology. British Association for Psychopharmacology Monograph No. 9. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Trimble, M. and Reynolds, E. H. (1984). Neuropsychiatriс toxicity of anticonvulsant drugs. In: Recent advances in clinical neurology (ed. W. B. Mathews and G. H. Glaser). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Trower, P. E., Bryant, B., and Argyle, M. (1978). Social skills and mental health. Methuen, London.

Truax, C. B. and Carkhuff, R. R. (1967). Towards effective counselling and psychotherapy. Aldine, Chicago.

Tsuang, M. T. (1978). Suicide in schizophrenics, maniсs, depressives and surgical controls. Archives of General Psychiatry 35, 153-5.

Tsuang, M. T. (1980). Genetic issues in epidemiology. Washington University Press, Washington DC.

Tsuang, M. T. and Simpson, J. C. (1984). Schizoaffective disorder: concept and reality. Schizophrenia Bulletin 10, 14–25.

Tsuang, M. T., Woolson, R. F., and Fleming, J. A. (1979). Long-term outcome of major psychosis: I Schizophrenia and affective disorder compared with psychiatrically symptom free surgical controls. Archives of General Psychiatry 36, 1295-301.

Tucker, P. (1986). The bum victim — a review of psychosocial issues. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry 20, 413-20.

Tuckman, J. and Youngman, W. F. (1968). A scale for assessing suicide risk of attempted suicide. Journal of Clinical Psychology 24, 17–19.

Tuke, D. H. (1872). Illustrations of the influence of the mind upon the body in health and disease. J. and A. Churchill, London.

Tuke, D. H. (1892). A dictionary of psychological medicine. J. and A. Churchill, London. Reprinted by Amo Press (1976).

Tuke, S. (1813). description of the retreat (reprinted 1964). Dawson, London.

Tune, L. and Folstein, M. (1986). Post-operative delirium. In Advances in psychosomatic medicine, Vol. 15. Psychological aspects of surgery. Karger, Basel.

Tune, L. E., Folstein, M., Rabins, P., Jayaram, G., and McHugh, P. (1982). Familial manic-depressive illness and familial Parkinson’s disease: a case report. Johns Hopkins Medical Journal 151, 65–70.

Tunving, K. (1985). Psychiatric effects of cannabis use. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 72, 209-17.

Turk, D. C. and Rudy, T. E. (1987). Towards a comprehensive assessment of chronic pain patients. Behaviour Research and Therapy 25, 237-49.

Turner, G. (1982). X-linked mental retardation. Psychological Medicine 12, 471-3.

Turner, R. K. (1973). Conditioning treatment of nocturnal enuresis: present status. In Bladder control and enuresis. Clinics in Developmental Medicine, Nos. 48–49 (ed. I. Kolvin, R. McKeith, and S. R. Meadows). Spastics International Medical Publications and Heinemann, London.

Turner, T. J., and Toller, D. S. (1986). Indications of psychiatric disorder among women admitted to prison. British Medical Journal 292, 651-3.

Twaddle, A. (1972). The concepts of the sick role and illness behaviour. In Advances in psychosomatic medicine, Vol. 8. Psychological aspects of physical illness (ed. Z. J. Lipowski). Karger, Basel.

Tyrer, P. (1976). Towards rational therapy with mono-amine oxidase inhibitors. British Journal of Psychiatry 128, 354-60.

Tyrer, P. and Steinberg, D. (1975). Symptomatic treatment of agoraphobia and social phobias: a follow-up study. British Journal of Psychiatry 127, 163-8.

Tyrer, P., Rutherford, D., and Huggett, T. (1981). Benzodiazepine withdrawal symptoms and propranolol. Lancet i, 520-2.

Tyrer, S. P. (1986). Learned pain behaviour. British Medical Journal 292, 1–2.

Udall, E. T. and Corbett, J. A. (1979). New hospital residential care of adults with mental retardation. In Community care for the mentally disabled (ed. J. K. Wing and R. Olsen). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Unsworth, C. (1987). The politics of mental health legislation. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Urwin, P. and Gibbons, J. L. (1979). Psychiatric diagnosis in self-poisoning patients. Psychological Medicine 9, 501-8.

Vaillant, G. and Perry, J. C. (1985). Personality disorders. In Comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (ed. H. I. Kaplan and B. J. Sadock), Vol. I (4th edn), pp. 958-86. Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Valdiserri, E. V., Carroll, K. R., and Hartl, A. J. (1986). A study of offences committed by psychotic inmates in a county jail. Hospital and Community Psychiatry 37, 163-6.

Valentine, M., Keddie, K., and Dunne, D. (1968). A comparison of techniques of electroconvulsive therapy. British Journal of Psychiatry 114, 989-96.

Van Broeckhoven, C., Genthe, A. M., Vandenberghe, A., et al. (1987). Failure of familial Alzheimer’s disease to segregate with the A4-amyloid gene in several European families. Nature 329, 153-5.

Van der Plate, C. and Aral, S. O. (1987). Psychosocial aspects of genital herpes virus infection. Health Psychology 6, 57–72.

Van Dongen-Melman, J. E. W. M. and Sanders-Woudstra, J. A. R. (1986). Psychosocial aspects of childhood cancer: a review of the literature. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 27, 145-80.

Van Krevelin, D. A. (1971). Early infantile autism and autistic psychopathy. Journal of Autism and Child Schizophrenia 1, 82-6.

Van Loon, F. H. G. (1927). Amok and latah. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 21, 434-44.

Van Praag, H. M. (1982). Neurotransmitters and depression. Part B. catecholamines and depression. In Handbook of psychiatry and endocrinology (ed. P. J. V. Beumont and G. D. Burrows). Elsevier Biomedical, Amsterdam.

Van Praag, H. M. and Korf, J. (1971). Retarded depression and dopamine metabolism. Psychopharmacologia 19, 199–203.

Van Putten, T. and May, P. R. A. (1978). ’Akinetic depression’ in schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry 35,1101-7.

Vaughn, C. E. and Leff, J. P. (1976). The influence of family and social factors at the course of psychiatric illness. British Journal of Psychiatry 129, 125-37.

Vaukhonen, K. (1968). On the pathogenesis of morbid jealousy. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica Suppl. 202.

Veith, I. (1965). Hysteria: the case history of a disease. University of Chicago Press, Chicago.

Veith, R. C., Raskind, M. A., Caldwell, J. H., Barnes, R. F., Gumbrecht, G., and Ritchie, J. L. (1982). Cardiovascular effects of tricyclic antidepressants in depressed patients with chronic heart disease. New England Journal of Medicine 306, 954-9.

Venables, P. M. (1977). The electrodermal physiology of schizophrenics and children at risk for schizophrenia. Schizophrenia Bulletin 3, 28–48.

Venables, P. M. and Wing, J. K. (1962). Level of arousal and the subclassification of schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry 7, 114-19.

Victor, M. (1964). Observations on the amnesic syndrome in man and its anatomical basis. In Brain function: RNA and brain function, memory and learning, Vol. ii (ed. M. A. B. Brazier). University of California Press, Berkeley.

Victor, M. and Adams, R. D. (1953). The effect of alcohol on the nervous system. Proceedings of the Association for Research in Nervous and Mental Diseases 32, 526-73.

Victor, M., Adams, R. D., and Collins, G. H. (1971). The Wernicke-Korsakoff syndrome. Blackwell, Oxford.

Vieweg, W. W. R., David, J. J., Rowe, W. T., Wampler, G. J., Bums, W. J., and Virkunnen, M. (1974). Alcohol as a factor precipitating aggression and conflict behaviour leading to homicide. British Journal of Addiction 69, 149-54.

Vislie, H. (1956). Puerperal mental disorders. Acta Psychiatrica et Neurologica Scandinavica Suppl. 111.

Visotsky, H. M., Hamburg, D. A., Gross, M. E., and Lebovitz B. Z. (1967). Coping behaviour under extreme stress. Archives of General Psychiatry 56, 423-48.

Von Economo, C. (1929). Encephalitis lethargica: Its sequelae and treatment. Translated by Newman, K. O. (1931). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Von Hartitzsch, B., Hoenich, N. A., Leigh, R. J., Wilkinson, R., Frost, T. H., Weddel, A., and Posen, G. A. (1972). Permanent neurological sequelae despite haemodialysis for lithium intoxication. British Medical Journal iv, 757-9.

Von Korff, R., Eaton, W. W., and Keyl, P. M. (1985). The epidemiology of panic attacks and panic disorder: results in three community surveys. American Journal of Epidemiology 122, 970-81.

Wadden, T. A. and Stunkard, A. J. (1985). Social and psychological consequences of obesity. Annals of Internal Medicine 103, 1062-7.

Wadden, T. A., Luborsky, L., Green, S., and Crits-Christoph, P. (1984). The behavioural treatment of essential hypertension: An update and comparison with pharmacological treatment. Clinical Psychology Review 4, 403-29.

Wade, S. T., Legh-Smith, J. and Hewer, R. L. (1986). Effects of living with and looking after survivors of a stroke. British Medical Journal 293, 418-20.

Wadsworth, M. E. J., Butterfield, W. J. H., and Blaney, R. (1972). Health and sickness, the choice of treatment. Tavistock, London.

Wakeling, A. (1979). A general psychiatric approach to sexual deviation. In Sexual deviation (ed. I. Rosen) (2nd edn). Oxford University Press.

Wålinder, J. (1967). Transsexualism: a study of 43 cases. Akademi-förlaget Göteborg.

Wålinder, J. (1968). Transsexualism — definition, prevalence and sex distribution. Acta Psychiatrica et Neurologica Scandinavica Suppl. 203, 255-8.

Wålinder, J. and Thuwe, I. (1977). A study of consanguinity between the parents of transsexuals. British Journal of Psychiatry 131, 73-4.

Walker, N. (1965). Crime and punishment in Britain. Edinburgh University Press.

Walker, N. (1967). Crime and insanity in England, Vol. 1. The historical perspective. Edinburgh University Press.

Walker, N. (1987). Crime and criminology. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Walker, N. and McCabe, S. (1973). Crime and insanity in England, Vol. 2. Edinburgh University Press.

Walker, S., Yesavage, J. A., and Tinklenberg, J. R. (1981). Acute phencyclidine (PCP) intoxication: quantitative urine levels and clinical management. American Journal of Psychiatry 138, 674-5.

Walker, V. and Beech, H. R. (1969). Mood state and the ritualistic behaviour of obsessional patients. British Journal of Psychiatry 115, 1261-3.

Wallace, C., Nelson, C., and Liberman, R. (1980). A review and critique of social skills and training with schizophrenic patients. Social Bulletin 6, 42–63.

Walsh, B. W. and Rosen, P. R. (1985). Self mutilation and contagion: an empirical test. American Journal of Psychiatry 142, 119-20.

Walsh, D. (1982). Alcohol related medicosocial problems and their prevention. (Public Health in Europe, No. 17). World Health Organization, Copenhagen.

Walters, A. (1961). Psychogenic regional pain alias hysterical pain. Brain 84, 1-18.

Walton, D. (1961). Experimental psychology and the treatment of the ticquer. Journal of Child Psychology 2, 148-55.

Walton, J. N. (ed.) (1985). Brain’s diseases of the nervous system (9th edn). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Ward, C. H., Beck, A. T., Mendelson, M., Mock, J. E., and Erbaugh, J. K. (1962). The psychiatric nomenclature. Archives of General Psychiatry 7, 198–205.

Warr, P. and Jackson, P. (1985). Factors influencing the psychological impact of prolonged unemployment and of re-employment. Psychological Medicine 15, 795–808.

Warren, E. W. and Groome, D. H. (1984). Memory test performance under three different waveforms of ECT for depression. British Journal of Psychiatry 144, 370-5.

Warren, M. Q. (1969). The case for differential treatment of delinquents. Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science 381, 47–59.

Warren, M. Q. (1973). Correctional treatment in community settings. Proceedings of the International Congress of Criminology, Madrid.

Warrington, E. K. and Weiskrantz, L. (1970). Amnesic syndrome — consolidation or retrieval? Nature 228, 628-30.

Watanabe, S., Ishino, M., and Otsuki, S. (1975). Double blind comparison of lithium carbonate and imipramine in the treatment of depression. Archives of General Psychiatry 32, 659-68.

Watson, J. B. and Rayner, R. (1920). Conditioned emotional reactions. Journal of Experimental Psychology 3, 1-14.

Watson, J. M. (1982). Solvent abuse: presentation and clinical diagnosis. Human Toxicology 1, 249-56.

Watson, M. (1983). Psychosocial intervention with cancer patients: a review. Psychological Medicine 13, 839-46.

Watt, N. F., Anthony, E. J., Wynne, L. C., and Rolf, J. E. (1984). Children at risk for schizophrenia. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Watts, F. N. and Bennett, D. H (1983). Theory and practice of psychiatric rehabilitation. Wiley, Chichester.

Watzlawick, P., Beam, J. H., and Jackson, D. D. (1968). Pragmatics of human communication. Faber, London.

Weatherall, D. J. (1986). The new genetics and clinical practice (2nd edn). Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Weatherall, D., Ledingham, J. G. G., and Warrell, D. (1987). Oxford textbook of medicine, 2nd edn. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Wechsler, D. (1945). A standardized memory scale for clinical use. Journal of Psychology 19, 87–95.

Wechsler, H., Grosser, G. H., and Greenblatt, M. (1965). Research evaluating antidepressant medications on hospitalized mental patients: a survey of published reports during a five year period. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 141, 231-9.

Weeks, D., Freeman, C. P. L., and Kendell, R. E. (1980). E.C.T.: III Enduring cognitive deficits. British Journal of Psychiatry 137, 26–37.

Weeks, H. A. (1958). The Highfields project and its success. In The sociology of punishment and correction (ed. N. Johnston, L. Savitz, and M. W. Wolfgang). Wiley, New York.

Wehr, T. A., Jacobsen, F. M., Arendt, J., Tamarkin, L., and Rosenthal, N. E. (1986). Phototherapy of seasonal affective disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry 43, 870-7.

Weighill, V. E. (1983). Compensation neurosis: A review of the literature. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 27, 97-104.

Weinberger, D. R. and Kleinman, J. E. (1986). Observations on the brain in schizophrenia. Psychiatry update: the American Psychiatric Association Annual Review, Vol. 5 (ed. A. J. Frances and R. E. Hales). American Psychiatric Press, Washington DC.

Weinberger, D. R., Bigelow, L. B., Kleinman, J. E., Klein, S. T., Rosenblatt, J. E., and Wyatt, R. J. (1980a). Cerebral ventricular enlargement in chronic schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry 37, 11–13.

Weinberger, D. R., Cannon-Spoor, E., Potkin, S. G., and Wyatt, R. J. (1980b). Poor premorbid adjustment and CT scan abnormalities in chronic schizophrenia. American Journal of Psychiatry 137, 1410-13.

Weinberger, D. R., Cannon-Spoor, E., and Potkin, S. G. (1981). Familial aspects of CT scan abnormalities in chronic schizophrenic patients. Psychological Research 4, 65–71.

Weiner, H. (1977). Psychobiology and human disease. Elsevier, New York.

Weinstein, E. A. and Kahn, R. L. (1955). Denial of illness: symbolic and physiological aspects. Thomas, Springfield, Ill.

Weinstein, M. R. (1980). Lithium treatment of women during pregnancy and in the post delivery period. In Handbook of lithium therapy (ed. F. N. Johnson) (2nd edn), pp. 421 -9. MTP, Lancaster.

Weiss, E. M. and Berg, R. F. (1982). Child victims of sexual assault: impact of court procedures. Journal of the American Academy of Child Psychiatry 21, 513-18.

Weiss, S. M., Krantz, D. S., and Mathews, K. A. (1984). Coronary prone behaviour. In Recent advances in cardiology, Vol. 9. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Weissman, A. D. (1974). The epidemiology of suicide attempts. 1960–1971. Archives of General Psychiatry 30, 737-46.

Weissman, M. M. and Boyd, J. H. (1985). Affective disorders: epidemiology. In Comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (ed. H. I. Kaplan and B. J. Sadock) (4th edn), Vol. I, pp. 764-9. Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Weissman, M. M. and Klerman, G. L. (1978). Epidemiology of mental disorder: emerging trends in the U. S. Archives of General Psychiatry 35, 705-12.

Weissman, M. M. and Merikangas, K. R. (1986). The epidemiology of anxiety and panic disorders. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry 47 (Suppl.), 11–17.

Weissman, M. and Slaby, A. (1973). Oral contraceptives and psychiatric disturbance: evidence from research. British Journal of Psychiatry 123, 513-18.

Weissman, M., Pottenger, M., Kleber, H., Ruben, H. L., Williams, D., and Thompson, W. D. (1977). Symptom patterns in primary and secondary depression: a comparison of primary depressives, with depressed opiate addicts, alcoholics and schizophrenics. Archives of General Psychiatry 34, 854-62.

Weissman, M., Prusoff, B. A., DiMascio, A., Neu, C., Goklaney, M., and Klerman, G. L. (1979). The efficacy of drugs and psychotherapy in the treatment of acute depressive episodes. American Journal of Psychiatry 136, 555-8.

Weissman, M. M., Merikangas, K. R., John, K., Wickramaratne, P., Prusoff, B. A. and Kidd, K. K. (1986). Familygenetic studies of psychiatric disorders. Archives of General Psychiatry 43, 1104-16.

Welch, C. A. (1981). Psychiatric medicine and the bum patient. In Psychiatric medicine update: Massachusetts General Hospital reviews for physicians (ed. T. C. Manschrek). Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Wells, C. E. (1978). Chronic brain disease: an overview. American Journal of Psychiatry 135, 1-12.

Welner, J. and Strömgren, E. (1958). Clinical and genetic studies on benign schizophreniform psychoses based on a follow-up. Acta Psychiatrica Neurologica Scandinavica 33, 377-99.

Wender, P., Rosenthal, D., Kety, S. S., Schulsinger, F., and Welner, J. (1974). Cross-fostering: a research strategy for clarifying the role of genetic and experimental factors in the aetiology of schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry 30, 121-8.

Wender, P. H., Kety, S. S., Rosenthal, D., Schulsinger, F., Ortmann, J., and Lunde, I. (1986). Psychiatric disorder in the biological and adoptive families of adopted individuals with affective disorders. Archives of General Psychiatry 43, 923-9.

Wernicke, C. (1881). Lehrbuch der Gehirnkrankheiten, part 2, p. 229. Kassel, Berlin.

Wernicke, C. (1900). Grundriss der Psychiatrie. George Thieme, Leipzig.

West, D. (1965). Murder followed by suicide. Heinemann, London.

West, D. (1974). Criminology, deviant behaviour and mental disorder. Psychological Medicine 4, 1–3.

West, D. (1977). Delinquency. In Child psychiatry. Modern approaches (ed. M. Rutter and L. Hersov). Blackwell, Oxford.

West, D. and Farrington, D. P. (1973). Who becomes delinquent? Heinemann Educational, London.

West D. and Farrington, D. P. (1977). The delinquent way of life. Heinemann, London.

West, D. and Walk, A. (eds.) (1977). Daniel McNaughton: his trial and aftermath. Gaskell Books, Ashford, Kent.

West, E. D. (1981). Electric convulsion therapy in depression: a double blind controlled trial. British Medical Journal 282, 355-7.

Wexler, L., Weissman, N. M., and Kasl, S. V. (1978). Suicide attempts 1970-75. Updating a United States study and comparisons with international trends. British Journal of Psychiatry 132, 180-5.

Whalley, L. J., Borthwick, N., Copolov, D., Dick, H., Christie, J. E., and Fink, G. (1986). Corticosteroid receptors and depression. British Medical Journal 292, 859-61.

Whalley, L. J., Carothers, A. D., Collyer, S., DeMey, R., and Frackiewicz, A. (1982a). A study of familial factors in Alzheimer’s disease. British Journal of Psychiatry 140, 249-56.

Whalley, L. J., Rosie, R., Dick, H., Levy, G., Watts, A. G., Sheward, W. J., Christie, J. E., and Fink, G. (1982b). Immediate increases in plasma prolactin and neurophysin but not other hormones after electroconvulsive therapy. Lancet ii, 1064-8.

Wheeler, E. O., White, P. D., Reed, E. W., and Cohen, M. E. (1950). Neurocirculatory asthenia (anxiety neurosis, effort syndrome, neurasthenia). A twenty year follow-up of one hundred and seventy three patients. Journal of the American Medical Association 142, 878-89.

Wheeler, K., Leiper, A. D., Jannoun, L., and Chessells, J. M. (1988). Medical cost of curing childhood acute lymphoblastic leukaemia. British Medical Journal 296, 162-6.

White, K. and Simpson, G. (1981). Combined MAOI-tricyclic antidepressant treatment: a re-evaluation. Journal of Clinical Psychopharmacology 1, 264-82.

Whitehead, A. (1984). Psychological intervention in dementia. In Handbook of studies on psychiatry and old age (ed. D. W. K. Kay and G. B. Burrows). Elsevier, Amsterdam.

Whitehorn, J. C. and Betz, B. J. (1954). A study of psychotherapeutic relationship between physicians and schizophrenic patients. American Journal of Psychiatry 111, 321-31.

Whitehouse, P. J. (1986). The concept of subcortical and cortical dementia: another look. Annals of Neurology 19, 1–6.

Whiteley, J., Stuart, J., and Gordon, J. (1979). Group approaches in psychiatry. Routledge and Kegan Paul, London.

Whiteley, S. (1975). The psychopath and his treatment. In Contemporary psychiatry (ed. T. Silverstone and R. B. Barraclough). British Journal of Psychiatry Special Publication No. 9.

Whitlock, F. (1961). The Ganser syndrome. British Journal of Psychiatry 113, 19–29.

Whitlock, F. (1963). Criminal responsibility. Butterworths, London.

Whitlock, F. (1973a). Suicide in England and Wales 1959–1963. Part 1. The county boroughs. Psychological Medicine 3, 350-65.

Whitlock, F. (1973b). Suicide in England and Wales 1959–1963. Part 2, London. Psychological Medicine 3, 411-20.

Whitlock, F. (1976). Psychological aspects of skin disease. Saunders, London.

Whitlock, F. A. (1982). Symptomatic affective disorders. Academic Press, London.

Whitlock, F. A. (1986a). Suicide and physical illness. In Suicide (ed. A. Roy). Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.

Whitlock, F. A. (1986b). The psychiatric complication of Parkinson’s disease. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry 20, 114-21.

Whybrow, P. C. and Hurwitz, T. (1976). Psychological disturbances associated with endocrine disease and hormone therapy. In Hormones, behaviour and psychopathology (ed. E. J. Sachar). Raven Press, New York.

Wilkin, D. (1979). Caring for the mentally handicapped child. Croom Helm, London.

Wilkin, D., Evans, G., Hughes, B., and Jolley, D. (1982). The implications of managing confused and disabled people in non-specialist residential homes for the elderly. Health Trends 14, 98-100.

Wilkin, D., Hughes, B. and Jolley, D. J. (1985). Quality of care in institutions. In Recent advances in psychogeriatrics. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.

Wilkins, R. H. (1974). The hidden alcoholic in general practice. A method of detection using a questionnaire. Elek Science, London.

Wilkinson, G. (1987). The influence of psychiatric, psychological and social factors on the control of insulin dependent diabetes mellitus. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 31, 277-86.

Wilkinson, G. and Pelosi, A. J. (1987). The economics of mental health services. British Medical Journal 294, 139-40.

Williams, D. (1969). Neural factors related to habitual aggression: consideration of the differences between those habitual aggressive and others who have committed crimes of violence. Brain 92, 503-20.

Williams, J. B. W. (1985). The multiaxial system of DSMIII: where did it come from and where should it go? Archives of General Psychiatry 42, 175-86.

Williams, J. B. W. and Spitzer, R. L. (1982). Idiopathic pain disorder: a critique of pain-prone disorder and a proposal for a revision of the DSMIII category psychogenic pain disorder. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disorders 170, 415-19.

Williams, R. and Davis, M. (1977). Alcohol liver injury. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine 70, 33-6.

Williamson, J., Stokoe, I. H., Gray, S., Fisher, M., Smith, A., McGhee, A., and Stephenson, E. (1964). Old people at home: their unreported needs. Lancet i, 1117-20.

Williamson, P. D. and Spencer, S. S. (1986). Clinical and EEG features of complex partial seizures of extra temporal origin. Epilepsia. Suppl. 2, 546-63.

Willner, A. E. and Rabiner, C. J. (1979). Psychopathology and cognitive dysfunction five years after open heart surgery. Comprehensive Psychiatry 20, 409-18.

Wilson, G. D. (1981). Love and instinct. Temple Smith, London.

Wilson, P. (1980). Survey of drinking in England and Wales. Office of population censuses and surveys. HMSO, London.

Wilson, S. (1978). The effect of treatment in a therapeutic community on intravenous drug abuse. British Journal of Addiction 73, 407-11.

Wilson, S. and Mandelbrote, B. (1978). The relationship between duration of treatment in a therapeutic community for drug abusers and subsequent criminality. British Journal of Psychiatry 132, 487-91.

Wimmer, A. (1916). Psykogene sindssygdomsformer. [Psychogenic varieties of mental diseases.] In St. Hans Hospital 1816–1916. Jubilee Publication, pp. 85-216. Gad, Copenhagen.

Wing, J. K. (1978). Schizophrenia. Towards a new synthesis. Academic Press, London.

Wing, J. K. (ed.) (1982). Long term community care: experience in a London Borough. Psychological Medicine Monograph Suppl. No. 2.

Wing, J. K. (1986). The cycle of planning and evaluation. In The provision of mental health services in Britain: the way ahead (ed. G. Wilkinson and H. Freeman). Gaskell, London.

Wing, J. K. and Brown, G. W. (1970). Institutionalism and schizophrenia. Cambridge University Press, London.

Wing, J. K. and Fryers, T. (1976). Psychiatric services in Camberwell and Salford. MRC Social Psychiatry Unit, London.

Wing, J. K. and Furlong, R. (1986). A haven for the severely disabled within the context of a comprehensive psychiatric community service. British Journal of Psychiatry 149, 449-57.

Wing, J. K. and Hailey, A. M. (ed). (1972). Evaluating a community psychiatric service. Oxford University Press, London.

Wing, J. K. and Morris, B. (1981). Handbook of rehabilitation practice. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Wing, J. K. and Olsen, R. (1979). Community care for the mentally disabled. Oxford University Press, London.

Wing, J. K., Bennett, D. H., and Denham, J. (1964). The industrial rehabilitation of long stay psychiatric patients. Medical Research Council Memorandum. No. 42. HMSO, London.

Wing, J. K., Cooper, J. E., and Sartorius, N. (1974). Measurement and classification of psychiatric symptoms. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Wing, R. R., Epstein, L. H., Nowalk, M. P., and Lampaski, D. M. (1986). Behavioural self-regulation in the treatment of patients with diabetes mellitus. Psychological Bulletin 99, 78–89.

Winickoff, R. N. and Murphy, P. K. (1987). The persistent problem of poor blood pressure control. Archives of Internal Medicine 147, 1393-6.

Winokur, G., Cardoret, R., Dorzab, J., and Baker, M. (1971). Depressive disease: a genetic study. Archives of General Psychiatry 24, 135-44.

Winterborn, M. H. (1987). Growing up with chronic renal failure. British Medical Journal 295, 870.

Witkin, H. A., Mednick, S. A., and Schulsinger, F. (1976). Criminality and XYY and XXY man. Science 193, 547-8.

Witte, R. A. (1985). The psychosocial impact of a progressive physical handicap and terminal illness. (Duchenne muscular dystrophy) on adolescents and the families. British Journal Medical Psychology 58, 179-87.

Witzig, J. S. (1968). The group treatment of male exhibitionists. American Journal of Psychiatry 125, 179-85.

Woerner, M. G., Pollack, M., and Klein, D. F. (1973). Pregnancy and birth complications in psychiatric patients: a comparison of schizophrenic and personality disorder patients with their siblings. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 49, 712-21.

Wolberg, L. R. (1948). Medical hypnosis. Grune and Stratton, New York.

Wolberg, L. R. (1977). The techniques of psychotherapy. Grune and Stratton, New York.

Wolf, S. and Wolff, H. G. (1947). Human gastric function. Oxford University Press, New York.

Wolfe, D. A. (1985). Child abusive parents: an empirical review and analysis. Psychological Bulletin 97, 462-82.

Wolfe, F. (1986). The clinical syndrome of fibrositis. American Journal of Medicine 81 (Suppl. 3A), 7.

Wolfensberger, W. (1980). The definition of normalisation— update, problems, disagreements, and misunderstandings. In Normalisation, social integration and community services (ed. R. J. Flynn and K. E. Nitsch). University Park Press, Baltimore.

Wolff, C. (1971). Love between women. Duckworth, London.

Wolff, H. G. (1962). A concept of disease in man. Psychosomatic Medicine 24, 25–30.

Wolff, H. G. and Curran, D. (1935). Nature of delirium and allied states. Archives of Neurology and Psychiatry 35, 1175-215.

Wolff, S. (1961). Symptomatology and outcome of preschool children with behaviour disorders attending a child guidance clinic. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry 2, 269-76.

Wolkind, S. and Zajicek, E. (1981). Pregnancy — a psychological and social study. Academic Press, London.

Wolpe, J. (1958). Psychotherapy by reciprocal inhibition. Stanford University Press, Stanford.

Wong, D. F., Wagner, H. N., Tune, L. E., et al. (1986). Positron emission tomography reveals elevated D₂ dopamine receptors in drug-naive schizophrenics. Science 234, 1558-63.

Wood, P. (1941). Da Costa’s syndrome (or effort syndrome). British Medical Journal 1, 767-74; 805-11; 846-51.

Woodruff, R. A., Guze, S. B., Clayton, P. J., and Carr, D. (1973). Alcoholism and depression. Archives of General Psychiatry 28, 97-100.

Woods, R. (1982). The psychology of ageing. In The psychiatry of late life. (ed. R. Levy and F. Post). Blackwell, Oxford.

Wooff, K., Goldberg, D. P., and Fryers, T. (1986). Patients in receipt of community psychiatric nursing care in Salford 1976-82. Psychological Medicine 16, 407-14.

Woolley, D. W. and Shaw, E. (1954). A biochemical and pharmacological suggestion about certain mental disorders. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 40, 228-31.

Woolston, J. L. (1987). Obesity in infancy and early childhood. American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry 20, 123-60.

Wootton, B. (1959). Social science and social pathology. Chapter 7, pp. 203-26. George Allen and Unwin, London.

Worden, J. W. and Weissman, A. D. (1984). Preventive psychosocial intervention with newly diagnosed cancer patients. General Hospital Psychiatry 6, 243-9.

World Health Organization (1973). Report of the International Pilot Study of Schizophrenia, Vol. 1. World Health Organization, Geneva.

World Health Organization (1978). Mental disorders: glossary and guide to their classification in accordance with the ninth revision of the International Classification of Diseases. World Health Organization, Geneva.

World Health Organization (1979). Schizophrenia: an initial follow-up. Wiley, Chichester.

World Health Organization (1980). Changing patterns inmental health care. Euro Reports and Studies 25. World Health Organization, Copenhagen.

World Health Organization (1981). Current state of diagnosis and classification in the mental health field. World Health Organization, Geneva.

World Health Organization (1984). Mental health care in developing countries: a critical appraisal of research findings. Technical Report Series 698. World Health Organization, Geneva.

World Health Organization (1987). ICD-10, 1986 Draft of Chapter V. Mental behavioural and developmental disorders. World Health Organization, Geneva.

Worrall, E. P., Moody, P. J., Peet, M., Dick, P., Smith, A., Chambers, C., Adams, M., and Naylor, G. J. (1979). Controlled studies of the antidepressant effects of lithium. British Journal of Psychiatry 135, 255-62.

Wright, J., Perreault, R., and Mathieu, M. (1977). The treatment of sexual dysfunction: a review. Archives of General Psychiatry 34, 881-90.

Wyant, G. M. and MacDonald, W. B. (1980). The role of atropine in electroconvulsive therapy. Anaesthesia and Intensive Care 8, 445-50.

Wyke, T. (1980). Language and schizophrenia. Psychological Medicine 10, 403-6.

Wyke, T. (1982). A hostel ward for ’new’ long stay patients: an evaluative study of ’a ward in a house’. Psychological Medicine 2, 15–27.

Wynne, L. C. (1981). Current concepts about schizophrenics and family relationships. The Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 169, 82-9.

Wynne, L. C. and Singer, M. T. (1963). Thought disorder and family relationships of schizophrenics: II. A classification of forms of thinking. Archives of General Psychiatry 9, 199–206.

Wynne, L. C., Ryckoff, I., Day, J., and Hirsch, S. (1958). Pseudomutuality in the family relations of schizophrenics. Psychiatry 21, 205-20.

Yalom, I. (1980). Existential psychotherapy. Basic Books, New York.

Yalom, I. D. (1985). The theory and practice of group psychotherapy (3rd edn). Basic Books, New York.

Yalom, I., Hovts, P. S., Newell, G., and Rand, K. H. (1967). Preparation of patients for group therapy. Archives of General Psychiatry 17, 416-27.

Yalom, I., Linde, D., Moos, R. M., and Hamburg, D. A. (1968). ’Post partum blues’ syndrome. A description and related variables. Archives of General Psychiatry 18, 16–27.

Yap, P. M. (1951). Mental diseases peculiar to certain cultures: a survey of comparative psychiatry. Journal of Mental Science 97, 313-27.

Yap, P. M. (1965). Koro — a culture-bond depersonalization syndrome. British Journal of Psychiatry 111, 43–50.

Yap, P. M., Green, R., and Fisk, N. (1973). Prenatal exposure to female hormones: effects on the psychosexual development of boys. Archives of General Psychiatry 28, 554-61.

Yardley, K. M. (1976). Training in feminine skills in a male transsexual: preoperative procedure. British Journal of Medical Psychology 49, 329-39.

Yates, W. R., Jacoby, C. G., and Andreasen, N. C. (1987). Cerebellar atrophy in schizophrenia and affective disorder. The American Journal of Psychiatty 144, 465-7.

Young, J. P. R., Lader, M. H., and Hughes, W. C. (1979). Controlled trial of trimipramine, monamine oxidase inhibitors and combined treatment in depressed outpatients. British Medical Journal 2, 1315-17.

Young, R. J. and Clarke, B. F. (1985). Pain relief and diabetic neuropathy: the effectiveness of imipramine and related drugs. Diabetic Medicine 2, 363-6.

Young, W., Goy, R., and Phoenix, C. (1964). Hormones and sexual behaviour. Science 143, 212-18.

Yule, W. (1967). Predicting reading ages on Neale’s analysis of reading ability. British Journal of Educational Psychology 37, 252-5.

Yule, W. and Carr, J. (1980). Behaviour modification for the mentally handicapped. Croom Helm, London.

Yule, W. and Rutter, M. (1985). Reading and other learning difficulties. In Child and adolescent psychiatry. Modern approaches (2nd edn). (ed. M. Rutter and L. Hersov). Blackwell, Oxford.

Zall, H., Therman, P. -O. G., and Myers, J. M. (1968). Lithium carbonate: a clinical study. American Journal of Psychiatry 125, 549-55.

Zeitlin, H. (1986). The natural history of psychiatric disorder in children. Maudsley Monograph No. 29. Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Zerssen, D. von (1976). Physique and personality. In Human behaviour genetics (ed. A. R. Kaplan), pp. 230-78. Thomas, Springfield, Ill.

Zimberg, S. (1983). Alcohol problems in the elderly. Journal of Psychiatric Treatment and Evaluation 5, 515-20.

Zitrin, C. M., Klein, D. F., and Woemer, M. G. (1978). Behaviour therapy, supportive psychotherapy, imipramine and phobias. Archives of General Psychiatry 35, 307-16.

Zitrin, C. M., Klein, D. F., Woemer, M. G., and Ross, D. C. (1983). Treatment of phobias: I. Comparison of imipramine hydrochloride and placebo. Archives of General Psychiatry 40, 125-38.

Zola, I. (1966). Culture and symptoms — an analysis of patients persistent complaints. American Sociological Review 31, 615-30.

Zuger, B. (1984). Early effeminate behaviour in boys: outcome and significance for homosexuality. Journal of Nervous and Mental Diseases 172, 90-7.